The expanding case for the UFO

From the craters of the moon,
^^from the jungle-hidden cities of pre-history,

from the world's scattered Pygmy tribes,
and from the columns of yesterday's newspaper

comes new and thought-provoking evidence

fW Mm Mm MM /#

for the existence of

SPACE LIFE

author

•OrriCIAl US COV IK hi MINI P/Mf.K AVION fOV UNH'tNiiHl i> n>/M. 0 tlJlCfS

/V/

THREE GREAT BOOKS
ON UNIDENTIFIED FLYING OBJECTS
By M. K. JESSUP

Author of

THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

THE CASE FOR THE UFO

A comprehensive study of a new and exciting field of knowledge: the
appearance of space-navigable bodies. Included among the events and
phenomena described and analyzed in this book are the appearance of
Hying saucers; disappearing people and ships, planes and crews; mysterious
marks and imprints left in snow, sand and stone by hitherto unrecognized
agencies, meteors, etc.

"... the most informative of the 'flying saucer' books to date!'

—New York Journal-American

240 pages Illustrated $3.50

THE UFO ANNUAL

A world-wide report on all the important sightings of Flying Saucers and
other unidentified flying objects during a single year. Thoughtful readers
will draw their own conclusions from such documented entries in the
Annual as the "angel hair" epidemic in upstate New York and the
"cloth" from the skies that burned a hole in the pavement at Harrisburg.
Pa. Over 200 sightings described.

"If you're an armchair saucer fan. this fact-filled compendium is your dish.”

—Columbus (Ohio) Dispatch

380 pages Illustrated $4.95

UFO AND THE BIBLE

A serious study of the Bible in the light of modern science, common sense
and a host of bewildering and unexplained UFO activities. An under¬
standing of the role played by UFO phenomena in biblical history pro¬
vides the key to long-misunderstood truths and numerous mysterious
prophecies found in the Bible.

". . . could conceivably turn out ot be as much an intellectual landmark as
Jean-Paul Satire’s initial work on Existentialism.”

—Clark Kinnaird, King Features Syndicate

128 pages $2.50

THE CITADEL PRESS 222 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK, 3, N. Y.

$3.50

The EXPANDING CASE
for the

UFO

by M. K. JESSUP

In his previous book, The Case for the
UFO, which has been hailed as "the most
unusual and comprehensive volume on the
fascinating subject of flying saucers,” M. K.
Jessup re-examined many of the tenets of
conventional science and established an im¬
pressive case for the existence of extra-ter¬
restrial life. Now he turns his attention to
other current scientific dogmas and adduces
new evidence to prove his theory.

Is our moon really a dead planet, devoid
of any kind of life? Evidence noted by
skilled astronomers over a period of more than
three hundred years and here collected and
interpreted for the first time suggests that
it is not. Strange flashes of light, craters that
appear and disappear, and intriguing geo¬
metrical patterns such as Gruithuisen’s City
and Madler’s "square” seem to point inex¬
orably toward life and intelligence. Can the
moon be a base for UFO activity? Mr.
Jessup thinks it is and presents a wealth of
historical data to support his belief.

He marshalls additional evidence along
this line in his study of the world’s Pygmy
tribes, so widely dispersed, yet so similar
in traditions. The tiny passageways in the
gold mines at Zimbabwe, the 47-inch-high
chambers in the Great Pyramid, the little
steps leading up to the Inca’s Throne” at
Sacsahuaman, and the persistent contempo¬
rary newspaper reports of "little men” from
flying saucers are all pieces in a gigantic

(continued on back flap)

Jacket design by Howard Morris

(continued from front flap)
jigsaw puzzle that may give us a new picture
of the earth’s past—and future.

We are taken on a tour of the fabulous
structures of the dim past and again the
question is raised: Hoiv were they built?
What mysterious force was employed to lift
into place the monoliths of Stonehenge and
the 2,000-ton solid stone roof of the Black
Pagoda of India, or to execute any of the
tremendous engineering feats of pre-history,
incomprehensible even in terms of twentieth
century science? Could it be the same force
that built a twelve-mile-long stone bridge on
the moon?

Whether or not you are ready to accept all
of Mr. Jessup’s conclusions, you will be
enthralled by his artful weaving-together of
hundreds of facts like these into a coherent
—and more than a little unsettling—pattern.
And you will agree that he has made a
persuasive case for the existence of some
form of intelligence in outer space.

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Explorer and instructor in Astronomy and
Mathematics at the University of Michigan
and Drake University, M. K. Jessup com¬
pleted his thesis for the Doctorate in Astro¬
physics at the University ol Michigan. He
erected and operated the largest refracting
telescope in the Southern Hemisphere in
South Africa for the University of Michigan.

In addition to studies for the Carnegie
Institute and the U. S. Department of Agri¬
culture, Mr. Jessup has carried out inde¬
pendent research at the May and Inca ruins
in Central and South America. He is an
acknowledged expert on the megalithic
stoneworks of Peru, Syria, Easter Island and
the Orient. He is at present studying the
meteoritic craters of Mexico, three illustra¬
tions of which appear in this book.

Besides the present book Mr. Jessup, long
a student of unidentified flying objects, has
written The Case for the UFO (1955).
UFO and the Bible (1956) and edited The
UFO Annual (1955).

THE EXPANDING CASE

for the

UFO

Books by M. K. Jessup

THE CASE FOR THE UFO
UFO AND THE BIBLE
THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO
THE UFO ANNUAL

M. K. JESSUP

The Expanding Case for the

UFO

The Citadel Press
New York

FraST EDITION

Copyright © 1957 by The Citadel Press. All rights reserved.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 57-6206. Manufactured
in the United States of America. Published by The Citadel Press,
222 Fourth Avenue, New York 3 r N. Y.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

A FABLE 11
WE BEGIN AGAIN 13

I

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY

FALLING ICE 21
FALLING STONES AND SHAPES 27
FALLING ORGANIC MATTER 30
WATER AND CLOUDS 38

II

ECHOES OF ASTRONOMY

MORE MYSTERIES OF SPACE 43

6 CONTENTS

III

ECHOES OF HISTORY

LEVITATION 47
FOSSILS: MYSTERIES 49
ANCIENT RECORDS AND LORE 52
FIREBALLS AND LIGHTS 59
DISAPPEARING PLANES AND CREWS 62

IV

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS
The Satellite

THE SILLY LITTLE SATELLITE 76
THE MAN-MADE MOON 84
MARS AND ITS SATELLITES 89
BEFORE ROCKETS 92
goddard’s rocket experiments 96
BAGBY’S SATELLITES 101
newton’s laws and space flight 105

The Moon

A CASE TO CONSIDER 110
BEATEN TO THE MOON? 122
“LET THERE BE LIGHT”—ON THE MOON? 132

ICE 138
ATMOSPHERE 139
ACTION 142
OBSCURATION 145
HYGINUS-N 151

CONTENTS 7

SPOTS AND STREAKS 153
VEGETATION 156
PLATO 161
CLEOMEDES 166
FRACASTORIUS AND SCHICKARD 167
ALHAZEN 169
MESSIER AND MESSIER-A 171

SELECTIVITY AND STRUCTURAL SIMILARITY 172
UNFOCUSABLE NEBULOSITIES 176
DISAPPEARANCES AND LINNE 183

V

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS

LITTLE PEOPLE, GREEN AND OTHERWISE 195
THE VOICE OF LITTLE PEOPLE 207
THE VOICE OF GEOGRAPHY 211
THE VOICES OF CHRONOLOGY AND ANTIQUITY 215
THE VOICE OF PSYCHOLOGY 219

THE VOICE OF GENEALOGY 220

THE VOICE OF THE SPHINX AND THE PYRAMIDS 223
THE VOICE OF PHILOLOGY 228
THE VOICE OF THEOLOGY AND MYTHOLOGY 230
THE VOICE OF WITCHCRAFT 233
THE VOICE OF THE ANDES 235
THE VOICE OF THE OBSERVER 241

THE VOICE OF CINCINNATI 249

THE EXPANDING CASE

for the

UFO

ILLUSTRATIONS

LUNAR REGION OF MARE SERENITATIS 65
THE MOON AT FIRST QUARTER 66
THE MOON AT THIRD QUARTER 67
THREE DRAWINGS OF LINNE 68
THE WHITE CLOUD OCCUPYING LINNE 69
TWO DRAWINGS OF HYGINUS REGION 69
CRATER LA CALDERA 70
CRATER PEROTE 71
CRATER XICO 72
MAGNIFICENT PETAVIUS 111

HYGINUS AND HYGINUS-N 152

PLATO, HOME OF LUNAR UFO 162
ARISTARCHUS, HERODOTUS AND SCHROETER’s VALLEY 172
LINNE AS IT IS TODAY 182
INTERIOR OF CRATER GASSENDI 194
ACTUAL BASE-LINE OF GREAT PYRAMID 225
CROSS-SECTION OF TUNNEL 236

Unless otherwise indicated, all illustrations from Our Moon
were drawn by its author, Mr. H. P. Wilkins, and are used with
the permission of Frederick Muller, Ltd., publisher.

A FABLE

There teas a Mexican Indian named Juan, who tended a small
milpa, or cornfield, every year, at the base of a mountain.

Its face was sculptured in the form of a human figure, crouch¬
ing in a posture of deep thought. According to Indian tradition
this was one of the giants of a past civilization, existent before
floods and cataclysms. His intellect was in proportion to his size,
and he was thinking out a problem that the gods had given him
to solve. They had sentenced him to sit immobile, congealed
into stone, throughout uncounted ages until the problem teas
solved.

Juan took a great deal of comfort from the uncomplaining
presence of the thoughtful giant, before whom his own frustra¬
tions paled in comparison.

One summer day as Juan tended his corn, he heard a rum¬
bling and groaning. Something like a great yawn reverberated
over the valley, and the cornfield trembled as with a quake or
tremor. Then Juan was startled to see the ponderous stone figure
slowly rising to his full towering height.

But Juan was not frightened. He had lived with this giant
too long. Tacitly, at least, they were friends. Juan had been pon¬
dering also.

Raising his little voice to a shout, he called upward to the
giant: “What have you been thinking aboutP”

Gazing down until he located the human mite at his feet,

11

12 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

the giant said: “Many years ago, the great gods of my people
gave me a problem. I was told to work out the mathematics
of a solar system with three suns, moving around each other in
accordance with the laws of nature, and having nine planets,
three moving in a retrograde direction, each with moons. 1 have
completed the problem.”

“Then” said Juan, “you are a free man?”

“Yes,” said the giant.

“And may I, a mere mortal, ask you a question, the answer
to which is beyond my reach?”

“Surely. Why not?”

“Perhaps you can tell me,” said Juan, “for I have been won¬
dering these many dull years. To whom was God speaking when
he said: ‘Let there be light’?”

And the giant said, “Um-m-m-m” and slowly sat down.

To this day he has not yet moved again.

Juan told his story in the village tavern that night. Only one
man believed him and this man was not credited in the village
with having much intelligence. Why, only last week, he said he
had seen a great, silvery, disc-like object darting across the sky!
It looked, he said, just like a great big shining saucer.*

0 I have been unable to trace the authorship of this little story.

WE BEGIN AGAIN

The publication of my book, The Case for the UFO, marked the
first step in my efforts to bring some order out of chaos by cor¬
relating previously observed data and drawing conclusions there¬
from. But “Let there be light” continues to nag at the mind, and,
whereas certain order was achieved, further investigation was
required. Not only did startling new fields of research suggest
themselves, but the voice I raised has echoed in the cave of
research and I must, perforce, begin by reporting some of those
echoes.

Suppose you wanted to prove The Case for Mankind, but had
to do so without actually seeing a human being. Suppose that
human beings were invisible, yet all their works were manifest.

Now suppose that you were trying to prove to a man from
Mars that there really is a human race. How would you go about
it? What evidence would you present to the man from Mars?
How would you present the evidence to the man from Mars who
reiterates: “There is no such thing as a human being. Until you
show me one, I must continue to regard you as the victim of an
overactive imagination, or worse”?

The phenomena you would exhibit to your man from Mars are
the kind I exhibit to you on behalf of the UFO and their innate
intelligences. The evidence for the UFO and for Mankind, if

13

14 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

WE BEGIN AGAIN 15

not identical, are parallel and complementary to an impressive
degree.

Many of your contemporaries are pointing to UFO and saying:
“There are UFO,” and you, perhaps, answer: “I do not see them,
therefore there are no UFO.”

But if I point to the works of UFO, and you persist in doubt¬
ing their existence, then I must ask you to explain them by
another rational method. Can you?

In what follows, we will often have to weigh one incredibility
against another. And, sometimes we shall be driven to consider
different orders of impossibility.

Some of my old school teachers may tell me there are no
degrees of impossibility; “impossible” is not a “comparative” term.
A thing or event is possible or impossible, period! Yet, you find
that some incredibilities are more incredible than others. Such
as ...

It is impossible to see a black cat in a dark room. Yet, with
infra-red we can photograph the cat, and with one of those ultra¬
modern military gadgets we might see the cat, via “invisible
light.” So, the impossibility of seeing a black cat in a dark room
depends on how you look at the cat. Consequently we have pro¬
gressive impossibility—or is anything really impossible?

On the other hand, I agree that it is manifestly impossible to
pick up an orange from the table if no orange is there. Call this
a first order impossibility if you like, but isn’t this more conceiv¬
able than picking up the Great Pyramid of Gizeh or the planet
Mars from the table? So here is what we might call a second
order impossibility.

Not so long ago the thought of picking up a flying saucer, fresh
from space, off the dining table, would have been reckoned at
least a third order impossibility. The mere suggestion would
have indicated insanity. But now?

Well, thousands of God-fearing, respectable people tell us,
tell the press, and even make affidavits that they have seen
Unidentified Flying Objects which are not planes, balloons,
planets or atmospheric-temperature inversions. There may pos¬

sibly be smoke in their eyes, but, if you persist in telling them so,
there is certainly going to be fire. When a man or woman of
intelligence, able to make a living among his fellow men, and of
good standing in his community, says he saw something, I would
rather try to find out what it was that he saw, and why it was
there, than try to persuade him that he never saw it.

Like Roy A. Marshall, Jr., of Mannboro, Virginia, who says, in
Fate (October, 1952):

“I saw my first saucer in the fall of 1926, while working for W. L.
Price. I was on top of a seventy-foot tower at Paces, Virginia, about ten
miles from South Boston, about four in the afternoon when I saw an
object approaching from the South. I know all types of aircraft, but
this object didn’t make sense. There was no prop turbulence or
motor noises. It seemed to glide toward me. As it passed overhead at
about five thousand feet, I could hear an almost inaudible, high-pitched
whine. Its details were fairly plain. I have sketches of it, and an alumi¬
num model, from these and others sightings.”

I think almost any astronomer would have a tough time
making this observant, out-of-doors fellow believe he had seen
a mirage, a searchlight, a balloon, a cloud ... or that old astrono¬
mer’s standby, the planet Venus! And don’t let your attention
wander: note that date. It’s 1926, quite a spell before Arnold.

So, as you say to me: “Impossible,” I say right back at you,
“How impossible?”

We are venturing, here, into a field where we are going to
have to stretch possibility farther than anyone but a metaphysicist
has ever done. I am going to ask you to do more than face the
reality of UFO, I am going to ask you to confront a whole new
philosophy regarding the world around us. I will not ask you to
accept this philosophy—just to inspect the new concepts with
an open mind.

Through the following pages you will have to contemplate
new types of life, as well as new ways of life.

Let me say that I do not have all the answers. I may not
have all of the questions. You may have those that I have missed;
but as for the answers—that is a joint problem, and we must

16 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

WE BEGIN AGAIN 17

attack it together. It is unimportant what the answer turns
out to be. It is important that we get closer to truth. If I offer
postulates and they look like conclusions, please be patient.
These are working hypotheses—proposals, nothing more.

After writing The Case for the UFO, I was accused of being
the world’s prize conclusion-jumper. No; but I may be the
world’s greatest hypothesizer, and I would gladly accept the
appellation. Of such stuff is bom qualitative knowledge.

If you have followed my speculations through the ramifica¬
tions of my previous books, you are now familiar with the con¬
cept that there is life in space around this planet. You may
not have accepted it—that is neither here nor there. You may
have other ideas, for your background is not identical to mine.
If you can come up with an acceptable common-denominator
of explanation for an equal number of the phenomena which
our groping race still has to solve, I will gladly listen to the case
you make.

Meanwhile, here we are! Confronted with an overwhelming
mass of observational data which says that there are beings
around us.

From where do they come? What do they desire? Are they
friends or enemies? What is their physical makeup? Are their
minds like ours? Are they godlike, or men and women of a
higher development than ours?

Were they originally earthlings? Or have they come from
faraway space? Have they recently arrived? Or have they been
here since before the dawn of our emergent civilization?

The presence of UFO accounts for a multitude of phenomena
erroneously called supernatural or occult, or just plain oddities.
Space flight, and life in space, alone can explain them. This
explanation is so simple ... so straightforward ... so obvious
and so overwhelming that it is awesome. Some of these phe¬
nomena were sketched briefly in The Case for the UFO. Sub¬
sequent research has broadened the evidential base. The degree
of the intermingling of UFO activities with our personal and

racial life has reached an astounding level. I feel as if I had
opened a cosmic Pandora’s box!

There are those who do not accept the reality of the UFO.
They find abhorrent the idea that there is life—intelligent, per¬
haps even real flesh-and-blood life—inhabiting the space between
planets and satellites of the solar system. They reject the pos¬
sibility of space being cluttered with debris or space junk of all
sorts, some of which arrives on earth as meteoric material other
than iron and stone. Yet we are confronted with evidence ac¬
cumulated over centuries that there is a vast amount of matter
in space, usable to space dwellers, which does fall to earth now
and then—and we have actually seen manifestations of space life.

There has been endless dissension between those who have
seen UFO and those who reject the idea of UFO. The die-hards
will not accept visual evidence. It is partly to these recalcitrants
that this book is addressed.

I intend to show that we are tapping a vast reservoir of
circumstantial evidence that space-life exists. I will let other
writers present the personal reports of hundreds of good people
who have seen the UFO’s. I have made it my task to supply
supporting evidence from other, chiefly scientific sources.

Many have assumed that the UFO come from another planet.
Other equally intelligent people conclude that they come from
planets in other, far-distant galaxies of stars—simply because
the regimented astronomers arbitrarily declare that no other
planets in the solar system are habitable. Some, on the other
hand, appalled at the distances involved, have found their way
out by insisting that the UFO are “materialized from multi¬
dimensional, or ethereal space,” about which we have only the
vaguest inkling at present. I suggested, previously, that it is an
improbability of lesser order to postulate that UFO and the
entities associated with them five in the space immediately around
the earth—denizens of the earth-moon binary-planet system.

The UFO constantly seen in such numbers and variety offer
almost a priori proof that UFO originate on or close to the earth.
The idea of life in space in constructed dwellings, then, is an im-

18 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

WE BEGIN AGAIN 19

probability of lesser order than any assumption that space vehicles
or intelligent entities, come in great numbers from planets
circling around distant stars, or even from the nearest planets
of our own system.

The distances involved are too great to permit of such
traffic, unless we are to assume speeds and modes of travel com¬
pletely beyond the scope of present-day physics. Such travel
is not unthinkable; but, to me, space intelligence in the earth-
moon binary system is a more acceptable improbability and
involves nothing incompatible with todays sciences. It is a
basic postulate of science that the simplest explanation is best.

An alternative? We have only the concept of materializations
of “ethereals” from multi-dimensional continuii of a different
order than our three-dimensional world or space. I do not deny
the possibility of such materializations, in the face of such
phenomena as teleportation and apportation and the voluminous
work of such investigators as the Borderland Sciences Research
Association, conducted by Dr. Meade Layne. Although the belief
that UFO are ethereal, or that they materialize at will from inter¬
penetrating and circumambient “spaces” is to me a higher order
of improbability, we must not close our minds to such hypotheses.

In this book, as in The Case for the UFO, I must limit myself
to the field of accepted physical law, as I see it. I must leave
the occult and ethereal to more experienced students of those
subjects.

I am trying to explain as much as possible on the basis of
already established, albeit incomplete sciences. As a working
hypothesis, I believe that life, and/or intelligence, inhabiting
space around us, is less improbable than materialization, tele¬
portation, or cummutation from other planets. Should I ultimately
be proven wrong, I will gladly accept the correction. Meanwhile,
let us be hospitable to other lines of study. Together we are
expanding the confines of qualitative knowledge.

In short, I believe that intelligence, in space, inhabiting the
earth-moon binary system may be just as “natural” as life and
intelligence on the earth itself, that this hypothesis provides clues

to phenomena which have been denied scientific cognizance, be¬
cause they could not be explained by conventional assumptions.

There is profound significance in the fact that our investi¬
gations seem to be closing the gap between formalized science
and the newer and less inhibited developments coming from
such workers as the B.S.R.A. (Borderland Sciences Research
Association). At no point in our analysis of recorded data do
we come into any irresolvable conflict. True, we do not reach
identical conclusions, but we have shown that the B.S.R.A. con¬
clusions are not as unacceptable to scientific cognizance as
they were previously thought to be. As long as all of us are
seeking truth —there can hardly be any basic conflict between
“science” and any other investigatory procedure. And it is
encouraging to see evidence that analysis of UFO phenomena,
from diverse viewpoints, is narrowing the gulf between these
fields of research.

In this volume I will continue the drive toward reality and
rationality. For our present purposes I must repeat what was
postulated in The Case for the UFO: that UFO were either
originated by an ancient civilization of pre-flood days, or are
indigenous to open space from whence they come to earth. Per¬
haps they brought the earth’s first civilization with them. I
incline to the former: that UFO, now living naturally in open
space, originated on earth aeons ago.

I have taken a hard look at the possibility that intelligence
does not necessarily mean life—camate life as we understand it.
There is considerable data to substantiate the latter speculation.
Of two types of spatial UFO, the solid, structure-like, and the
nebulous, cloud-like, it may be that the former originated on
earth and the latter in space. But such speculative and debatable
possibilities are innumerable.

In The Case for the UFO I developed the thesis that three
branches of learning meteorology, history, and astronomy—when
collated and analyzed, support the existence of intelligence
functioning in space. In meterology we scrutinized things, living
and dead, organic and inorganic, that fall from the sky, and

20 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

peculiar storms and clouds which seem to have intelligent direc¬
tion. Under the general heading of history we correlated data
on inexplicable disappearances of people and things; mysterious
engravings and tracks left in stone and on artifacts; incompre¬
hensible tracks left in snow; indications, in ancient megalithic
structures, that a power of levitation unknown to us was used for
lifting vast stones, etc.

In the astronomical field, having space for only a small
fraction of the evidence, I concentrated on observations by
astronomers who saw UFO in space, passing across or near the
sun. I made only cursory comment on shadows and lights on the
moon, and shadows thrown from space on our own clouds. I now
find that much remains to be said in all of those fields, and
that several others demand attention.

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY

♦ Falling Ice ♦

Strangely enough, evanescent ice meteorites seem to have been
observed more often at or near their time of impact than any
other objects from space. Their appearance, of course, makes
them stand out, but their lack of permanence requires that they
be seen falling, or immediately afterwards. Yet records are plenti¬
ful.

There is an account in the English scientific magazine Nature,
November 1, 1894, of two-pound hailstones, and the Chambers’
Encyclopedia listed some three-pounders. In the Reports of the
Smithsonian Institute, (1870, p. 479) two-pound hailstones were
verified, and six-pounders were reported. About the year 1800
a hailstone fell at Seringapatam, India, said to be the size of an
elephant.

When they come that big, obviously they are not hailstones.

In 1841, near Sheffield, England, there was a fall of fish and
small frogs intermingled with pieces of melting ice. That was in
July, and we are asked by scientists to believe this mixture was
picked up by a whirlwind and carried hundreds of miles!

But to prove that ice is arriving from outer space we must

21

22 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 23

get away from material which can be dubbed hailstones. Many
of us may have seen hailstones as large even as turkey eggs, but
anything larger almost certainly comes from space. Space origin
is probable if the ice had a rectangular or irregular shape and/or
a homogenous texture, that is, of solid or uniform inner structure.
Normal hailstones are made up of concentric layers of moisture,
successively frozen.

The Monthly Weather Review, June, 1877, described chunks
of ice too large to be grasped in one hand, which fell in a tornado
in Colorado on June 24 of that year. The same official govern¬
ment magazine reported a twenty-one inch mass of ice falling
in an Iowa hailstorm in June, 1881. And four-and-a-half-inch
lumps of ice were reported falling at Richmond, England, on
August 2, 1879, according to Symons Meteorological Magazine.
All this within the “Incredible Decade”—1877-1886.

On June 16, 1882, perhaps the most remarkable year of the
decade, lumps of ice fell at Dubuque, Iowa, containing living
frogs. Some pieces were up to seventeen inches in circumference
and the largest weighed about three-quarters of a pound. The
remarkable thing is that some of these lumps of ice (which were
not called hailstones) had icicles upon them at least a half inch
in length, which could not have formed upon wind tossed hail¬
stones. The questions arise: how were these lumps formed; what
held them stationary while icicles formed upon them; from where
did they come?

The Monthly Weather Review, June, 1889, reports ice falls
at Oswego, New York, on June 11 which resembled broken
icicles; and others, the size and shape of lead pencils cut into
short sections, falling on Florence Island in the St. Lawrence
River, August 8, 1901.

Fauth, an arduous lunar mapper, in his book The Moon, says:

“Many terrestrial phenomena, especially the dreaded heavy hail¬
stones with blocks of ice four inches thick (or more) which still puzzle
the meteorologist, point to an accession of ice from outer space . . .”
and:

... the moon, with its coat of ice is an eloquent witness to the
existence of ice in the solar system.”

We are forced by contemporary evidence, and that of cen¬
turies past, to agree that ice is continually arriving from space.
Therefore, there is water in space for the UFO dweller if he
cares to pick it up. Fauth, at least, is one scientist who accepts
the evidence of sound observation at its face value and helps to
establish that conditions in space may support life as well
as intelligence.

The “Carolina Bays” were almost certainly made by a huge
swarm of ice meteors or space-icebergs which may have been
partially instrumental in causing “the Flood.” If ice meteors con¬
tinually strike the earth, why not the moon, also?

The “modernists” of any century are prone to dismiss their
predecessors as ignoramuses, unable to observe accurately, or in¬
terpret properly what they did observe. In case you find yourself
dismissing past observations on such grounds, consider some re¬
cent reports.

Inland from the Bristol Channel, in England, is a wild
stretch of moorland, heath, and rolling down, called Exmoor,
given up to sheep-grazing. On the morning of November 11,
1950, a farmer named Edward Latham went into his fields at
dawn and found a ewe lying dead as if struck by ligh tnin g;
there was a deep wound in her neck. A few yards away lay a
fourteen-pound block of ice, obviously fallen from the sky. It
had dug itself into the ground to a depth of several inches.
Yet, the weather had been mild. Around the field and along
the roadway were lumps of ice as large as dinner plates. Other
farmers found ice among their cattle, and pieces were strewn
on the roadway four miles away.

The same thing had happened on the same moor in 1910
under similar conditions, killing three sheep. No explanation
had been given by the British Air Ministry. There were no large
metallic airplanes from which ice formations could have dropped
down. A British weather official stated: “The conditions do not
suggest that this is any normal meteorological weather phe¬
nomenon.”

On November 24, 1950, ice fell out of a clear blue sky onto
the asbestos roof of a garage at Wandsworth, London. The

24 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

chunk was a foot square and the concussion was so great that
a night watchman thought a boiler had burst. The Air Ministry
thought it might have dropped from a plane using de-icing
equipment. But no planes were known to have been over the
area!

On the 26th of November, 1950, Reginald Butcher of Steb-
bing, Essex, found on his garden path something fallen from the
sky which appeared to be ice, but on examination was found to
be of an unknown substance. It weighed about a pound and was
a foot long, and it did not melt! It was not ice nor was it glass
nor crystalline, although it was translucent. The police took the
substance, and the whole affair remains a mystery.

On November 27, 1950, a block of ice a foot long and four
inches thick, weighing five pounds, fell out of the sky. It landed
unbroken at the feet of a startled member of the Royal Auto¬
mobile Club, Mr. Tunmore, of Braughing, Hertfordshire.

That piece of ice was actually seen in the process of coming
down from a clear sky. No one had to await its impact in order
to surmise that it did come from the sky. The puzzled Air
Ministry experts and meteorological experts called for help from
professors at Durham and Cambridge universities.

Professor F. A. Pameth, at Durham University, and authority
on meteorites thought this object might be an “ice meteorite,”
but admitted that he could not explain their origin. A meteoro¬
logical expert of the Air Ministry was not so modest. He con¬
jectured that the block was ice, fired into space from one of the
ice-coated inner satellites of the planet Saturn which was bom¬
barding the earth.

An Air Ministry inspector who examined the Wandsworth
block of ice said it probably had been formed against a smooth
flat surface, but lacking an airplane overhead nobody has sug¬
gested what that surface might be.

On December 3, 1950, again at Wandsworth, a block of ice
weighing two pounds fell on a house. Four days later, at Wycomb,
a schoolboy saw a block of ice about nine inches square fall
from the sky onto the road and splinter to pieces. No plane was
in the sky. These falls of ice were given official attention. The

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 25

Parliamentary Secretary of the British Ministry of Civil Aviation
admitted, in the House of Commons, on December 13, that

“Four cases of falling ice have been reported in which there is no
evidence that aircraft were involved. It is not considered that meteoro¬
logical phenomena were responsible, and investigations are being
continued .”

Ice-falls persisted. In Southwest London a twenty-inch cyl¬
inder (whether of ice or metal was not specified) fell into a
garden. There was no airplane overhead at the time.

On December 26, 1950, a block of ice weighing over one hun¬
dred and twelve pounds crashed on a road at Dumbartonshire,
Scotland. The police who collected the splinters said that some
pieces bore marks of apparent slots and rivets.

On December 21, a block of ice weighing a pound fell from
the sky and glanced off the scarf on the head of Miss Margaret
Patterson, twenty-four of Lingwell Road, Tooting, London. No
plane seen or heard at that time.

On January 10, 1951, a six-foot icicle fell near Diisseldorf,
Germany, and killed a carpenter.

There must be some significance in these repeated falls over
localized areas. It is important to note that UFO observations
had been considerably stepped up during this interval. Was it
a bombardment or accidental falls from hovering UFO?

On January 15, 1953, a chunk of ice thirteen inches long
and six inches wide, followed by smaller pieces, narrowly missed
a woman and her child at Whittier, California. An egg-shaped
chunk weighing about fifty pounds fell, at approximately 10:20
a.m., on February 18, 1953, at Freeport, Long Island, and
smashed a rose trellis. The Air Force said it could not have been
formed on a plane.

About fifty large blocks of ice fell on cars in parking lots in
Long Beach, California, damaging them severely, on June 4,
1953. Some chunks were up to four feet long. The fall continued
for about two minutes. Even after shattering, some chunks
weighed twenty-five pounds when picked up. The parent pieces
were estimated at three hundred pounds.

26 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

A Russian named Shwedoff postulated cosmic or meteoric
hailstones in the early 80’s; but as of 1956 science has not seen
fit to admit these to respectability.

In the summer of 1951, the city of Bennington, Vermont, was
battered for ten minutes by large hailstones which caused
much damage. In the center of each ice particle was found a
bit of black metal which has completely baffled meteorologists.

While the fall of ice from space does not necessarily prove
the existence of UFO, it does prove the existence of vast amounts
of ice and water in space, along with other miscellaneous debris.
Would you agree that such materials contribute support to the
case for space life?

Our contention is that when an impact is noted or damage
is done by something from the sky, and no object is found, there
has been a fall of some volatile substance such as ice. A case
in point is the report printed in Doubt that on August 16, 1954,
something from a clear blue sky struck, or fell into the chimney
of a house in Eltham, London. The chimney was smashed,
fuses were blown and the living room was smothered with
soot—but nothing was found.

There is also the report of a Mrs. Campbell, of Leeds, who
was sitting on a cliff watching jet aircraft fly overhead. Some¬
thing struck her head and she was taken to a hospital almost
unconscious. However, no object was found in a later search.
(London Daily Mail, September 8, 1954).

A particularly puzzling feature of such arrivals of miscel¬
laneous matter from space is that material of the same kind often
falls repeatedly in the same locality, such as the repeated falls
of ice on and near London.

Throughout our research we have been looking for evidence
of intelligence, and it is the association of intelligent action with
falls such as this that makes us tie them in, no matter how
remotely, with UFO. Selectivity of the materials implies intel¬
ligence, and the selection inherent in many of these falls is very
rigid. Seldom do we have more than one kind of material falling
at the same time, and in mixtures ice is often combined with
certain living organisms. These manifestations of intelligence may

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 27

be capricious, but if so, we merely point out that capriciousness
is also an indication of mentality.

♦ Falling Stones and Shapes

The earth is certainly a landing field for all manner of inanimate
space debris, and some tilings which we wouldn’t care to call
inanimate. They may be friendly—or sinister.

In studying the arrivals from space, one soon notices at least
two types of material. The better known is geological debris—the
common iron and stone meteorites. The other material comprises
heterogeneous items.

The volume and diversity of this influx from space leads
me to believe ordinary meteorites are but a part of the total
space debris. And it is so characteristic of planetary surfaces
that I am inclined to view many of them as housekeeping items
of a planetary vivisphere—including items sometimes swept under
the cosmic rug.

Some of the non-geological items can be called organic, or
artificial in character—that is, they bear evidence of intelligent
shaping or manipulation. Such evidence includes shape, material,
physical condition, orientation, function, selection, peculiar and
delimited distribution, purposefulness, timing, etc.

On June 20, 1887, at the end of the “incredible decade,” a
small stone fell from the sky at Tarbes, France. It was thirteen
millimeters in diameter and five millimeters thick—about one-
fifth of an inch by half an inch—and weighed about two grams.
It was delicate, as though shaped by tiny hands, and was defi¬
nitely artificial in character. If there is no life in space, from
where did it come?

Meteorites of iron and stone, once damned by the savants,
have now been admitted to respectability. But falling ice and
intelligently shaped artifacts are still of the damned. Neverthe¬
less people continue to see falling paper, wool, resin, beef, blood

28 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

and stones with strange inscriptions—and snails, toads, peri¬
winkles, etc.

There are numerous reports of falls of cinders and slag. It is
perhaps significant that stones often fall during storms, or at
least the falls are connected with storms. Many examples are
listed in the Reports of the British Association for Advancement
of Science, The Annual Register, the Intellectual Observer,
Gregg’s Catalogue, and others.

A violent storm in 1794 dumped many stones on Sienna. There
were repeated falls of small black stones on Wolverhampton,
England, about May, 1869, after severe storms. Similar stones
had fallen in nearby Birmingham the year before.

On October 13, 1872, a peculiar stone fell near Lake Banja,
in Serbia. Being of an unknown type, the stone was named
Banjite, after the lake. Seventeen years later, on December 1,
1889, another rock of Banjite fell at the nearby town of Jelica.
Why did these stones of a material not known on earth fall in
the same locality, seventeen years apart? Selective repetition
may be considered a characteristic of intelligence. Significantly,
the falls of these two pieces of Banjite spanned the time of the
“incredible decade.”

Mr. Lee Gould, an Australian scientist, saw a tree which
had been broken off close to the ground. Nearby was an object
which resembled a ten-inch shot, obviously from the sky. With
equal surety, the “shot” had been shaped by some kind of
intelligence.

In Nature (Vol. Ill, page 512, and Vol. IV, page 169) are
reports of fish that fell with, or at least were found among, the
fragments of a meteor.

A hollow globular piece of quartz fell in Canada on December
1, 1889. Other pieces of quartz or quartz pebbles have been
reported, showing that many types of stone, as well as other
materials, are adrift “out there.”

These items might be unimportant to us, if they had no
bearing on UFO problems. The point is they show that space
contains much miscellaneous material, a great deal of it the
stuff we would expect from an exploding planet. Such stuff

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 29

would be useful to UFO in space. Some of it may come from
UFO.

A block of limestone fell in a field near Middleburg, Florida,
on March 9, 1888. The experts said it could not have fallen for
there is no limestone in the sky!

We also have numerous cases of falling sandstone—some of
it worn smooth. One piece was found embedded in a full-grown
peach tree. This might not be significant except that it appears
to have been red hot for it charred the tree around the point of
penetration.

The following are especially significant because of repetition
within a local area.

In February, March and at later dates, rocks fell at Chico,
California, according to the New York Times of March 12, 1922.
Many were large and smooth and seemed to come straight down
from the clouds. No satisfactory explanation was offered by
investigators. They were said not to be of meteoric origin
because two showed signs of cementation, either natural or
artificial. Our thought is that these may have come from an
exploded planet in space.

Some investigators brought back evidence which seems to
show that these rocks falling on Chico were actually apports.
They may have been, for they seemed to appear immediately
over the buildings on which they fell, rather than to have come
from great heights.

Chico, California, seems to be a concentration point for
peculiar events. The New York Times, September 2, 1878, in
the “incredible decade,” reported a fall of small fish there on the
20th of August, covering several acres. They fell from a cloud¬
less sky! On the night of March 5-6, 1885, a large, hard object
weighing several tons fell near Chico. In 1893, an iron object,
said to be meteoritic, was found at Oroville, near Chico, where
in 1887 an occurrence, dismissed as an earthquake, was described
by townsmen as detonations heard in the sky. Why all this near
Chico?

Bush Creek, California, where miner Black saw a flying
saucer and “little people,” is not very far from Chico.

30 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

♦ Falling Organic Matter ♦

We have records of falls of hair, flesh (no bones—I wonder why?),
snakes, frogs, fish, insects, iron, steel, slag, ashes, birds, blood,
mud, algae, stones, vegetable matter, discs, snails, lizards, lichens,
mussels, periwinkles, and warm water.

Any single instance of these might be ignored or laughed
off as a mistaken observation, hoax, or freak. And, throughout
history, until Charles Fort began to list them, they were ignored,
probably because no one had taken the trouble to compile and
group the reports to obtain the weight of concentrated evidence.

I suppose if a little green man suddenly materialized at
a scientific assemblage, he could be ignored as the product of
mass hallucination—or as an isolated example, unverified by “con¬
trolled experiments”! But ten little green men would be, to
most people, more convincing.

As regards this list of items fallen from the sky or from
space—one or two we could forget. But dozens . . . hundreds
. . . thousands . . . though seemingly unrelated to each other,
become hard to ignore—as, also, the intelligence that seems to
direct their distribution.

Try, by easy stages, to get used to the idea that intelligence
does not necessarily mean human intelligence. I realize that
it can be the latest and most severe blow to our ego to accept
that our racial intelligence is anything but the culminating
point of a creative, good and infinite universe or God. But in
that way, will we grasp the nature of the universe—or at least
the portion in our vicinity—and our proper place in it?

The Monthly Weather Review (1917, 45-220) is a gold mine
of information regarding falls of live and organic matter over
a period of centuries. This is a coldly scientific review of the sub¬
ject, presented in as readable a manner as the conventional scien¬
tists can muster. The reader who wishes to investigate the subject

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 31

of falling animal matter and to make an unemotional evaluation
of such phenomena can find no better source. The author, Mr.
McAttee, a bona fide scientific worker, does not, of course, espouse
our line of thinking, for he obviously had not thought of such
possibilities. Yet he acknowledges that innumerable recorded
falls of living and organic matter from the sky are authentic.

One instance among those of which Mr. McAttee admits the
authenticity is the following ( Descript. de St. Dominque, by
Morea de St. Mary, t-2, p. 413): From November, 1785, to May
5, 1786, on the island of Haiti—Santo Domingo, there was a
terrible drought. On May 5, 1786, during a strong east wind,
there fell, in several parts of the city of Port au Prince, quantities
of black eggs which hatched the following day. M. Mazard pre¬
served about fifty of these small animals in a water flask, where
they shed their skins several times. They resembled tadpoles.

That’s as near as we come to tadpoles among falling space
life. There is, for us, some significance in the statement that these
animals resembled tadpoles. What, in fact, were they?

According to the Los Angeles Daily News of September 24,
1954, a Mrs. Hoffman of Los Angeles reported hearing a loud
thump in her back yard. There she found a “hunk of yellowish
waxy stuff about fifteen inches long, six inches wide and one
inch and a half thick.” No plane had been heard overhead.

The Fortean Society magazine, Doubt (Number 47) reported
that on October 7, 1954, large quantities of birds and bats died
under unexplained circumstances. The New York Times took an
inventory of the casualties found on the roofs of the Empire
State Building: 125 birds of about thirty species and four bats.

One explanation was offered: that they were blown against
the building by a strong wind. Selectivity again? A selective
wind? It would be difficult to believe that so great a number,
regardless of species, could be blown against one building by
an uncontrolled wind. Could such an explanation account for
more than 200 dead birds found, the same morning, at Mitchell
Field, strewn over the open parade ground and runways?
Some had cracked skulls but others appeared to have died from
something resembling heart failure. Associated Press reports

32 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 33

revealed the same thing happening on the same night in Alabama,
Georgia, South Carolina, Kansas, Tennessee, Pennsylvania, and
North Carolina. A biologist at Salina, Kansas, is reported to have
performed autopsies on fallen birds which indicated asphyxiation.

This is a companion piece to the report of hundreds of birds
of different species which rained down on Baton Rouge, Louisi¬
ana, in the period of the great comets in the 19th century. We
suggest that only intervention from space can account for this.
Such intervention need not necessarily have come from controlled
space-craft; but either this or the impingement of noxious clouds
into our atmosphere must be assumed. If noxious clouds, how
do we account for the peculiar distribution? If we assume a
space-craft, it must have swept up birds for some purpose and
subsequently dumped them. Alternatively the craft may have
emitted poisonous gases, but how does “gas” crack bird’s skulls?

If poisonous gas entered from space, how did it penetrate
our dense atmosphere so close to the surface? Why were there
no deleterious effects on human beings or other animals on the
surface? What is your theory?

There is a postscript to those accounts of dead birds, and
strangely enough it arrived while I was writing these paragraphs.
Some readers of The Case for the UFO were thoughtful enough
to send in the clippings. The South Carolina State published
the following on September 28, 1955:

Charlotte, September 27, (AP)—Scores of dead birds fell from
the skies today at Douglas Municipal Airport near here, and elsewhere
in the vicinity. It happened less than twenty-four hours after hundreds
of dead birds plummeted to the streets of Troy, 73 miles east of here.

That clipping was sent to me by James H. Palmer. A more
elaborate account was sent in by Fred A. Taylor. Protesting
bird lovers blamed an airport gadget called a “ceilometer,” using
a 25,000,000-candlepower light for attracting and dazzling night-
migratory birds. But what happened to those at Troy, seventy-
three miles away? And those said to have fallen by day? And
did they have a ceilometer in Baton Rouge in the decade of
the great comets ?

My hypothesis of a marauding UFO may not match the
ceilometer; but I have a memory of something walking across
the English landscape, leaving those “devil’s footprints” in a
long unhindered single line. Something holding something up.
A force thrusting down ... penetrating snow . .. marking stones—
and cracking bird’s skulls when birds and forces meet high up
somewhere?

According to the Worcester (England) Daily Times, May
30, 1881, and a publication called Land and Water, June 4, 1881,
periwinkles fell along a road into Worcester. The dictionary de¬
scribes periwinkles as small marine snails, and Worcester is about
fifty miles inland. There were great quantities of periwinkles—
a few hermit crabs and small crabs of a species which could
not be identified. But the agency which had dropped these
living creatures had been very selective; they fell free of sand,
pebbles, other shells or seaweed.

Mostly the people of Worcester were incredulous. However,
some went out to see and returned with periwinkles for supper.

A Mr. J. Lloyd Bozward, a writer on meteorological subjects,
investigated the reports. His findings were published in the Wor¬
cester Evening Post on June 9th.

He stated that the value of the periwinkles was sixteen shil¬
lings a bushel, which was real money at that time. A wide area
on both sides of the road was heaped with periwinkles and crabs.
Any thought of a fishmonger trying to get rid of overstock must
be discounted. There as no glutted market at the time.

Gardens were covered even though there were high walls
around them. Mr. Bozward asserts that, to his knowledge, about
ten sacks of periwinkles had been picked up, at a value of about
twenty poimds, and sold in the markets at Worcester. Crowds
had filled pots, pans and boxes before he got to the place. He
concluded from all available evidence, that these things had fallen
from the sky during a thunderstorm. This resembles the usual
partial and unsatisfactory explanation that a “whirlwind” capable
of selectively sifting and washing them had picked them up at
one place and deposited them somewhere else.

The conventional explanation in the journals was that an

34 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

overstocked fishmonger had gotten rid of them along the road.
But why would he want to get rid of periwinkles that fetched
twenty pounds? And why did he mix them with hermit crabs,
and particularly with crabs of undetermined species ? And, on
the day before, no periwinkles were on sale in Worcester.

There are many reports of low types of animal life falling
from the sky. Selection, segregation, and localization are common
characteristics of such falls. They invariably cover small areas,
usually narrow, elongated strips of land. My assumption is that
such falls were dumpings from tanks in which space-craft
transport, and perhaps grow, food for their own consumption.
The Worcester periwinkles were distributed along a road for at
least a mile over a narrow space. Such a pattern suggests that
they were dumped from some contrivance moving parallel to
the road.

As in the case of the “devil’s footprints” in Devonshire, high
walls proved no hindrance. Periwinkles and crabs were found
inside garden walls, as well as along the road and in the fields.
Was there something, pretty large, moving overhead near Wor¬
cester that day in 1881—the year of one of the greatest comets?

For the skeptics who point out that the storm must have
picked up the periwinkles and crabs at the seashore fifty miles
away and transported them inland to Worcester, we can point
out that one of the greatest hurricanes in Irish history only
succeeded in blowing a few small fish some fifteen yards from
the edge of a lake.

Many falls of fish are recorded and have been authenticated
by the Monthly Weather Review and the Zoologist. There is a
nice detail to report about a fall of fish on the property of
a Mr. Nixon of Mountain Ash, Glamorganshire, Wales, on Febru¬
ary 11, 1859. This report provoked much debate in scientific
journals. People nowhere near the place denied, of course, that
any such thing happened; but, according to the Annual Register,
the fish had fallen by pailfuls. A bigger question was posed by
those who insisted the fish were already on the ground before the
storm.

The most important thing to us is that the way the fish

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 35

and periwinkles fell could not be attributed to the mechanics
of a whirlwind or tornado. The fish were on a narrow strip
of land about eighty yards long and twelve yards wide. Another
fall of fish occurred upon the same narrow strip of land ten
minutes later. Even arguing that a whirlwind or tornado could
stand still, it would discharge materials around its periphery; and
it could hardly have dropped some, to carry off the rest, and
then return ten minutes later to drop them. Science attempted
to laugh off the whole occurrence, remarking that someone had
soused someone else with a pailful of water containing minnows.
However, it is stated that the roofs of some houses were covered
with fish, some of which were five inches long. Small ones were
placed in both salt and fresh water. Those placed in salt water
died almost instantly but not those placed in fresh water.

Again we have extreme selection and localization which are
attributes of intelligence. I propose that the size of area covered
bears some relation to the size of a door in a space structure,
which could be used for dumping the material from tanks while
cleaning, or preparing to refill. There are many such instances
of limited falls of live specimens of lower forms of life, par¬
ticularly toads, frogs, snakes and varied marine life.

Fish and frogs usually fall in deluges and torrents of rain. But
it has often been reported that the rain was not actually rain
but dropping masses of water, again suggesting the emptying of
huge tanks in vast contraptions flying overhead.

In a fall of fish over Calcutta on September 20, 1839, the
fish fell in a straight line about eighteen inches in width. This
was reported in Living Age (volume 52, page 186). If they didn’t
come from a tank, then from where?

Attributes of intelligent placement: straight line; along a road;
and only about eighteen inches in width. Direction, control,
and selection—can these be without purposefulness? Clouds
formed in a cloudless sky; torrents, deluges of water. Big torpedo
shapes crossing the face of the sun. Great black things poised
like a giant crow over the moon. Can you seriously believe that
all of this is unrelated to UFO?

Worms—do they bother you? These bother me. Enormous

36 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 37

numbers of unidentifiable brown worms fell from the sky near
Clifton, Indiana, on February 4, 1892.

On February 14, myriads of scarlet worms fell in Massa¬
chusetts, covering several acres after a snowstorm. Something
seemed to be specializing in the transportation and distribution
of immature and larval forms of life in the middle of February,
1892. There were four other falls, or mysterious appearances
of worms, early in 1892; some of the specimens could not be
identified. At Lancaster, Pennsylvania, in a snowstorm, worms
landed on umbrellas.

I call to your attention that falls of live things from the sky
have usually been confined to marine life and the lower forms
of life in general, such as snails, worms, reptiles, insects, fish,
crabs, snakes etc. Most of these have high reproductive rates,
simple living habits, require little food and a minimum of atten¬
tion to raise. They five in water, or in a very damp habitat, and
some are scavengers. Again, tanks are suggested.

If all such falls are hoaxes, then we have some heroic and
persistent hoaxers.

One does not find many frogs in a desert. Yet, in a very dry
desert in Nevada called Newark Valley, Mr. Stoker drove through
a thunderstorm and a shower of frogs fell on his wagon. Again we
note the connection between falling life and accompanying
storms. Falls usually take place in masses of water and we ques¬
tion: are all storms caused by ordinary meteorological conditions?
Or are there local storms of other origin? The storm of Newark
Valley was isolated in a region where it could not pick up frogs.
Several people, including personal friend, George Mullins, re¬
ported similar experiences.

On August 18 and 19, 1922, innumerable little frogs fell on
London streets during a thunderstorm. According to the London
Daily News, September 5, 1922, little toads had been dropping
from the sky in France for two days. Fish of an unknown species
fell at Seymour, Indiana, August 8, 1891. On February 6, 1890, a
shower of fish fell in Montgomery County California, also of an
unknown species.

According to the New York Sun, May 20, 1892, (the year of
falling worms) eels showered down at Coalburg, Alabama. There

were piles of eels in the streets and farmers carted them away
for fertilizer. They were said to be of a species known in the
Pacific Ocean. Do you think those eels were brought by a whirl¬
wind?

In August, 1886, snails showered down during a heavy
thunderstorm near Redruth, Cornwall, England.

The Scientific American reported that on July 3, 1860, a
resident of South Granville, New York, had a stunned snake
fall at his feet during a heavy shower. It came to life and
glided away. It was grey and about a foot long.

According to the Monthly Weather Review, January 15, 1877,
a great quantity of snakes appeared at Memphis, Tennessee, im¬
mediately after a violent storm. They covered a space of two
blocks, crawling on sidewalks and in yards. There were masses
of them. None were seen to fall, but who would have been out
in such a storm to see them? Again, why such a limited space—
two city blocks? And if they were picked up by a storm why
were there no stones, fence rails, limbs of trees, leaves and other
debris? Again we say—the snakes were dumped.

There were falls of toads, ants and fish in 1889. Ants fell
in England in the summer of 1874, and some were wingless.
Ants of an unknown species, about the size of wasps, fell in Mani¬
toba in June, 1895. Worms fell in Devonshire in 1837. In 1876,
in midwinter, worms were found crawling on ground frozen
too hard for them to have come up from it, much less have
been grown there from larvae.

Some whitish-colored frogs fell at Birmingham, England.
Would not frogs grown in tanks, away from sunlight, lose their
pigment?

In the winter of 1876, in different parts of Norway, worms
were found crawling upon icy ground. They could not have come
up from the frozen ground, therefore they must have dropped
from the sky. In 1827 vast numbers of black insects fell during
a snowstorm at Pakrov, Russia, and again at Orenburg, on Decem¬
ber 14, 1830 during a snowstorm (reported in the American
Journal of Science, volume I, page 375). On November 18, 1850,
worms were found on snow near Sangerfield, New York.

The Scientific American for February 21, 1891, reported a

38 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

puzzling phenomenon in Randolph County, Virginia. Worms
whose origin could not be explained had appeared several times
on snow. Later similar worms were reported upon the snow
near Utica, New York, and in Oneida and Herkimer Counties.

The most reasonable explanations for such falls in extremely
localized rainstorms or snowstorms, often with a linear distribu¬
tion, is that these live things are brought by some contrivance
which uses storms for concealment, or creates storms by its
presence.

We will close with an eyewitness account given to the author
by Peter Kamitchis, a writer and editor in New York. He recalls
a date he had during his adolescence back in Oklahoma. He and
the young lady were caught in a typical Oklahoma cloudburst
But, un-typically, a steady mass of tiny white toads or frogs rained
down. They skittered on the road in white waves, and the car-
wheels spun a track through their smashed bodies.

♦ Water and Clouds ♦

The echoes remind us that controlled and organically shaped
clouds make an attractive field for research, and several responsi¬
ble observers, notably an English scientist, have stated that we
would do well to take note of them for future reference.

Clouds may have a purposeful air about them, as shown in
cloud photos released by the U. S. Navy in 1955. Those photos
recall the phenomenal formation once seen over the Madeira
Islands by Piazzi Smythe, Astronomer Royal of Scotland.

The city of Funchal, Madeira, lies in tropical repose on the
slopes of a mountain 3,000 feet high. The white buildings with
their red-tiled roofs reach all the way up from the beach to the
tourist hotel on the summit where clouds take over. There, back
in the 1880’s, the Astronomer Royal was vacationing.

One afternoon, he saw a strange isolated cloud forming at a

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 39

great altitude over the bay. A solitary mountain peak may form
clouds by the up-draft it produces, but this cloud was not of
that sort. It was awesomely stationary, as if it had a purpose.
Not only did it stay in the same place, for hours, but under it,
like an offspring, another similar but larger cloud formed, then
a third, a fourth, a fifth, all stationary and on the same vertical
axis. Smythe’s account could almost be a description of the
clouds the Navy photographed off the coast of France. The
formation had all the appearance of being intelligently controlled,
and each cloud maintained its position until sunset. After dark
the clouds disappeared in the reverse order of their formation.
The highest remained visible in striking colors long after sunset,
because of its very great height, at which it reflected the sinking
sun. It remained luminous until 10:00 p.m., long after there were
sun’s rays to reflect. The formation was verified by ships at sea,
and the great height is confirmed by a sighting distance of
almost 150 miles.

This may have been a natural formation, but it had mathe¬
matical features and elements of control which held a hard-
headed, skeptical analyst, and made him pause and record the
facts.

That is the sort of thing we have in mind when talking about
“artificial,” or “organic’-appearing clouds and storms. Here we
have examples, unusually symmetrical, often severely so, of the
spindle shape so familiar to students of UFO lore. There are
the familiar features of localization and of hovering in one place
despite steady winds. If the clouds were even in part above
the level of wind action, then what materials formed them?
The group of clouds were obviously held rigid in a deliberate
geometrical relationship by forces outside the range of ordinary
meteorological conditions. They were apparently formed one from
another on a vertical axis, as though the upper ones were parents
to the lower. Especially notable is their similar shape, and their
ability to hold vast concentrations of water without rain falling,
like a mass that moved over Ontario and then dropped to cause
a local flood.

In brief, this cloud formation of 1881 had the appearance of

40 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF METEOROLOGY 41

being “something special.” Have you seen anything with these
“special” characteristics?

We can thank Thompson’s Introduction to Meteorology, for
some of the following records of clouds of almost, if not quite,
paranormal nature:

In the district of Cheribon, Java, there occurred a remarkable cloud
and electrical disturbance at midnight on the 11th of August, 1772. The
mountain was seen enveloped in a cloud of unusual appearance, and
at the same time loud reports like artillery fire were heard. The cloud
rolled down the mountainside and overtook those who were unable to
flee, enclosing them in darkness and concealing the land for miles
around, and tossed the terrified victims like waves on a troubled ocean.
It emitted globes of fire, so vivid and numerous that night was
dispelled. For twenty miles everything was devastated and 2,140 peo¬
ple were killed, and thousands of animals.

In Malta, October 28, 1867, about three quarters of an hour after
midnight there appeared, to the SW, a great black cloud which, as it
approached, changed its color until at last it became like a flame of
fire mixed with black smoke. It made a dreadful noise and passed over
part of the port where it totally destroyed an English ship and broke
up all small boats in its path. It did a lot more damage, including
blowing away the lighthouse and steeples of churches.

These two “storms” have the unusual characteristics of coming
at midnight, and the second especially resembles an old-fashioned
American tornado. Tornadoes at midnight, however, are rare.

At Venice, January 8, 1815, about 6 p.m., the sky was overcast,
the temperature at 2° above zero (certainly abnormal enough, it would
seem, although we believe that winters were generally colder then).
Suddenly and silently a flame was seen to rise from the earth above
houses and spread over a big church. It lasted four minutes and was
very vivid.

Near Quito, Ecuador, about 9 p.m. one night, a globe of fire
seemed to rise from a neighboring peak, pass from west to east until
intercepted by another mountain, and was so effulgent that it lit the
city. It was said to be “a foot in diameter,” but who knows how big
it was or how far away?

A meteorite fell on August 7, 1823, at the American town of
Nobleborough, about 5 p.m. The sky was perfectly clear except for a
small, whitish cloud, apparently about forty feet square, near the
zenith, and the air perfectly calm. A noise like musketry came from
the cloud which then spiraled downward, and the stone fell from it.

Can we afford to overlook a square cloud which spirals down¬
ward and expectorates a meteoric stone? The following account
is from the New Orleans Picayune, July 11, 1893:

Bright, clear day near Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. From the sky
swooped a wrath which incited a river. It was one bulk of water:
two miles away, no rain fell. A raging river jeered against former
confinements. Some of its jibes were freight cars. It scoffed with
bridges. Having made a highwater mark of rebellion, it subsided into
a petulance of jostling rowboats. Monistically, I have to accept that no
line of demarcation can be drawn between emotions of minds and
motions of rivers. (Charles Fort)

Notice that it was a clear day; that the deluge rose and
subsided suddenly; that there was no rain to produce flood
drainage from surrounding territory—just one bulk of water.

The year 1954 was another of those years of world-wide
deluge, and was made the subject of an international meteorolo¬
gical inquiry. We want to know whether or not they are periodic.
Are they related to any known cycle of physical events such
as sunspots or meteoritic orbital motions? This flood year re¬
minds us of similar ones, 1889 and 1913. In Southern Morocco
three days’ rainfall exceeded the precipitation for three years.
England was deluged and so were Italy, Germany, Spain, Switzer¬
land, Belgium, and France. In the Western Hemisphere, Mexico,
Honduras and some parts of South America had floods. Australia
reported deluges. Asia was hardest hit, and record rainfall
afflicted Tibet, India, Pakistan and China.

We still contend that these world-wide deluges are caused
by masses of water or moisture arriving from orbits in space.
Evaporation from the surface of the earth is not sufficient to
account for them. Open space must contain a tremendous amount
of miscellaneous material, including water.

J. S. Holden of Glenarm, Ireland, reported on the 15th of
September, 1870, that about 8:30 p.m. he saw a bright meteor in
the northwest. It first appeared like a first magnitude star, then
assumed a comet shape, moving in a westerly direction. Then it
turned into a white opaque ring of cloud, well-defined and lumi-

42 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

nous! From its expanding rim, it ejected a tail which curved earth¬
wards. Finally it faded to a fleecy wraith of cloud, the entire
phenomenon lasting for about five minutes. This may have been
the atmospheric disturbance created by an ordinary meteor, but
the geometrical shapes are puzzling.

An old French work, Traite Physique et Historique de VAurore
Bor6ale, lists 1,441 auroral phenomena from the sixth century to
1754. A number of displays here called auroral are obviously of a
UFO nature. One described an aerial show of November 14, 1574:

. . . were seen in the air strange impressions of fire and smoke to
proceed forth from a black cloud in the north, towards the south.
That the next night the heavens from all parts did seem to bum
marvelous ragingly ... as if in a clear furnace.

This is not what we think of as an aurora. History contains
many descriptions of these strange black clouds from which come
smoke and fire and sometimes debris. These and other of the re¬
ported events must have been of UFO origin.

Astronomer Herschel once saw a cloud bank “precipitate so
fast” that it crossed the whole sky at a speed of at least 300 mph.
Obviously a UFO storm, not an ordinary meteorological storm.

In 1955 the U.S. Navy released photos of “organic” clouds seen
off the coast of France. There were two, both like flattened
spheres, black and isolated in the sky. Obviously they were not
cut from the same meteorological cloth as other clouds. They
had a “live” appearance suggesting purposefulness. They were
clearly of a UFO nature; why were the photos released?

ECHOES OF ASTRONOMY

♦ More Mysteries of Space ♦

The total solar eclipse of 1869 was visible in the American Middle
West. At St. Paul’s Junction, Iowa, a number of observers, includ¬
ing trained scientists, saw what must have been a UFO. The
account appeared in the Des Moines State Register of October 8,
1869; and in many science journals.

The planet Mercury, then close to the sun, was available as a
reference point. Mr. W. S. Gilman Jr. placed the object close to
Mercury, and horizontally to its right. The “star” as he called it,
was independently found by Mr. and Mrs. Farrell, a Mr. Phelps
and a Mr. Lockland. Each saw it both with the naked eye and
telescopes. Each was positive of the sighting, and located the
“star” a little to the right of, and below, the moon’s center.

The UFO appeared to be about l/6th the size of Mercury
and of star-like brightness. It appeared very nearly in line with
the Sun-Moon eclipse, and so near that it must have been within
the penumbra of the moon’s shadow and would then have been
red as were Watson and Swift’s UFO in 1878.

This is clearly a sighting of one of the space UFO discussed
in The Case for the UFO.

43

44 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

This sighting alone would have been conclusive demonstration
of UFO in the earth-moon system, probably at the gravitational
neutral—but there was more evidence.

During this same eclipse, August 7, 1869, many people, at
Mattoon, Illinois, noticed faint, whitish objects moving past their
glasses at the time of totality. These were not then deemed im¬
portant. It came out in later discussion and comparison of notes,
that these ‘Tittle’' objects moved in the same direction—in a stream
so to speak—from northwest downwards to southeast. No accept¬
able explanation was advanced. Minds were too shackled to con¬
ceive of space flight in those days. To us, now, no other explana¬
tion could do. Wind-blown fluffy seeds have been suggested as
explanation in similar cases in England. To skeptics not involved
in the sightings, such “explanations” seem logical. But . . . that
was at Mattoon . . . and the phenomenon was not local, far from it.

Alvin G. Clark, America’s most famous grinder and polisher
of telescopic lenses, observing from Shelbyville, Kentucky, on
the same date (August 7,1869) states: “I saw, through the finder®
of the Shelbyville Equatorial, 09 about twenty small objects cross¬
ing the field [of view] of the finder.” He called them to the atten¬
tion of Professor Winlock, who confirmed them.

A Mrs. Murphy, observing from Falmouth, Kentucky, saw two
“meteors” during the same totality.

There is still more.

General Albert J. Meyer, observing at, or near, Abingdon,
Virginia, saw “a shower of bright specks,” just prior to totality.
On reading descriptions of the other sightings, he concluded that
he had seen the same things.

This was one of the clearest of all reports of UFO in space.
To be seen against the moon-sun eclipse, from such widely sepa¬
rated points, these “things” had to be far out in space, toward the
moon, as far as the earth-moon gravitational neutral, otherwise
they would have been displaced by parallax, f

° A small telescope attached to a large one for sighting and aim ing
purposes, on exactly the same principle as the telescopic sight on a rifle.

00 Equatorial: a telescope mounted on an axis parallel to the earth’s
axis, so that it swings parallel to the equator.

f Parallax means the shift in apparent position of an object against a

ECHOES OF ASTRONOMY 45

In other parts of volume VII of the Astronomical Register,
Arago announced that two luminous meteors were seen to cross
the sky in a direction towards the sun and moon at the moment of
total eclipse, July 8, 1842. The reference says nothing about their
speed. Of this same eclipse, M. Wullerstoff, observing at Venice,
said that the moon’s disc was occasionally crossed by light streaks.
M. Piola, from observations at the same date said that some
shooting stars and a bollide were visible at totality and that the
bollide seemed to detach itself from the moon. These must have
been UFO, possibly arriving at and departing from the moon.

Note especially the frequency with which these space objects
are reported in pairs. Mrs. Murphy saw “two meteors .” Arago saw
two meteors. Watson and Swift saw two objects in 1878. And so
on, for many sightings of two objects crossing the sun.

Weidler records a friend’s report of bright bodies seen long
before and after totality at the eclipse of 1738. In Monthly Notices
(volume XII, page 38) a letter from Rev. W. Read records lumi¬
nous objects seen September 4, 1850, at a total eclipse; a similar
reference by Dawes appears on page 183. In some instances, these
bodies appear to be numerous and small. It is unfortunate that
we do not have more details in the light of our conclusions as to
objects inhabiting space near the moon.

In the Philosophical Transactions for 1715 (page 249) Halley
says “. . . there were perpetual flashes or corruscations of light
which seemed for a moment to dart out from behind the moon
on all sides now here, now there . . .” This relates to the total
eclipse of 1715. According to a similar notation in the memoirs
of the French Academy, De Louville saw flashes lasting only an
instant on the surface of the moon during totality.

Weidler reported in the Philosophical Transactions for 1739
(page 228) that his friends saw, toward the commencement of the
eclipse, what resembled flashes of lightning upon the disc of the
moon and again after more than an hour.

From Doubt, the Fortean Society magazine (issue number 47)

distant background, as seen from two different points. Hold up one finger
and sight past it with first one eye and then the other. The apparent
displacement of the finger against distant objects is parallax.

46 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

we have the first-hand report of a member of the society that a
sighting through the Edinburgh observatory telescope on October
12, 1954, showed a “dark sphere move from the crater Tycho to
the crater Aristarchus in a period of twenty minutes.” This obvi¬
ously is space-flight, because there is not enough atmosphere on
the moon to support a conventional type of flying machine. The
dark sphere could not have been a meteor, which would require
only a few seconds to cross the entire lunar disc.

The distance from Tycho to Aristarchus is roughly two thou¬
sand miles. If that UFO was close to the surface of the moon, it
was moving at a hundred miles per minute, or six thousand miles
per hour, a speed commonly reported for UFO navigating the
earth’s upper air.

In Celestial Objects, page 96, Webb says that Schroeter noted
singular changes among some rugged mountains near the east
edge of the moon and attributed them to a lunar atmosphere.
Beer and Madler attributed the same phenomena to variations of
illumination. (Our comment: more and more we find that
Schroeter saw certain types of variation while Beer and Madler
did not, and emphatically said that these variations did not exist.
Yet Gruithuisen saw them after Beer and Madler and some have
been reported more recently.)

From later observations we conclude that there is a cyclic
manifestation on the surface of the moon. The complete cycle
covers eighteen to fifty years. In other words, things were going
on in Schroeter’s time, in the latter decades of the eighteenth
century; there was a period of quiescence in the first three decades
of the nineteenth century. Then another period of activity began.

Another example of this cycle, again from Celestial Objects:
on the western edge of the moon, Schroeter delineated a crater
called by him Alhazen, which he used as a point for measuring
the librations of the moon. After a time he saw unaccountable
changes in it. Later it could not be seen by Beer and Madler. But
Gruithuisen saw it in 1824.

Ill

ECHOES OF HISTORY

♦ Levitation ♦

In the London Times (September 24,1875) it is related that some
inexplicable force lifted a fishing vessel so high out of the water
that when it fell back it sank. There was no wind. Rescuers in
nearby boats had to row, as they could not use their sails. The
London Daily Express (June 12, 1919) reported from Islip a
loud detonation that shot a basketful of clothes into the air.
The London Daily Mail (May 6, 1910) reported detonations that
sent stones shooting into the air for two hours, near Cantillana,
Spain. The Niles Weekly Register, November 4, 1815, reported
stones rising from the ground in a field in New York and moving
sixty feet horizontally.

Thus, levitating forces are seen to act from time to time. The
question of levitation is one of the most provocative in UFO re¬
search. One must bring to it as much knowledge of history and
anthropology as he can acquire.

Oddly enough, as one reaches back into ancient history and
studies the ruins or traces of ancient structures, one discovers that
the workmanship, in stone walls, deteriorated steadily with suc¬
cessive buildings. The ramparts, if such they be, of Sacsahuaman

47

48 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF HISTORY 49

in ancient Peru and other structures, were undertakings com¬
parable to our great dams. Handling those vast blocks of stone, so
accurately fitted, demanded vast controlled power. Yet those re¬
mains seem to have been the earliest. From that prodigious
perfection the construction appears to have degenerated. In the
later efforts smaller and smaller stones were used and workman¬
ship lost its skill. A few buildings were marvelously well-built
while later ones were crude. Eventually all the work declined to a
low level. True, there are some fairly large stones in the structures
of downtown Cuzco, such as the Temple of die Sun, but the
largest weigh only a ton or two. True, also, there is superb work¬
manship in the Temple of die Sun and the House of the Virgins,
where stones were almost perfectly squared before being worked
mto walls; but odier walls built on the same principles showed
piogressively poorer skill, the later stones being scarcely more
than large pebbles. One wonders how they stand up. Many are
built as superstructures on the older more solid bases.

Fiom this it appears diat the original massive structures were
erected by the earliest colonists in the pre-Inca era. They brought
with them expert knowledge of stonework and a special source of
power or levitating machinery. At least, this is our postulate. Then
they must have lost the source of power and their descendants
used hand labor, which couldn’t manipulate really big stones.

The Black Pagoda of India, believed by some to have been
built seven centimes ago, is 228 feet high. Its roof, twenty-five
feet thick, is a single stone slab weighing 2,000 tons. A sizable
chunk of rock to put on top of a 228 foot building which looks like
a silo. Historians conjecture that the building was buried in sand,
providing a ramp several miles long, up which the roof block
was dragged. That is a possibility, of course, and the only method
conceivable by any mechanical principle known to present-day
engineers. But there might be another possibility. The structure
might have been raised under the huge stone, pushing it up a tier
at a time, with jacks of some sort. In some ways this looks simpler
than building a ramp with hundreds of thousands of tons of sand
to bring up and cart away.

That two thousand tons! I do not think modem engineers could

put it on top of such a building without unlimited labor or funds
to build the ramp. Even then I do not see how they could possibly
get sufficient purchase on this thing to move it at all, or attach
sufficient harness to apply the necessary force. This incredible
stone is larger than those at Baalbek.

Levitating it into place seems as credible to me as any known
mechanism including a sand ramp. Maybe this would require that
it be more than 700 years old, since levitation would almost cer¬
tainly have been recorded if employed as recently as 700 years
ago.

If you were trying to move this thing up a ramp, no matter
how gradual, how could you anchor your tackle in the loose sand
to get a pull? How would you place enough men around it to
push or pull; and how would they secure a toe-hold? Levitation
is the lesser quandaiy.

♦ Fossils: Mysteries ♦

In the Astronomical Register (volume VIII, 1870, pages 11-13)
are some letters discussing a piece of flint found embedded in
chalk at Fawley near Southampton. Most of the correspondents
protested that “it couldn’t have come from space,” and “if it did
come from space, it could not have picked up fossils when falling.”
There were said to be several flint balls in stratified layers of the
chalk; these were globular, although chipped. A Mr. W. B. Gallo¬
way postulates that the flint was molten hot when dropped and
took on globular form in falling. Another correspondent doubts
that it actually did fall. Antiquity is certain and space origin
probable.

The largest drawing board in the world is probably the great
sand-flat of the Nasca Valley of Peru. Here, intermingled with
figures of beasts, birds and fish, some hundreds of feet across, are
huge geometric symbols—triangles, spirals, lines, roadways, etc.,
which stretch for miles. The shapes cannot be distinguished from

50 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF HISTORY 51

the ground, and were not reported until aviation developed. The
National Geographic Magazine (Oct. 1950, p. 448) has repro¬
duced some of them.

There are points of similarity in size and other aspects between
these diagrams and the figures of the mounds in the Ohio flatlands,
and also the giant effigies in southwest United States. ( National
Geographic Magazine, Sept. 1952) In both, the shapes are im¬
perceptible to observers on the ground.

This writer has seen the Nasca drawings from the air, and to
put it mildly, they startled him. Not only their magnitude, but the
geometric accuracy of designs extending for miles, is almost
unbelievable.

It is an almost inescapable conclusion that the project was
directed from the air, at an altitude of several thousand feet.
Some are best seen 1000 feet above the surface, but the largest
are most advantageously observed from a mile high or more,
about the cruising level of the DC-6’s.

Even more inescapable is the conclusion that this vast draw¬
ing-board contains signs meant to last a long time, and to be read
from a distance of from twenty-five to a hundred miles above the
earth’s surface. Whoever, or whatever made these designs was
accustomed to doing things in a big way.

The vastness of these drawings make one think of the mighty
stone constructions nearby Sacsahuaman and Tiahuanecu; of the
colossal idols and ramparts of Easter Islands; of the 1,200-ton
monoliths of Baalbek; of the massive geometry of the pyramid at
Gizeh; the immense stone arches and roadways in Polynesia; of
Angkor-Wat; of the scattering of huge non-volcanic craters of
Mexico. One also remembers the reports of giants of prehistoric
days. Bigness is the key, the common denominator ... for some¬
thing!

And we recall reports by astronomers about things which seem
to abide in space near the earth, perhaps at gravitational neutrals
where life’s exigencies are minimal, things miles in diameter,
exhibiting controlled motion, which share bigness with Peru,
Mexico, Egypt, Easter Island, Baalbek, India and Angkor-Wat.

Buried deep in the archives of the U.S. Air Force film library
in the Pentagon is a photo of something in Mexico which looks

like a cross between an irrigation project and a rebus. Its area,
stretching several hundred yards, is adjacent to a group of extra¬
terrestrial or artificial craters ranging in size from nearly half a
mile to a mile and a half in diameter. It is a complex of spirals,
crosses and human figures, laid out on an absolutely flat expanse
partly covered by shallow ponds.

Numbers of fossils in the west and midwest of the United
States indicate a tremendous antiquity for civilized man. These
erratics confuse scientists who have not yet settled on a common
denominator of archaic civilization which would explain them all.
According to H. W. Splitter (Fate, January, 1954, page 65), a
fossil human legbone about a yard long was found in 1877, near
Eureka, Nevada, many feet below the surface, embedded in
quartzite. Some bones, and the cast of a woman’s body were
taken from solid rock in a quarry at Zanesville, Ohio, in 1853.

In a block of solid feldspar taken from a mine, a thing re¬
sembling a two-inch screw was found near Treasure City, Nevada,
in 1869.

Memoirs of Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society
(2-9-306): Roundish stones, found embedded in coal, are deduced
to have fallen from the sky ages ago when the coal was soft
enough to have closed around them with no sign of entrance.

Proceedings of the Society of Antiquities of Scotland (1-1-
121): On an iron instrument embedded in a lump of coal: “The
interest attaching to this singular relic arises from the fact of its
having been found in the heart of a piece of coal, seven feet
under the surface. . . . The instrument was considered to be
modem.”

♦ Ancient Records and Lore ♦

Ethnology, archeology and related fields, not being among the
exact sciences, are somewhat dependent on intangibles like
imagination and intuition. But this permits them to make use
of evidence supplied in tradition and folklore and permits them

52 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

to explore misty areas of intellectual perception which are closed
to minds shackled by scientific or religious dogmas.

The epic, Rama and Sita, by the ancient Hindu poet Valmiki
(circa 1300 b.c.) is, according to Churchward, a paraphrase of an
ancient prose history in India or Tibet. This account places the
settlement of India and Burma at least 70,000 years into the remote
past. We quote a passage in Romesh Dutt’s translation, which
indicates that mechanical flight was known to a civilization
already hoary with age when dynastic Egypt entered history.
Even after allowing for symbolic language and poetic license,
there are sufficient corroboratory temple records, according to
Churchward and other researchers, to make us take the references
to flight as more than flights of fancy. In the following quotation,
the italics are ours:

Vain her threat and soft entreaty, Raven held her in his wrath
As the planet Buddha captures fair Rokini in his path.

By his left hand, tremor-shaken, Raksha held her streaming hair,

By his right, the ruthless Raksha lifted high the fainting fair.

Unseen dwellers of the woodland watched the dismal deed with shame.
Marked the mighty armed Raksha lift the poor and helpless dame.

Seat her in his car celestial, yoked to asses winged with speed,

Golden in its shape and radiance, fleet as Indra’s heavenly steed.
Angry threat and sweet entreaty, Raven to her ears addressed.

As the struggling, fainting woman still he held upon his breast.

Vain his threat and vain entreaty; “Rama! Rama!” still she cried,

To the dark and dismal forest where her noble lord had hied.

Then rose the car celestial o’er the hill and wooded vale.

Like a snake in eagle’s talons, Sita writhed with piteous wail.

Still the doubtful battle lasted, until Rama in his ire.

Wielded Brahmin’s dreadful weapon, flaming with celestial fire .
Winged as lightning, dart of Indra, fatal as the bolt of Heaven.
Wrapped in smoke and flaming flashes, speeding from the circle bow.
Pierced the iron heart of Raven, laid the lifeless hero low.

Colonel Churchward points out that Dutt, like other transla¬
tors, had difficulty with the words before “yoked asses,” for which
there is no English equivalent. (Churchward, not an engineer,
studied fifty years ago.) Here, the modem engineer immediately
senses “horsepower” (“winged horses” . . . “winged horse-

ECHOES OF HISTORY 53

power”). And note how casually mentioned, as though an ac¬
cepted part of the life of the times. Colonel Churchward reports
that these, with one exception, are the most specific accounts of
the Hindu flying machines of 15,000 to 20,000 years ago. But this
one exception is a honey. He says:

... except one, which is a drawing and instructions for the con¬
struction of the airship, her machinery, power, engine, etc. The power
is taken from the atmosphere in a very simple, inexpensive manner.
The engine is somewhat like our present-day turbine in that it works
from one chamber into another until finally exhausted. When the
engine is once started, it never stops until turned off. It will continue
on, if allowed to do so, until the bearings are worn out. The power
is unlimited, or rather, limited only by what the metals will stand.
These ships could keep circling the earth without ever coming down
until the machinery wore out. I find various flights spoken of, which,
according to our maps, would run from one thousand to three thousand
miles. (Churchward wrote this about 1925.)

Colonel Churchward further states:

All records relating to these airships distinctly state that they were
self-propelling; in other words, they generated their own power as
they flew, and were independent of all fuel.

Colonel Churchward claims to have devoted some fifty years
of his life to the study of the ancient temple records in India
and Tibet. But we believe that he failed to appreciate that this
was his greatest discovery, transcending even his translations of
records, tracing the human race back 200,000 years. He gives it so
little thought that he allots only two or three pages to it in all his
three interesting volumes.

It must occur to one that the power to sustain flight may be
drawn, in some way, from the gravitational field; also that some¬
thing related to it may have been used to handle the great blocks
making up the Great Pyramid, the stupendous works of Baalbek,
the huge boulders at Sacsahuaman, the aqueducts and reservoirs
of Ceylon and the monuments and building stones of Easter
Island. Something other than a reasonable facsimile of modern
machinery had to be used. Was it connected with the mysterious
perpetual” or “cold” light that recurs in South American mythol-

54 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF HISTORY 55

ogy? (H. T. Wilkins, Mysteries of Ancient South America, Citadel
Press, N. Y.)

Such types of flights, sources of power, and methods of control
are from times so immemorial that available records are but
faint reverberations down the corridors of time. The uses of sound,
of color, of tuned vibrations, in connection with flight and levita¬
tion in general, have been listed and expounded. Not the least
remarkable are some recent discoveries or “rediscoveries” in the
field of vibrational power.

Easter Island traditions of lifting huge stones by a tune, shift¬
ing boulders by the spoken word, recall records which were
crumbling before man appeared on the Nile. No matter how far
one goes into the misty Past, there is flight; there is functioning
civilization. From where? All along the path there is the hint, and
sometimes the evidence, of life in space—not on Mars, not on
Venus, not from Alpha Centauri, nor the Andromeda Nebula—
but from space near and around the earth. Time, as an indication
of the age of our little rekindled campfire, has become an illusion
if not a self-imposed delusion.

You may have seen Oge-Make’s rendering of the traditions of
the Piutes. He could almost have taken the materials from
Churchward’s Children of Mu, so closely do they coincide. It
was one of Churchwards major points that the southwest United
States was colonized from Mu, as were Central America, India,
Burma, Central Asia, Egypt, Asia Minor, Atlantis, and parts of
Europe. What matter if Mu may be fiction? What matter that
geologists say that Mu could not have been in the Pacific? It was
somewhere—it was something—it was the common origin, the
common denominator of all that we know as civilization today.

Churchward would have agreed that the archaic progenitors
of the Piutes came in ocean-going ships, through seas and inlets
now dry. It is as logical for other generations of civilization to have
had flying machines; and in America as in Asia. We can go that
far to reconcile our reason with our instincts, if we but revise
our time scale. If the Andes were honeycombed with tunnels and
caverns, now rent by glaciers—perhaps by the raising of the
mountains—who are we to quibble over a thousand years, or to

say that flight was unknown to a civilization flourishing a quarter
of a million years ago, before it was overwhelmed by nature.

Of that which immediately follows, I am, as you will be, at a
loss to know how much to believe. It is my guess that, like me,
you will seek an intermediate ground.

TRIBAL MEMORIES OF THE FLYING SAUCERS •
by Oge-Make

Most of you who read this are probably white men of a blood
only a century or two out of Europe. You speak in your papers of
the Flying Saucers or Mystery Ships as something new, and strangely
typical of the twentieth century. How could you but think otherwise?
Yet if you had red skin, and were of a blood which had been bom
and bred of this land for untold thousands of years, you would know
this is not true. You would know that your ancestors living in these
mountains and upon these prairies for numberless generations had
seen these ships before, and had passed down the story in the legends
which are unwritten history of your people. You do not believe? Well,
after all, why should you? But knowing your scornful unbelief, the
storytellers of my people have closed their lips in bitterness against
the outward flow of this knowledge.

Yet, I have said to the storytellers this: Now that the ships are
being seen again, is it wise that we, the older race keep our knowledge
to ourselves? Thus for me, an American Indian, some of the sages
among my people have talked, and if you care to, I shall permit
you to sit down with us and listen.

Let us say that it is dusk in that strange place you, the white
man, call “Death Valley.” I have passed tobacco (with us a sacred
plant) to the aged chief of the Piutes who sits across a tiny fire
from me and sprinkles com meal upon the flames. You sprinkle holy
water, while we sprinkle corn meal and blow the smoke of the
tobacco to the four winds (compass points) in order to dispel bad
luck and ask a blessing.

The old chief looked like a wrinkled mummy as he sat there
puffing upon his pipe. Yet his eyes were not those of the unseeing,
but eyes which seemed to look back on long trails of time. His people
bad held the Inyo, Panamint and Death Valleys for untold centuries
before the coming of the white man. Now we sat in the valley which
white men named for Death, but which the Piutes call Tomesha—
The Flaming Land. Here before me as I faced eastward, the Funerals
(mountains forming Death Valley’s eastern wall) were wrapped in

From tlie September, 1949, Fate Magazine.

56 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

purple-blue blankets about their feet while their faces were painted
in scarlet. Behind me, the Panamints rose like a mile-high wall,
dark against the sinking sun.

The old Piute smoked my tobacco for a long time before he
reverently blew the smoke to the four directions. Finally he spoke:

“You ask me if we heard of the great silver airships in the days
before white men brought their wagon trails into the land?”

“Yes, grandfather, I come seeking knowledge.” (Among all tribes
of my people, “grandfather” is the term of greatest respect one man
can pay another.)

“We, the Piute Nation, have known of these ships for untold
generations. We also believe that we know something of the people
who fly them. They are called The Hav-musuvs.”

“Who are the Hav-musuvs?”

“They are a people of the Panamints, and they are as ancient as
Tomesha itself.” He smiled a little at my confusion. “You do not
understand? Of course not. You are not a Piute. Then listen closely
and I will lead you back along the trail of the dim past.

“When the world was young, and this valley which is now dry,
parched desert, was a lush, hidden harbor of a blue-water sea which
stretched from half way up those mountains to the Gulf of California, it
is said that the Hav-musuvs came here in huge rowing ships. They
found great caverns in the Panamints, and in them they built one of
their cities. At that time California was the island which the Indians
of that state told the Spanish it was, and which they marked so on
their maps.

“Living in their hidden city, the Hav-musuvs ruled the sea with
their fast rowing-ships, trading with faraway peoples and bringing
strange goods to the great quays said still to exist in the caverns.

“Then as untold centuries rolled past, the climate began to change.
The water in the lake went down until there was no longer a way to
the sea. First the way was broken only by the southern mountains
over the tops of which goods could be carried. But as time went by
the water continued to shrink, until the day came when only a dry
crust was all that remained of the great blue lake. Then the desert
came, and the Fire-god began to walk across Tomesha, the Flaming
land.

“When the Hav-musuvs could no longer use their great rowing
ships, they began to think of other means to reach the world beyond.
I suppose that is how it happened. We know that they began to use
flying canoes. At first they were not large, these silvery ships with
wings. They moved with a slight whirring sound, and a dipping
movement, like an eagle.

ECHOES OF HISTORY 57

“The passing centuries brought other changes. Tribe after tribe
swept across the land, fighting to possess it for a while and passing
like the storm of sand. In their mountains, still in the cavern city,
the Hav-musuvs dwelt in peace, far removed from the conflict. Some¬
times they were seen at a distance, in their flying ships or riding on
the snowy-white animals which took them from ledge to ledge up
the cliffs. We have never seen these strange animals at any other
place. To these people the passing centuries brought only larger and
larger ships, moving always more silently.”

“Have you ever seen a Hav-musuv?”

“No, but we have many stories of them. There are reasons why
one does not become too curious.”

“Reasons?”

“Yes. These strange people have weapons. One is small, a tube
which stuns one with a prickly feeling like a rain of cactus needles.
One cannot move for hours, and during this time the mysterious ones
vanish up the cliffs. The other weapon is deadly. It is a long, silvery
tube. When this is pointed at you, death follows immediately.”

“But tell me about these people. What do they look like and how
do they dress?”

“They are a beautiful people. Their skin is a golden tint, and a
headband holds back their long dark hair. They dress always in
a white fine-spun garment which wraps around them and is draped
upon one shoulder. Pale sandals are worn upon their feet . . .”

His voice trailed away in a puff of smoke. The purple shadows
rising up the walls of the Funerals splashed like waves of the ghost
lake. The old man seemed to have fallen into a sort of trance, but I
had one more question. “Has any Piute ever spoken to a Hav-musuv,
or were the Piutes here when the great rowing ships first appeared?”

For some moments I wondered if he had heard me. Yet as is our
custom, I waited patiently for the answer. Again he went through
the ritual of the smoke-breathing to the four directions, and then
his soft voice continued:

“Yes. Once in the not-so-distant-past, but yet many generations
before the coming of the Spanish, a Piute chief lost his bride by sud¬
den death. In his great and overwhelming grief, he thought of the
Hav-musuvs and their long tube of death. He wished to join his
bride so he bid farewell to his sorrowing people and set off to find
the Hav-musuvs. None appeared until the chief began to climb the
almost unscalable Panamints. Then one of the men in white appeared
suddenly before him with the long tube, and motioned him back.
The chief made signs that he wished to die, and came on. The
Rian in white made a long singing whistle and other Hav-musuvs ap¬
peared. They spoke together in a strange tongue and then regarded the

58 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF HISTORY 59

chief thoughtfully. Finally they made signs to him making him under¬
stand that they would take him with them.

“Many weeks after his people had mourned him for dead, the
Piute chief came back to his camp. He had been in the giant under¬
ground valley of the Hav-musuvs, he said, where white lights which
bum night and day and never go out, or need any fuel, lit an ancient
city of marble beauty. There he learned the language and the history of
the mysterious people, giving them in turn the language and legends
of the Piutes. He said that he would have liked to remain there
forever in the peace and beauty of their life, but they bade him
return and use his new knowledge for his people.”

I could not help but ask the inevitable. “Do you believe this story
of the chief?”

His eyes studied the wisps of smoke for some minutes before he
answered. “I do not know. When a man is lost in Tomesha, and the
Fire-god is walking across the salt crust, strange dreams like clouds,
fog through his mind. No man can breathe the hot breath of the
Fire-god and long remain sane. Of course, the Piutes have thought
of this. No people knows the moods of Tomesha better than they.

“You asked me to tell you the legend of the flying ships. I have
told you what the young men of the tribe do not know, for they no
longer listen to the stories of the past. Now you ask me if I believe.
I answer this. Turn around. Look behind you at that wall of the
Panamints. How many giant caverns could open there, being hidden
by the lights and shadows of the rocks? How many could open out¬
ward and inward and never be seen behind the arrow-like pinnacles
before them? How many ships could swoop down like an eagle from
the beyond, on summer nights when the fires of the furnace sands have
closed away the valley from the eyes of the white man? How many
Hav-musuvs could five in their eternal peace away from the noise
of white man’s guns in their unscalable stronghold? This has always
been a land of mystery. Nothing can change that. Not even white
man with his flying engines, for should they come too close to the
wall of the Panamints a sharp wind like the flying arrow can sheer
off a wing. Tomesha hides its secrets well even in winter, but no
man can pry into them when the Fire-god draws the hot veil of
his breath across the passes.

I must still answer your question with my mind in doubt, for
we speak of a weird land. White man does not yet know it as well
as the Piutes, and we have ever held it in awe. It is still the forbidden:
Tomesha, Land-of-the-Flaming-Earth.”

The author of that story is a Navaho Indian.

♦ Fireballs and Lights ♦

In classifying UFO into different types for analysis we must pro¬
vide for a category of lights which seem to lack material sub¬
stance. These may be related to nebulous clouds observed by
astronomers which also have the characteristics of moving in
formation.

An example appears in Notes and Queries (series 5, volume 3,
page 306, April 17, 1875):

A gentleman writes from Pwllheli, a coast town in Caernarvonshire,
Wales, to the Field newspaper of February 20, as follows: “Some few
days ago we witnessed here what we have never seen before—certain
lights, eight in number, extending over, I should say, a distance of
eight miles; all seemed to keep their own ground, although moving
in horizontal, perpendicular and zigzag directions. Sometimes they
were of a bright blue color, then almost like the lights of a carriage
lamp, then like an electric light, and going out altogether in a few
minutes would appear again dimly, and come up as before. Can
any of your numerous readers inform me whether they are will-o’-
the-wisps, or what? We have seen three at a time afterwards on
four or five occasions.”

Surely we are not going to have a repetition of the “Fiery Exhala¬
tion” mentioned in Evelyns Diary, April 22, 1694, and fully discussed
in Gibson’s continuation of Camden. These “Mephitic Vapors” as they
were called occurred on the same coast.—A. R. Croeswylan, Oswestry.

This is so typical of certain types of saucer reports that it
might have been written yesterday. Note the number “eight,”
common in such reports both before and after Arnold started the
present “saucer” excitement. Compare it with Barnard’s “numer¬
ous” cometary masses of 1882, of which six are shown in “V”
formation; and the four in formation shown in the Coast Guard
photograph. (The Case for the UFO )

The “foo” fighters were lights of a peculiar maneuverability
seen by military pilots in both the European and the Pacific war

60 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

theaters in World War II. They have been generally considered
a type of UFO, but they differ from the structural types.

In many cases where UFO lights have been reported they
appear as bluish-white, like an electric arc: hard, brilliant, flicker¬
ing, functional. The “foo” lights on the other hand, apparently
entities in themselves, are usually reddish or yellowish, soft or
diffused, unattached to any tangible object and extremely mobile.
My impression from the descriptions is that the “foo” lights are
almost pure energy. They certainly are not to be associated with
ordinary flying contraptions, even those of the saucer type.

That the “foos” either have intelligence, or are remotely
directed by intelligence seems inescapable. It is only another
step to say that they are intelligence. We can compromise on a
manifestation of intelligent activity.

Both in Europe and over the Pacific, American pilots found
these puzzling lights pacing their planes but usually keeping out
of gun range. British and American flyers in Europe thought the
“foos” were German weapons, but after Germany was defeated
intelligence investigators found that the Germans had considered
“foo” fighters to be allied weapons.

During the air battles over Japan, there were no such objects
seen in the daytime; and those seen at night did not cause blips on
radar screens.

There were entirely too many proven instances to permit
accusations that pilots were having hallucinations. To this day
there has been no satisfactory explanation; and few cases have
been recorded of similar lights following civilian or commercial
planes.

The unidentified flying lights which maneuvered over Wash¬
ington, D. C., to the consternation of both military and civilian
authorities in the summer of 1952, may be related to the “foo”
fighters. But they, at least, were observed by radar. It is also to
be noted that they appeared in groups of six or eight, whereas
the “foo” fighters were usually seen singly. We also remember
that the lights seen over Virginia by William Nash and his co-pilot
appeared as six objects in linear formation and were joined by
two more, making eight.

Many of these objects have been called fireballs, an unfortu¬

ECHOES OF HISTORY 61

nate term. The word fireball usually denotes something like a
meteor or bollide entering the atmosphere from outer space.

Mysterious lights, apparently under control, have appeared in
many times and places. Their descriptions have been rather
similar over a period of centuries. For instance, globes of light
were observed high in the air over Swabia, Germany, May 22,
1732.

On September 19, 1848, Inverness, Scotland, saw two starlike
globular lights which were sometimes stationary, and sometimes
moved erratically at high speeds.

You will remember that 1877 marked the beginning of the
“incredible decade” which saw many unexplained occurrences.
In March 23 of that year dazzling balls of light appeared from a
cloud over Venice, in Italy. They moved slowly in the sky for
more than an hour. Similar balls of light had been seen in that
area some eight years previously.

On October 5 of the same year mysterious illuminated spheres
were seen over the coast of Wales. They moved at high velocity,
appeared and disappeared with erratic suddenness.

On July 30, 1880, three luminous spheres, one larger than the
rest, appeared in a ravine near the city now known as Leningrad.
They were seen for about three minutes, then vanished without a
sound.

Captain Norcock, of H.M.S. Caroline, saw globular lights on
the China Sea on the night of May 25, 1893. They were visible
about two hours between sunset and midnight. They were seen
the same night by the captain of H.M.S. Leander, but for seven
and a half hours! The ship’s course was changed to approach the
lights, hut, as we would say today, they took “evasive action” and
fled.

To the omniscient astronomer who would say that an ignorant
ship captain was chasing the deceptive planet Venus, we can
point out that the lights were seen against the backdrop of a
mountain range. Therefore, they were neither in distant space
nor on the surface of the sea.

You will think of the “devil’s footprints” found in Devonshire,
England, during the middle of the nineteenth century, when you
learn that two bluish balls of light appeared over Devon, Eng-

62 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

land on October 30, 1950, between 10:50 and 11:00 p.m., moving
north to south at terrific speed. They came inland from over the
Bristol Channel. Eyewitnesses included Naval officers at Devon-
port.

John Phillip Bessor published a detailed report of mysterious
lights in Fate Magazine (August, 1953, page 87). Sightings in
Australia are reported in the same terms as sightings in the
western United States. Animals will not pass through gates or
along roads over which the balls of illumination have hovered.
They usually appear singly and take evasive action when ap¬
proached. They seem to have a localized range of operation. The
qualities of acceleration, evasion, color, erratic movement, and
apparent purposefulness shown by these entities isolates them
from the field of the purely mechanical.

I do not know what they are, any more than you do. But we
must distinguish between true flying saucers and maneuverable
lights. Both may be called UFO; but they certainly differ in
nature and function, although they may be under identical
control.

The “foo” fighters seem to belong in a special class because of
their preference for accompanying military planes on fighting
missions. In this, and in their control, selectivity and, at times,
evasive action, they exhibit intelligent operation.

If we postulate some fourth-dimensional continuum, these
glowing spheres might represent the diffusion of a ray of energy
passing through our space—just as a searchlight dissipates energy
and light in passing through a thin film of smoke—a kind of cross-
section of something from a higher plane of existence.

♦ Disappearing Planes and Crews ♦

Certain “enemies” of UFO research question the use of old records
to support hypotheses. They especially question old reports of
ships vanishing and crews disappearing en masse. “Why doesn’t it
happen today?” they ask.

ECHOES OF HISTORY 63

I therefore doubly appreciate the following letter, and ask
especially that you note the date.

Mr. M. K. Jessup
c/o Citadel Press
222 Fourth Avenue
New York 3, New York

Dear Mr. Jessup:

On November 13, 1955, an Air Force jet fighter radioed McClel¬
land Air Base in Sacramento that it was preparing to land. It has not
been heard from since. The whole area of our Central Valley is fairly
thickly populated, and it seems highly unlikely that a crashed plane
could go unnoticed.

A burned-out area, about thirty miles from here was investigated,
but yielded nothing. The plane simply vanished. This seems to follow
along with other cases cited by you. Like the ones you have given,
it disappeared after asking for landing instructions, and usually very
close to its landing point.

Sincerely,

( Signed ) David Bell

Rt. 1, Box 82
Linden, Calif.

November 18, 1955

And we continue to have ghost shipsl

A report in the New York World-Telegram and Sun, November
11, 1955, describes a most mysterious disappearance of twenty-
five people.

Pago Pago, Nov. 11 (UP)—Seafaring men said today a long-
missing island trading vessel had become sister ship of the fabled
Marie Celeste, a ghost ship drifting aimlessly across the sea without
passengers or crew.

The 70-ton cabin cruiser, Joyita, disappeared five weeks ago. It
was carrying twenty-five passengers and crewmen when it left Apia,
Samoa, for a two-day voyage to Fakoafe in the Tokelau Islands. When
the ship became overdue, planes and ships searched for days over a
100,000 square mile area.

Yesterday the steamer Tuvalu came upon the waterlogged Joyita
drifting far off its course, ninety miles north of the Fijian island of
Vanua Levu. There was no trace of the twenty-five persons who had
been aboard.

64 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Further information indicates damage to the funnel and
rigging. Nobody has any explanation why the vessel escaped a
systematic search, yet suddenly appeared as an abandoned hulk.
Nor why all hands disappeared with the logbook but left no mes¬
sages. Suddenly—as usual, and without trace—as usual.

People, singly as well as in groups, continue to disappear.
H. T. Wilkins, in Flying Saucers Uncensored, cited the example
of Isaac Martin, a young farmer of Salem, Virginia, who dis¬
appeared while working in his field. Other people in this area
have disappeared, among them a farmer who dematerialized be¬
fore the eyes of five people. Wilkins reported thirteen children
missing on August, 1869, in Cork, Ireland, and in the same month
Brussels was similarly afflicted.

On January 1, 1888, five wild men and a wild girl appeared
in Connecticut. Was this teleportation by UFO? In 1883 (the “in¬
credible decade”) many people disappeared in Montreal. In one
week in August, 1912, five men vanished without a trace in
Buffalo, New York.

On November 27, 1954, a British lightship was driven from
her anchorage and all on board disappeared without a trace. She
was equipped with radio and signalling devices. Why did she not
communicate with anyone? What destroys, or “takes” (remember
there are never any bodies) these people from their vessels; and
why is there never any radio signal?

Add to these the disappearing colony in the early days of
Virginia; the disappearance of thriving and populous centers in
Greenland, hundreds of years ago—with a few remains and runes
several hundreds miles northward toward desolation. And what
became of the miners of Zimbabwe? The Easter Islanders? And,
just to show you that there is no especial geographical preference,
we have the following story of a disappearing Eskimo village.

In late November, 1930, Joe La Belle, a lone trapper in the
North Canadian woods, was returning to trading posts and civil¬
ization when he came upon an Eskimo village which astonished

Lunar Region of Mare Serenitatis showing Crater Ilyginus and the
white cloud covering Crater Linne since about 1865. Note also the great
gash made in high Lunar Alps by an object from space.

65

(

<

I

MESSIER &
MESSIER-A

FRACASTORIUS

x mtm *

PICCOLOMINI

CLEOMEDES

The Moon at First Quarter, showing location of mystery-shrouded
craters Cleomedes, Messier and Messier-A, Fracastorius and Piccolomini.

66

)

The Moon at Third Quarter, showing locations of mysterious craters
Plato, Ptolemaeus, Alpetragius, and Schickard.

67

JoJpiAUU GotUlti\,

Crater

MAN MnMH imi

LINNE

/. Carpenter rSHS June 26 tO O

L.1NNE

WHwnpnJ Jane 26 8 30

MARE

SERENITATIS

0 Wilhajfu 26 June 1866 U 0.

1882 . Mav 24™ 8 n 30

8h. 45m.

May nth, 1867.

Two Drawings of Hyginus Region by
the same observer, 24 hours apart. Note
disappearance of large ring-shaped object
near Hyginus-N and the sudden appear¬
ance of two others ; also the fluctuation
in Hyginus-N.

( opp. page) Three Drawings of
Linne made in one evening. (Fig. 1)
A mountain casting shadow. (Fig. 2)
A large definite crater casting a shad¬
ow. (Fig. 3) A large hazy white spot.

1832 May 25 ti 8 h 45™

HYGINUS N

Drawn by John M c Cane e

The White “Cloud” Occupy¬
ing Crater Linne, with the
minute deep “pit” on top, as
seen in 1867. Contrast this with
the usual type craters as seen in
' lunar photographs. Linne was
such a crater before the “in-
2 , vasion.”

ECHOES OF HISTORY 73

Crater Xico. Extra-terrestrial crater on Mexican plateau, about % of a mile
in diameter, exactly the size and shape of small lunar craters where activity
of UFO nature is observed. Note hundreds of acres of farm land inside the
great ring. (Compahia Mexicana Aerofoto, S.A.)

72

him by its silence. No dogs were barking. An Eskimo village with¬
out barking dogs is a phenomenon.

La Belle entered the silent village, but not without a few
goose pimples. Shelters made from caribou skins were still erect
and in good condition. Inside were the necessities of Eskimo life,
including cooking utensils, hides and clothing, and even that
essential of wilderness living—rifles!

At some distance from the camp La Belle found the bodies
of seven dogs, but that was all. It was obvious that the settlement
had been without human inhabitants for some time.

Abandonment of this village, which had housed at least
twenty-five of the wilderness folk, had been sudden and un¬
premeditated. Where had they gone? They had not “moved.”
There was no evidence of an intention to break camp, for such
an operation would have required packing their equipment. If
they had fled in the face of danger they would certainly have
taken their rifles and their dogs, if nothing else.

La Belle saw nothing to explain the absence of the villagers
as he retraced his steps throughout the little settlement. Nothing
was disturbed and there were no signs of violence.

At the edge of the camp, La Belle found an Eskimo grave
with the usual caim of stones. For some reason the grave had
been opened and the stones had been carefully moved to one
side. The grave was empty and there was nothing to indicate
when it had been opened or what had been done with the body.
Prowling animals could not have done it for the stones had been
placed too neatly and there were no scattered bones.

Who are we, to blame Joe La Belle for taking a somewhat
precipitous departure? He made his way to the nearest Royal
Canadian Mounted Police post and reported his discovery. Offi¬
cers who investigated for months found no clue to the mysterious
disappearance. Autopsies on the corpses of the dogs showed that
they had died from starvation. Their state of preservation indi¬
cated that the abandonment had taken place after the warm sum¬
mer months. There was no indication as to why the seven dogs
had all died at the same time and in a group, and just outside the
village, for starving animals are not selective of their final resting

74 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ECHOES OF HISTORY 75

place. Nor is there any indication of why they remained in
the village to starve, in an area containing much small game, or
why they didn’t turn cannibalistic. Had something terrified them
and made them huddle together?

The case remains unsolved. Maybe the Mounties always get
their man, but are they now dealing with a marauding UFO?

Far from diminishing, the number of crashing and disappear¬
ing planes seems to increase. This is particularly true of jet planes,
mostly fighters.

In the November 4 issue of the CRIFO Orbit, published at
7017 Britton Avenue, Cincinnati 27, Ohio, its editor, L. H. String-
field, asserts his conviction, citing the losses of jet planes and other
data, that the earth is already engaged in interplanetary warfare,
and we are on the defensive!

What happened to Hunrath and Wilkinson, electronics tech¬
nicians, who, on November 16, 1953, disappeared in a small plane
hired for a short “hop around the airport”?

Peculiar hieroglyphs appeared on the house and garage, which
H. T. Wilkins says resemble those of pre-Deluge civilizations.
We are most forcibly reminded of the megaglyphs on the Nasca
Desert, Peru.

Do you remember that, a year or two ago, five RAF jets all
force-landed at exactly the same time, from a cloudy sky—because
they “all ran out of fuel simultaneously”?

Do you remember that six USAF jets had exactly the same
experience at Wright Field, only a short time thereafter? Out of
gas?

This from the New York World-Telegram and Sun, November
4, 1955, makes a fitting close to “Echoes”:

London, Nov. 4 (UP)—It was like the ten little Indians when
the four jet acrobatics team of the Royal Air Force zoomed up to the
post for a U. S. Air Force photographer and a television cameraman
yesterday.

Everybody lived, but it was rough on the planes.

There were four Hunter jet fighters piloted by RAF aces and a
Vampire jet carrying U. S. Air Force Captain R. G. Immig, and an
older Meteor jet with the TV crew.

A thick black cloud suddenly clamped down on the six planes.

One Hunter exploded after its pilot bailed out

The Vampire crashed in flames after Captain Immig and his pilot
parachuted and then there were four!

A second Hunter buzzed down for a wheels-up crash landing, and
then there were three!

The third and fourth Hunters, running out of fuel, made forced
landings at the Farnsborough Air Base where the jet acrobats are
famous for the performances in the annual Farnsborough Air Show.

And then there was one—the old, outdated Meteor jet. It landed
safely!

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 77

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS

THE SATELLITE

♦ The Silly Little Satellite ♦

The brilliantly negative antics of the United States government
anent UFO were again illuminated in July, 1955, by a press re¬
lease, the build-up of which must have cost the taxpayers a hand¬
some penny. I refer to the fanfare about the silly little satellite.
There was little real news value, as you will see.

When you review those satellite reports, everything about
them gives you pause—in addition to the lengths to which the
press went in stimulating public belief that once again we are
getting there “fustest with the mostest.”

To a man, the press writers tackled the canned government
data with a sobriety as obliging as it was unexpected—in the
columns and columns of discussion, though not in the headlines.
(One in a New York paper read: AROUND EARTH IN 90
MINUTES. U.S. TO LAUNCH “SPACE SHIPS” IN ’57. An¬
other: EXPERTS HERE SEE NEW VISTAS. SATELLITE TO
CIRCLE EARTH AT 18,000 MPH. Another: MAN SEEN ON
HIS WAY “OUT OF THIS WORLD.”

Here is a typical news lead. I quote from the New York Daily
News, the story datelined Washington, July 29, 1955:

76

The U.S. will launch earth-circling satellites, tiny man-made
“moons,” in 1957-58 for the benefit of science all over the world, it
was announced today.

The satellites, about the size of basketballs, will speed around the
earth, 200 to 300 miles up, at 18,000 miles per hour. Delicate instru¬
ments are expected to pick up data on cosmic rays and other phe¬
nomena of outer space, relaying it to earth by automatic radio.

The spectacular venture will be part of the U.S. participation in
the International Geophysical Year. This is a joint effort by the scien¬
tists of 38 nations, including Russia, to gather more information about
the earth and universe.

Which I find tremendously interesting in view of the contention
that UFO which dip and dive at fantastic speeds are pinnacle-
secret devices of some government or other. Here is a significant
paragraph (italics mine) from the Daily News article:

If successful, it will also be a long step toward fulfillment of man’s
long dream of space conquest—travel to the moon and planets. For
the tiny satellites will have crashed through the barrier of gravity for
the first time.

If this means what it says it is an obvious misstatement. The
satellites do not crash through any barriers; they reach a state
of equilibrium between gravity, speed, and distance.

The Washington Post and Times-Herald, July 30, 1955, among
other papers, carried a long article enumerating the satellite’s
characteristics: size—that of a basketball; distance—200 to 300
miles from earth; orbital speed—18,000 mph, etc. But this paper
included on the front page with the satellite story an item cap¬
tioned: RUNAWAY ROCKET MAY BE OUT THERE.

United States experimenters already have pierced outer space with
guided missiles and there is a wide belief that at least one such pro¬
jectile may already be circling the earth as an “uncontrolled satellite.”

Announcement of the plan to launch a satellite program took the
fid off highly competent reports that one rocket “worked too well” and
s ot out into outer space. According to these reports, this test rocket
generated such enormous energy and unexpected thrust that it burst
ree of the earth’s atmosphere; that it is 800 miles out in space with

l° n S since expended, but still whirling at the rate of about
16,000 miles per hour.

® ut ^ * s possible the “runaway” slipped back into the earth’s
a osphere, where high friction would have disintegrated it quickly.

78 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Except for the varied ways the newspapers reworked the
government release, all breathed the prescribed exhilaration, and
presented substantially the same conclusions.

Newsweek, August 8, 1955, quoted rocket expert Willy Ley,
whose words, to my mind, emphasize the silliness of this project.
Speaking for the “rockets-will-get-us-there” group, he said: “This
is the beginning of space flight.”

The government is using several German scientists. The one
most repeatedly mentioned was Professor Hermann Oberth. Re¬
member his name, for he is important—not only as an experi¬
menter, but as one who is intellectually courageous.

In the American Weekly, October 24, 1954, in an article called
“Flying Saucers Come from a Distant World,” Professor Oberth
wrote:

I think that they possibly are manned by intelligent observers who
are members of a race that may have been investigating our earth
for centuries. I think that they possibly have been sent to conduct
systematic, long-range investigations, first of men, animals and vegeta¬
tion, and more recently of atomic centers, armaments and centers of
armament production.

I have examined all of the arguments supporting the existence of
flying saucers and denying it, and it is my conclusion that the
“Unidentified Fying Objects” do exist, are very real, and are visitors
from outer space.

Now, once again, there is a hint of relationship. Oberth won¬
ders why the UFO operators have not communicated with us.
This takes my thinking to the megaglyphs of Peru, Mexico, and
southwest U.S.A. Regarding efforts on our part to communicate
with the UFO, Oberth says:

We might try to communicate with them by radio signal. Mathe¬
matical symbols might be interpreted by them. A mutual mathematical
understanding might be the forerunner of written words and sounds.

Finally, because I’m suspicious about the news explosion
across the land, I will point out that 18,000 mph, the hypothetical
speed of the yet-to-be-launched, silly satellite is a speed fre¬
quently reported of the UFO. Why is the little satellite to have
the same velocity?

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 79

I smell odors of a dead rodent from the whole publicity cam¬
paign about the silly satellite.

The true, uninflated value of this monstrously juvenile enter¬
prise was demonstrated several months before the newspapers
were tipped off to start the ballyhoo and feed readers the pureed
Pentagon pap. As early as February and March, news commenta¬
tors cried the tidings that we not only could, but almost certainly
would, launch a satellite within a very few years at most—but got
no public response.

And yet, all hail! When Washington pulls the strings, assuring
the public that the world will have an artificial satellite, a thou¬
sand reporters spring into action.

On March 10, 1955, the Washington Post and Times-Herald,
in an Associated Press feature by Frank Carey, reported the
American Rocket Society’s request to the National Science
Foundation to make a definitive study of the possibilities and
practical value of launching a small unmanned satellite. Some of
the scientific applications would be.

1. Gather information on the upper atmosphere.

2. Study the effects of outer-space radiation on experimental
animals carried aloft.

3. Serve as a relay station for radio communication and per¬
haps aid in making TV telecasts across oceans.

4. Help in more detailed mapping of the earth.

5. Furnish additional information on whether space flight will
eventually be possible by man.

6. Obtain new data for meteorology and astronomy.

On May 26,1955, news commentator Stewart Alsop announced
a debate on the satellite (Miami Daily News, May 26, 1955). He
said:

With a determined, but not very expensive, effort it should be
possible to launch an artificial satellite into space about this time next
year . . . contention of technicians in the missle field who have submit¬
ted plans to the Pentagon . . .

Alsop announced that the object would be about nine inches
in diameter, containing no instruments except a radar-response

80 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

gadget which could hardly be expected to yield much scientific
information.

Scientific purists have objected to the name “satellite” and
want the object called “orbital vehicle.” It was suggested that
the experiment could be carried out relatively inexpensively as a
sort of side issue to an extended Intercontinental Ballistic Missille
(IBM) program.

But the most cogent reasons were related to the Soviet devel¬
opments. Alsop pointed out two significant recent headlines:
SOVIETS CLAIM SUCCESSFUL LAUNCHING OF EARTH
SATELLITE; and US RADAR CONFIRMS EXISTENCE OF
SOVIET SATELLITES.

Alsop further states that satellite detection stations had been
established at White Sands, New Mexico, and on Mt. Wilson,
California. It is stated that not one, but two satellites were dis¬
covered, but turned out to be natural rather than artificial. Read¬
ers of The Case for the UFO may recall the description of two
UFO seen by astronomers about eighty years ago, evidently con¬
trolled objects closer than the moon.

Further, according to Mr. Alsop, the Russians, in April (1955),
installed a high-sounding governmental agency called Permanent
Interdepartmental Commission for Interplanetary Communica¬
tion, which included their greatest scientist, Peter Kapitsa.

This book is not primarily concerned with the military use of
space flight, but it is, however, important to realize that space
flight questions have been taken much more seriously by foreign
countries. Have we become blase gadgeteers?

To return to the great blast-off by the press on the satellites:
as a sporting event, it may have been a bit of news. But as a chal¬
lenge to Russia? Well, the Russians started working on such things
a while ago. But we did beat Russia to the announcement!

Or— did we?

In the Washington Post and Times-Herald, Thursday, Novem¬
ber 11, 1954, almost a year before the announcement of the
satellite launching, the following article appeared under a United
Press dateline from Santa Monica, California:

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 81

The Soviet Union is rushing plans for an interplanetary space
ship, and unless America awakens to this real danger, the West may
lose its margin of power, an aircraft company executive said today.

“Building of a space-ship by the Russians would have a far-
reaching effect on the West,” said William P. Lear, head of Lear, Inc.
“We know they’re working hard at it, too.”

Lear said the Russians “recruited” several top German scientists,
chiefly from the Nazi Missile stations at Peenemunde, after World War
II for the purpose of exploring the possibilities of interplanetary
warfare.

“The Germans were thinking in terms of space ships as early as
1939 . . . It will be possible to build a space ship within another year.”
he added [Italics mine, because it is now more than a year since
that prediction was made.]

Now, I am inclined strongly to the belief that there may be
another purpose behind the furor over the Minimum Orbital
Unmanned Satellite of the Earth, otherwise known as MOUSE,
otherwise as the silly satellite. Sharp readers suspected that the
whole fanfare was part of a not-so-subtle build-up toward a major
announcement about Unidentified Flying Objects.

In fact, one of the best-informed American UFO reporters
stated in August, 1955, that he expected something significant to
break within a period of months. Independently, I had then come
to the same conclusion.

Is our government getting set to claim the invention of the
the UFO? Or, while we wondering, is Russia? Who will be the
first to “invent” the UFO which people have been seeing for at
least 3,500 years?

The silly satellite was kept in the public eye by the major news
release of October, 1955. I refer to the release from the boys with
security clearance, that UFO just naturally ain’t. This strikes me
as protesting overmuch and we suspect that this October denial
of UFO was directly related to the satellite smokescreen.

The October release not only denied UFO, but said that the
government was just about to spring some aircraft on us that will
look like UFO. (Ask your Congressman how the government
knows what a UFO —and they do mean flying saucers— looks
like!)

82 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

But many would like to know what the Pentagonian troglo-
dites’ next step will be in “breaking it gently to us.” What kind of
public education is it which confuses the public on such a grand
scale? And if this gentle approach is defended as a means of pre¬
venting public panic, then to where can I panic when the first
UFO anchors to the Empire State Building?

I am trying to make clear the danger of the silly satellite’s
confusing the public. Because the satellite has been heralded as
a stepping stone to space travel, many UFO devotees have been
misled into believing it little short of a veritable UFO.

Let’s get one thing straight: neither rockets nor freely re¬
volving® man-made moons are true stepping-stones to space
travel, much less relatives to UFO.

True, rockets fired up and erupting like boils in the outer skin
of our atmosphere and the rising volumes of hot air about the
artificial satellite all stimulate that upward look toward UFO.
But what a costly way of introducing us subtly to UFO.

I can go along with the rocket and satellite experiments only
as an expression of pioneering desire to see what’s on the other
side of the mountain . . . but not what’s on the other side of the
moon. Its scientific or military value is dubious; and as a stepping-
stone to space travel or UFO activity, the value is nil.

Those who have spent lifetimes promoting rocket power as
a solution to space flight have been backing the wrong horse.
Rocket power is not the answer to sustained space flight. If we
have had civilizations on earth, or around the earth, which devel¬
oped space flight experimentally or through accidental discovery

0 Two types of rotary motion are dealt with in celestial mechanics:
(1) a body “revolves” around its primary, as for example, the moon “re¬
volves around the earth; or the earth revolves around die sun. (2) A body
“rotates” about its axis, as the earth rotates once in twenty-four hours, or
the sun is about twenty-six days. A third type of quasi-rotary motion is
the special indulgence of the galaxies or spiral nebulae. It is still a some¬
what unsettled question as to whether the components of the great spiral
conglomeries are in true revolution about the gravitational center or whether
diey move along the spiral arms. If we assume gravity to act inversely as
the fifth power of the distance instead of inversely as the square of the
distance, we end up with spiral motion instead of elliptical or circular
orbital motion.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 83

(which seems probable), they certainly used some source of
power other than rockets—cheap power.

A commentator who has access to special information, writing
in the Weekly Review, August 26, 1955, a British non-profit in¬
telligence sheet, expresses a dim view of space-conquest:

Encouraged by scientists of first importance, public opinion thinks
that, somehow or other, man is now so clever that what he could
not solve when circumscribed by this planet, may be solved by mastery
of interplanetary research. . . .

It is rather odd that we should think that if we could not stop
the encroachment of the Sahara, let alone reclaim it, nevertheless we
can colonize the moon; and very likely, somehow or other, bring
Mars and Venus into our service . . .

Some may think that this is extreme escapism. How far people
accept all this one cannot say; but certainly many do. . . .

This mood (encouraged by some scientists) makes us ready to
spend immense sums of money—billions in fact—in an effort to reach
the moon. ... It is odd that, when a few paltry millions are refused
for better roads and land reclamation, billions are to be spent in
trying to reach Mars. Can this be serious inter-government policy? ....

The American, British, and Russian governments are not quite so
moon-struck as it would seem . . . these experiments are largely
for military purposes and do not go beyond an attempt to circulate
a projectile a few hundred miles above the earth’s surface. Your
services reported such projects in Russia long ago. They were and
are in the military context. [Italics mine]

. . . different ideas are emerging and [I paraphrase] interplanetary
travel is not in the picture. ... I have heard things which lead me to
think that what is now considered the summit of scientific knowledge is
about to be drastically changed and, while this may not affect the
high altitude projectile observations, it will affect anything approach¬
ing visits to Mars.

I am sure of two things: first, that many will disagree with me.
Second, that we are on the verge of revolutionary thoughts on inter¬
planetary questions, which will change our present ideas. This may
advance our thinking in certain respects but the signs are that it will
exclude interplanetary travel by inhabitants of this planet.

I agree with much of this comment, though I think we are on
the verge of space travel in the neighborhood of the earth, or at
least of apprehending such activity. There is more than a mild
hint in this report to indicate that new vistas are opening in

84 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 85

qualitative science—a discovery (probably not an invention) of
new principles of locomotion in space. But this will be new
only to our present racial generation. It was probably known to
our predecessors of thousands of years ago.

Therefore, without wishing to decry the effort, we can say that
an attempt to push basketballs through the ionosphere is not UFO
activity or a stepping-stone to space travel. The UFO is a horse¬
power of anotiier tint.

♦ The Man-Made Moon ♦

Willy-nilly the human race is growing up and reaching toward
maturity. Now with adolescent brashness it is beginning to
imagine that it has all the answers.

It has been in the process of intellectual development for
many, many centuries. During those centuries, it has consistently
looked towards, and reached for, the stars.

Our race has been in a state of generation and re-generation
since before the days of the Flood. Many times the youthful and
growing race of mankind felt frustrated, thinking its goals were
too distant for attainment.

Perhaps resurgent mankind passed through puberty and
reached adolescence—probably during the Renaissance. At that
time there was a tremendous increase in man’s racial capacity for
learning, and the major accumulation of his knowledge began.
Within our time, our own life span, this accelerating accumulation
of knowledge has reached frightening proportions.

Today mankind is in the difficult position of an army whose
mechanized advanced elements are moving at an ever-increasing
pace, with which its main forces cannot keep up. The vanguard
is composed of our young engineers, scientists, researchers and
independent thinkers, who are moving forward at an awesome
pace.

Man is setting out on one of the greatest conquests in his

history. The mastery over space is an accomplishment of a higher
order than anything he has previously undertaken. It is only
within our own lifetime that he has begun seriously to consider
jumping off the surface of the earth to explore space. Only within
the last decade have sober calculations been made toward this
accomplishment.

Within this decade, man’s conceptions of space have changed
in an astounding manner. Today, even governments express con¬
fidence that man, or his agents, will leave the surface of the
earth on reconnaissance trips within a very few years. The con¬
quest of space is before us. It is for us, the people, to decide
whether we have the mature judgment to take this venture whose
risks include mankind’s self-destruction.

The part played by Russia in the race for space, like every¬
thing else about that vast curtained land, is a mystery. However,
there have been some significant hints.

For example, Intelligence Digest (October, 1946) said:

The Soviets have ordered the building of a special center of
astronomical research in which will be a number of institutes, observa¬
tories, and special air fields where flying observatories, special balloons
and airships are to be based for carrying out protracted studies at high
altitudes.

Little, if anything, appeared in the public press about this.
The Russians were said to have procured special machinery, the
inference being that this machinery came from abroad. There
were reports that work was going on with monster mirrors, and
that the Russians were busy on a highly secret project involving
cosmic rays.

At that time, atomic development was in every mind and
(without much evidence) it was surmised that the secret Russian
project was related to atomic development. However, the Rus¬
sians were reported to have made some significant post-atomic
discoveries.

What the Intelligence Digest reports is well worth listening
to. It has proven remarkably accurate on other occasions. For
example it announced, many months in advance, that the Russians

86 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

would explode an atomic bomb the following spring. The detona¬
tion occurred close to the predicted time.

One thing is certain, fear of our stockpile of atomic and
hydrogen bombs plays very little part in Russian policy. I wonder
why?

In The Case for the UFO it was postulated that this secret
development in Russian might involve some kind of UFO. How¬
ever, these reports and the equipment described could just as
easily have been applied to the development of a satellite.

Both possibilities involve aspects of space flight. We usually
think of space flight as involving a contraption which may contain
a crew of operators. A satellite, on the other hand, is merely a
special type of missile and may not even be, in the full sense, a
“guided missile.”

There is the further possibility that all this secret research by
the Russians merely envisions a method of guiding missiles by
astronomical controls. Similar work has been done by Britain and
the United States in which the stars are used, by means of photo¬
electric devices, to keep missiles on their courses. It is question¬
able whether such a project would have involved all that reported
equipment, or have been so jealously guarded. More likely it
dealt with either a satellite or a UFO. In any case, if the Russians
do beat us in establishing a satellite in the ionosphere, or in space
beyond, we could not honestly say that we were not warned. It
is inconceivable that our government took no notice of these news
items.

A comment by Robert N. Webster, in Fate Magazine, Septem¬
ber, 1949, has a bearing on artificial satellites. He says that,
according to reports from the rocket-proving grounds at White
Sands, New Mexico, one high-altitude rocket did not return to
the earth! Excitement about this was so great that the story leaked
out before radar operators could get together and censor their
stories for publication.

This rocket, like others, was monitored by radar for the pur¬
pose of triangulation. All the operators claimed that at the peak
of its trajectory, about 250 miles above the earth, it just vanished.
This may very well be the highest altiitude attained by any instru¬
ment of modem man.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 87

The rocket simply disappeared as though it had disintegrated
or de-materialized. A movement by the rocket into an orbit would
have been detected by at least some of the ground radar.

There was some mild speculation at the time associating the
disappearance with possible activities of UFO. It was known from
previous reports that UFO joined some of the experimental
rockets in their vertical climb and had practically flown circles
around them in spite of their tremendous speeds.

The report cited in Fate Magazine is only one of several not
officially confirmed by the United States Government but taken
as fact by American experts. Some assumed that the rocket, for
some unknown reason, generated an enormous and unexpected
thrust at the last moment, which carried it free of the earth’s at¬
mosphere. This is not exactly in conformance with the radar
reports that the rocket simply disappeared. In the absence of
candid government statements it is difficult to determine the facts.

If this rocket really did escape, it may be about 800 miles out
in space, completely beyond the earth’s atmosphere, and coasting
on its momentum. At that distance, if it is moving with a speed
sufficient to balance the pull of gravity from the earth, the artificial
satellite would be moving at about 16,000 mph, and circling the
earth about thirteen times every day, or roughly once every hour
and fifty minutes.

A Pentagon spokesman maintaining the olive-drab cloud of
bureaucratic secrecy, denied any knowledge of a runaway rocket.
However, every statement coming out of Washington must be
examined for “gobbledegook.” Take note that this statement
applies only to “runaway rockets.” Nothing is said about dis¬
appearing rockets.

It is unlikely that this experimental rocket powered to go 250
miles contained enough unanticipated power to take it to a height
of 800 miles. What did, in fact, become of it? Since radar reported
not a movement into space but a disappearance, and since these
rockets have been accompanied by UFO, may we assume that
this rocket was carried off by some space-craft?

Or is this the “satellite” for which Dr. Tombaugh is searching
so arduously at the behest of the Military?

Perhaps it is only recently that even natural satellites were

88 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

understood or comprehended. Very few people understood their
nature before Copernicus. Our moon was then the only known
satellite, and its relationship to the earth was not thoroughly
understood.

About the turn of the sixteenth century, Jonathan Swift wrote
his satire Gullivers Travels. We can skip over many of the fic¬
tional accomplishments of the Laputian astronomers, including
the excellence of their telescopes and the fact that they had
already catalogued 10,000 stars and calculated the motions of
comets. We can ignore the account of the flying island on which
their capital was built and on which their astronomers conducted
observations. We can also skip the fact that the flying island of
Laputa is the first example of a true flying saucer to be found in
literature.

More significant is the fact that Swift must have had some
kind of prescience about astronomical data not yet discovered.

Referring to the astronomers of Laputa, Gulliver has this to
say:

They have likewise discovered two lesser stars, or satellites, which
revolve about Mars, whereof the innermost is distant from the center of
the primary planet exactly three of the diameters, and the outermost five;
the former revolves in the space of ten hours and the latter in twenty-
one and one-half hours, so that the squares of their periodical times
are very near in the same proportion with the cubes of their distance
from the center of Mars, which evidently shows them to be governed
by the same law of gravitation, that influences the other heavenly
bodies.

Now this is one of the most remarkable predictions ever made.
Nothing but some type of extra-sensory perception can account
for it.

The satellites of Mars, two in number, were not actually dis¬
covered by telescopes until almost two hundred years after Swift
wrote Gullivers Travels. The sudden discovery, or appearance of
these bodies was one of the strange events which ushered in the
“incredible decade”—1877-1886.

Satellites so close to the surface of their parent planet and
revolving in such short periods were completely unknown to the

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 89

formal science of Swift’s day, and except in the case of Mars, are
unknown today. In Swift’s time the period of rotation of Mars,
that is, the length of its day, was unknown. Is it not truly remark¬
able, therefore, that the two Martian satellites almost completely
fulfill the description given by Swift nearly two centuries before?

These little moons are abnormal in almost every respect as
compared to other satellites. There appears to be no way of
integrating these two objects into the systematic placement of
planets and satellites set by Bode’s law. Their size, also, is un¬
usual. These two satellites are too small to be seen except with
the largest telescopes. Even then it is impossible to make accurate
direct measurements of their diameter, and indirect estimates
have to be used. The smaller is thought to be seven to ten miles
in diameter, and the larger about fifteen.

Their appearance in the skies of Mars must be truly unique.
The movement of one of these tiny moons is so rapid that it makes
more than one complete circuit a day (as planned for our silly
satellite) and therefore rises in the west and sets in the east. The
other has a period so close to the rotation or day of Mars, that
this little globe stays in the sky continuously for days at a time—
an ideal scanning or take-off platform.

There is more! These suddenly appearing moons are about
the size of the disturbances involved in crater Linne and the
‘Bowler hats” now increasing in numbers on our moon. And they
were discovered shortly after the disappearance of Linne!

♦ Mars and Its Satellites ♦

The description of these two satellites, and particularly of the
innermost one, almost duplicates descriptions of artificial satellites.

In most physical characteristics these, and again particularly
the inner one, are anomalous to the general set-up in the solar
system. Serious students have suggested that at least one and per-

90 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 91

haps both Martian satellites are artificial, created and placed
relative to Mars by intelligent beings.

Until very recently, astronomers have scoffed at any such
notion. But today our government proposes an artificial satellite
to be in place within two years, as the first step in the establish¬
ment of a large artificial satellite to circle the earth as a laboratory
site. If we can be so close to building such a contrivance and
maintaining it in space, there seems to be little reason to question
the ability of some older civilization on another planet such as
Mars to do so.

Add to this the mysterious flashes and beams of light seen on
and near the planet Mars within the past seventy-five years. This
is what we may anticipate after our own establishment of a space
way-station.

We can only conjecture why a space station should have been
set up over the planet Mars. Conceivably the surface of Mars
became uninhabitable, through dessication or artificially gen¬
erated radioactivity. If conditions on the surface became intoler¬
able, an intelligent race might retreat into space and set up a new
frontier for life. This is not to say that the Martian satellites are
UFO. But there is reason to believe that they are artificial.

Mars is considered to be geologically older than earth. If a
civilization exists or has existed on Mars, it probably reached a
higher intellectual development than ours.

It may be, then, that the concept of artificial satellites and
space-stations is not without precedent and man can take encour¬
agement from what he sees on a neighboring planet. At any rate,
the size of the satellites is not so great that artificial construction
is to be considered impossible.

There have also been some peculiar appearances over the
planet Jupiter. Sometimes, more shadows of satellites have been
seen on Jupiter s surface than the number of its visible satellites!
And sometimes the shadows have appeared elswhere than the
places where a shadow should have appeared, and we are not
altogether certain these extra objects were shadows. They may
well have been maneuverable creations between us and Jupiter.
Admittedly some of these happening were recorded many years

ago in the period of the mysterious 1880’s. Later, in the second
quarter of the twentieth century, some extremely small satellites
were discovered near Jupiter through our powerful new tele¬
scopes. Conceivably some of these shadows or extra satellites were
the tiny ones recently discovered.

These minute satellites of Jupiter are probably larger than
those of Mars. But compared with Jupiter’s four major satellites
they are insignificant.

Observations have been made, particularly in the ninteenth
century, of small objects near the planets Venus and Mercury.
No astronomer could make any reasonable explanation of what
they were. On at least one occasion an object was seen leaving
Venus, or at least appearing to leave; on another occasion it
seemed to be returning. Yet no verified object moving in an orbit
around either Venus or Mercury has been discovered.

Our hypothesis is that these objects were artificially created
and intelligently controlled.

This assumption may be challenged, but in the light of the
announcement by government and other reputable scientists it
is no longer ridiculous to make such assumptions nor to interpret
observational data from the viewpoint that artificially created,
maneuverable structures may exist in the solar system.

Contingent upon the establishment of a space-station moving
in an orbit around the earth large enough to contain observa¬
tional equipment and laboratories, we may be able to determine
more definitely the nature of the satellites of Mars. We may also
learn whether there are small satellites accompanying Venus
and Mercury. Observations from such a space-station may like¬
wise reveal a larger number of satellites accompanying Jupiter
and Saturn. Once we establish broadcasting and observational
facilities outside the earth’s ionosphere, the possibilities of inter¬
planetary communication become enormously enhanced.

It is incorrect to speak of an “artificial” moon, for the word
moon is properly the name for our satellite. True, it is customary
to speak of the “moons” of a planet—newspapers do it all the
kme, but textbooks seldom do. Satellite is the correct generic
term.

92 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 93

Any artificial satellite which we may place in space by means
of rockets or any other type of power will have little resem¬
blance to our moon. First, it will be far closer to the earth;
second, it will be much smaller than the moon. In fact, within
any foreseeable time, such a satellite will likely be so small as
barely to be seen by the unaided eye.

Because the artificial satellite is functional, it will not neces¬
sarily share all the characteristics of the moon or other “natural”
satellites. But, of one thing we are certain: once it attains an
orbit, defined by its velocity around the earth, the little object
will have to obey the laws of gravitation and celestial mechanics.
Consequently its artificiality would be difficult to determine, once
it settles into a definite orbit . . . unless it were subject to in¬
telligent control: remote or internal. Therein lies the difference
between any small satellites, natural or artificial, detected in
the earth-moon system, and the true UFO observed by such men
as Watson, Harrison, and Swift. These objects seemed to defy
the laws of gravitational motion and thus disclose their intelligent
nature.

<#> Before Rockets ♦

Most of the radical developments of engineering and science were
taken as jokes until put into operation. The flying machine was
a joke, particularly to mathematicians, until just about the turn
of the century, when Langley and the Wright brothers got such
machines up into the air. The local plutocrats of my hometown
ponderously stated in 1917 that there was no future to this
ridiculous thing called wireless.

People laughed (or trembled) at the first notion of a balloon
carrying people aloft. But ballooning, then called “aerostatics,”
did not point the way toward mechanical flight, even to intelli¬
gent and thinking people. Why?

Because ballooning made use of the principle of flotation,

while mechanical flight is a dynamic phenomenon. The former
has not been very successful, but flight by dynamic thrust has
conquered distance and time to a degree. However, just as areo-
dynamic flight superseded balloon-flotation, so will the new
principles, which will give us space flight, supersede aerody¬
namic and rocket flight.

The development of the little satellite is the last, farthest
reach of dynamic, or thrust-powered flight. Its limitations are
comparable to those of aerostatics. It must give way to the
emerging concept of space flight through gravity control.

Our present probing of the upper air with rockets is com¬
parable to the experiments of our forebears of a hundred years
ago. They were first afraid to ascend in balloons. They experi¬
mented by sending birds and animals up in balloons. When
nothing happened to them, a few brave men went up. Even
then, only one hundred years ago, science did not associate
the rarefied air on mountaintops with the atmosphere entered
by a soaring balloon. But science was then still debating the
reality of meteors from space.

That timorous beginning of flight surprises us by the lack
of comprehension and analytical ability of that time. Today we
are so conditioned by the seemingly unlimited strides in engineer¬
ing, and particularly in aviation, that we accept the thought of
an artificial satellite without hesitation and consider it a step
towards UFO and space flight.

Gradually the public mind has become conditioned to accept¬
ing without question almost anything in the nature of high-
altitude ascensions either within our atmosphere or beyond. But
caution is needed. The soaring rocket experimenters are having a
field day—besides holding down interesting and well-paid jobs.

We cannot hope that a metallic basketball, carried to the
upper reaches of our atmosphere by rockets, will be either space
flight or the answer to the problem of UFO—even if the little
ball does follow a conventional orbit set by conventional minds.

I do consider true space flight as being related to the
mysteries of the UFO. I believe the UFO will be found to be
using the same types of power and controls. I do not believe

94 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

that aerodynamics or rocket power will produce space flight or
UFO.

What bothers me is that the blind and gullible confidence
of the twentieth century has displaced the equally blind fear
of those earlier days. Where we previously feared to tread,
however softly, we now rush pell-mell up a blind alley.

As I write these words, I wonder again what frustration, or
what frightening knowledge prompted the suicide of Secretary
Forrestal of the Department of Defense. We do know that, in
1948, he officially reported that the department was considering
the military possibilities of an artificial satellite.

We know, further, that his department has maintained con¬
tinued researches in space flight. So seriously is this taken that
a department of space medicine has been established, in the
School of Aviation Medicine at Randolph Field in Texas, to
conduct research on what would happen to passengers under
conditions of space flight.

In 1953, a Philadelphia newspaper announced that the gov¬
ernment was letting a contract for determining whether algae,
grown in tanks abroad space craft, could produce oxygen for a
crew, or convert carbon-dioxide into usable oxygen.

Today, we are asked to believe that all of this is suddenly
news!

Satellite-building is considered by most authorities to be an
important step in the development of astronautics, a term coined
by the French novelist Rosmy for navigation in outer space.
We’ve already had international congresses on astronautics.

Many flying saucer societies are in the act, generally accept¬
ing without question that preliminary steps to space flight must
include the building and launching of satellites and their main¬
tenance as space way-stations.

Some experts have stated, within the past five years, that
given a sufficient amount of money they could produce a space
station or artificial satellite to move around the earth forever and
serve as an observation station, or as a springboard to further
probing into space.

The idea of an artificial moon is not especially new. Dreamers

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 95

and “astronauts,” as they call themselves, began to give thought
to such things more than twenty-five years ago. The writers of
science fiction were envisioning such a space station in the
twenties. Satellite enthusiasts considered it a necessary step
toward the launching of interplanetary space-ships, postulating
a quick visit to the moon, and a takeoff there in the general
direction of Mars. The purpose of the space station is to estab¬
lish a launching platform at such a distance from the earth
that gravitation would be weakened, with a corresponding
saving in fuel. The initial speed of departure would approximate
escape velocity. 0

It is doubtful if Army, Navy, or Air Force is seriously in¬
terested in visiting Mars. But in view of the unbridled intrusion
of government into every conceivable activity, it would be brash
indeed to say that no part of government is so interested. When
one thinks of the enormous range of do-goodism, interplanetary
point-four plans and give-away programs are not inconceivable.
The military is more practical and believes in the advantages of
an observation platform, however small, in very high altitudes
or even outside the atmosphere. As things stand, however, the
scientists have most to gain from a small artificial satellite.

At present, no means other than rocket power has been con¬
sidered for hoisting the necessary material into space for build¬
ing a satellite of any appreciable size.

Some responsible writers assert that it will never be possible
to leave the earth for a long period in anything but a rocket
ship. This naive assumption is based on over-simplification and
ignorance. True, rocket power is the only kind we know capable
of moving a mass in space once we are outside a tangible atmos¬
phere. However, this ignores the fact that a rocket is effective
only because it can kick material out from a jet, and that this
reaction is as important as the power generated.

Theoretically, an artificial satellite or man-made moon can
be planned for any convenient altitude above the earth, pro-

° Escape velocity: The speed at which a rocket or other body will
completely defy gravity and continue its course in space without further
application of power. This is about 6Js miles per second at the earth’s surface.

98 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 97

vided it is directed into an orbit at that altitude and at a speed
exactly sufficient to offset the earth’s gravitation at the required
height. At 350 miles this orbital velocity would have to be about
four and one-half miles per second. At a little less than 1100
miles, an altitude favored by rocket specialist Von Braun, a
speed of something more than four miles per second would be
needed and a complete revolution would be made around the
earth about every two hours. The higher the missile, the slower
the speed needed to stay at its orbital altitude.

At a distance of approximately 22,300 miles, an artificial
satellite would revolve around the earth once every twenty-four
hours. If this satellite revolved directly above the equator east¬
ward, it would remain directly over a fixed spot on the earth’s
surface for an indefinite period of time.

♦ Goddard’s Rocket Experiments ♦

Official thinking now fixes on rocket power to launch a space
satellite. But only a short time ago official opinion did its best
to stifle the development of rocket power. Do you know the part
Dr. Robert Hutchings Goddard had in making the satellite a
possibility?

Few people do.

He is the forgotten man of rocket power. He died in 1945,
after living to see the Germans exploit his designs in the devas¬
tating V-2 rocket. Just as the Wright Brothers pioneered the
airplane, Dr. Goddard pioneered the rocket.

Some responsible newspaper commentators, realizing the
injustice of ignoring Dr. Goddard in the recent announcements,
have brought out biographical material on this remarkable man.

Dr. Goddard labored for decades to develop rockets, hoping
ultimately to send one into space. It was Goddard who developed
liquid fuel for rockets and thereby multiplied the efficiency of
rocket propulsion.

Goddard began in New England in the early part of this
century; then, with meager funds, he carried on in the desert
country of New Mexico, at a site not far from the now famous
White Sands proving grounds.

Now there is a rocket exhibit in the aircraft building of tire
National Air Museum on the grounds of the Smithsonian Insti¬
tution. Here the visitor can follow Goddard’s work. It is said
that the largest and last of Goddard’s rockets, intended for peace¬
ful research, inspired the German V-2 with which Hitler’s
diabolical experts came close to demolishing London.

Dr. Goddard was born on October 5, 1882, one of the years
of the “incredible decade.” More cosmic and terrestrial events
of unexplained and seemingly inexplicable nature, happened in
that decade, than in any other like period in recorded history.
In that year the great comet of 1882 was in the skies, awe¬
somely visible to the naked eye. In November of the same year,
a weird object of indeterminable size sailed majestically through
the skies of northern Europe and England. It has been described
variously as an aurora, or a UFO. This “thing” crossed over
England, heading southwest, at a height of one to two hundred
miles. To this day it remains unidentified.

A few years before Goddard’s birth, but still within the
memorable decade, the astronomers Watson of Michigan and
Swift of New York saw two spherical, clearly defined, objects
near the sun and moon during a total eclipse. These completely
fill the requirements and description of artificial satellites or
navigable space structures.

We cannot say for certain that Dr. Goddard was influenced
by this cosmic condition. Still it cannot be denied that there was
something of the auspicious in the timing of Dr. Goddard’s
birth.

This we do know, however: at about the age of thirty-eight,
Dr. Goddard became a professor at Clark University at Wor¬
cester, Massachusetts. His first rocket study began soon after.

The first known flight of a liquid-fueled rocket was Dr.
Goddard’s accomplishment. It lasted only a few seconds and
attained a speed of only about 60 mph. The date: March 16,

98 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 99

1926. Dr. Goddard was forty-four and had spent approximately
twenty years in study and experimentation. He was a persistent
but reticent man. Only two brief reports were published during
his lifetime, but he left voluminous notes when he died in 1945.

I happen to be old enough to remember and to have been
interested in this initial drive towards space. Even in the
twenties there was something inspiring about the attempts of a
quiet scientist to reach outer space. And Dr. Goddard was doing
this singlehandedly and without fanfare. As I remember, Dr.
Goddard was considered something of a crackpot. A rocket, after
all, had no use except for Fourth of July fireworks, or at best,
for shooting ropes to foundering ships.

Dr. Goddard certainly was not a salesman. He may have
been that reprehensible human being, an introvert, but today,
after having had the brashness to write something serious on
unidentified flying objects, I have come to believe that Dr.
Goddard was reticent to avoid becoming the public laughing¬
stock of orthodox science, government, and engineering.

Goddard was handicapped by trying to operate on the meager
income of a professor in a small college, but he was scientifically
thorough and meticulous. He made the best possible use of
data accumulated from his successful and unsuccessful rocket
flights, of which the latter were in the majority. As for official
opinion, at one time Goddard was arrested for disturbing the
peace; and ultimately he was forbidden to fire more rockets in
Massachusetts.

But Goddard was not altogether without the attention and
interest of progressively-minded people. Charles A. Lindbergh,
while serving as an adviser on aeronautics to the Guggenheim
Foundation, interested Daniel Guggenheim and his son Harry
in financing the rocket project. Guggenheim funds, joined with
those of the Smithsonian Institute, enabled Dr. Goddard to get
his plans off the drawing board and into the sky. Funds were
taken from the somewhat obscure Hodgkins’ Fund set up years
before to promote exploration of the air.

Even in such things there can be a note of humor. It appears
that one of the grants made by this ponderous fund was three
miles of silk thread to the inventor of a high-altitude kite!

Government officials, with characteristic apathy for anything
new and with customary high regard for bureaucratic decorum,
took a dim view of Goddard’s rocket. If the reader thinks this
is funny let him try to interest government officials in any
scientific project not originating within the bureaucratic com¬
pounds. The fact that the taxpayer is now putting up many
millions of dollars to subsidize rocket developments is neither
here nor there, for the government waited until it was almost
too late and is now backing a horse unlikely to place in the
final heat.

However, other governments, as has been the case in all
matters pertaining to aviation and to aerial exploration, were
more interested. The German Military Attach^ in Washington
became the best customer for the pamphlets issued by the
Smithsonian Institution, describing Goddard’s liquid-fuel rocket.

But let us go back in the history of rockets before the time
of Goddard. After all, the rocket is a very old appliance.

Though one of the oldest forms of self-propulsion, its nature
was understood by very few people prior to this century. Believe
it or not, within the current month of writing and of the govern¬
ment’s announcement of the satellite program, I have heard,
from people considering themselves well-informed, completely
mistaken notions of rocket propulsion.

The rocket is a powerful but very inefficient mechanism.
The Chinese are almost universally accredited with the invention
or discovery of gunpowder. We believe discovery is the better
word. Somehow or other, rockets were developed at about the
same time, and it is not difficult to think of an ancient Chinese
experimenting with gunpowder, setting off a charge which caused
a powder container to whiz up like a rocket.

Gunpowder and rockets appear to have been brought to the
Arabs by the conquering Mongols. The intelligent Moslems,
against whom they were used, soon found out how to make their
own gunpowder and rockets, and so the art spread to Europe.

Despite centuries of use the rocket was not fully understood
until Newton developed the basic laws of physical motion.

During the conquest of India, the British were awed by the
force of rocket missiles which the Indians had acquired through

100 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

contact with the Chinese. Their effectiveness impressed a young
officer named William Congreve. Beginning about 1801, Con¬
greve set out to improve the rockets for military purposes, apply¬
ing the scientific methods available at the time. He produced a
much improved military rocket. When used in 1806, in the
bombardment of Boulogne, rockets devastated the city by the
fires which they caused. In the year after, 1807, Copenhagen
was practically destroyed by means of rockets. During our war
of 1812, the British used rockets in the bombardment of Fort
McHenry at Baltimore. From them came the phrase “rockets’
red glare” in “The Star Spangled Banner,” written by Francis
Scott Key at that time. However, rockets were displaced by
other missile weapons and did not stage a comeback until the
Second World War, when the Germans took up where Goddard
had pointed the way.

Though rockets fell out of favor as military weapons, interest
in them continued for other purposes. The sky-rocket became
an indispensable adjunct to celebrations.

Rockets found peacetime applications of a more practical
nature. They were used in maritime life-saving operations for
carrying ropes or lifelines from the shore or from rescue craft
to ships in distress. In this capacity, rockets were reported
to have saved more than 12,000 lives on the coast of England.

Since the original discovery, there seems to have been no
qualitative improvement in rockets. There have been many
quantitative improvements and today’s rocket is incomparably
superior to its predecessors, but the principle of its propulsion
remains the same although we have a better understanding of
it than the Chinese, Arabs, and Hindus. The early Chinese
rockets appear to have been made by filling bamboo stems with
loose powder, the natural divisions within the bamboo serving
as pockets for the explosive. A hole was bored through one of
the ends of the bamboo section and the crude, loose, black
powder was painstakingly pushed through the hole until the
section was filled. With a modern black powder such a con¬
trivance would have blown up before it could have risen into
the air; but with the old slow-burning powder made by the
Chinese, the expelled gasses could lift the rocket before internal

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 101

pressure became great enough to rupture the rocket’s shell.

From the time of Congreve to the time of Goddard, rockets
were powered with powdered or solid fuel, the latter being
simply compressed gunpowder.

♦ Bagby’s Satellites ♦

Already there may be one or more artificial satellites travelling
in orbits around the earth. On February 18, 1955, the Wash¬
ington Evening Star carried a story by the North American
Newspaper Alliance about the discovery of small satellites close
to the earth seen by an amateur astronomer of high standing,
John P. Bagby. Mr. Bagby disclosed his findings in a paper
read at the Adler Planetarium at Chicago. Mr. Bagby, an elec¬
tronics engineer, is an amateur astronomer, which means only
that he does not make his living thereby. He has the optical
equipment and the technical knowledge to make important dis¬
coveries and to evaluate them. Mr. Bagby made his discovery
with a six-inch telescope which he built himself. He has, asso¬
ciated with him, a team of skilled amateur astronomers who
work together in the identification of objects in the sky. In
reporting his discoveries he asked professional astronomers to
check his observations.

Mr. Bagby began his search two or three years ago when
another amateur reported small spots crossing the moon singly
and in groups. His friend, Mr. Holpuch, a skilled observer both
of telescopic meteors and bird migrations, was not without some
skill in identifying objects in the sky. He reported that the pro¬
cession had continued for an hour and a half with more than
fifty objects observed, some of which glowed dull red occasionally.

Mr. Bagby made his first observation of the phenomenon in
February, 1954. The observation is of such a startling nature
that Mr. Bagby began checking through the world’s astronomical
literature. He found scattered reports of similar objects over the
years.

102 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Mr. Bagby and Mr. Holpuch have seen these objects on
several occasions and believe they are periodic in their appear¬
ance. If this is true, it rules out anything of the nature of
meteors or migratory birds.

The objects observed in 1954 and early 1955 appeared to be
at a distance of about 475 miles from the earth. This lies within
the extreme limits of the earth’s atmosphere.

Remember that similar flights of objects have been reported
during the past 200 years, some of them by professional astrono¬
mers. A flight of objects, moving singly and in pairs across the
face of the sun at intervals of a minute or so was observed at
Zacatacas, Mexico, August 12, 1883. In two hours, 283 crossed
the sun, and 1,100 more were seen by noon next day. Photo¬
graphs were taken and one was reproduced in a French astro¬
nomical journal a few years later. More were seen the next day,
but no evidence has ever been offered to indicate that they were
definitely satellites of the earth.

Mr. Bagby suggested that the “moonlets,” as he called them,
may be traveling as fast as 18,000 mph. If true, and if they are
natural, then they are either closer than 475 miles from the
earth’s surface, or else not moving in a circular orbit. They could,
perhaps, have been moving in an elongated elliptical orbit, but
we have to consider that the speed is greater than that required
by the laws of gravity. Therefore artificial speed and control
are suggested. Most of them appeared to be less than one
hundred feet in diameter, but he warned that this data was not
based on sufficient observation for him to consider it accurate.

This description is so close to that of the proposed artificial
satellite as to be startling. We certainly do not believe any
other nation has forged so far ahead as to launch dozens of
artificial satellites up to one hundred feet in diameter. Yet this
description almost precisely fits the forecast of the satellites we
propose to launch in 1957.

Strangely enough, also, these descriptions match sightings
made in the past which would seem to indicate UFO in space.

The professional astronomer Dr. Clyde W. Tombaugh, who
discovered the planet Pluto in 1930, has been searching under

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 103

U. S. Army auspices for just such satellites as those Mr. Bagby
reported.

We agree with Mr. Tombaugh’s statement:

It is strange that with all the thousands of years man has been
studying the heavens, he has almost ignored space right around the
earth. What I am doing is exploring this unknown area between the
earth and the moon.

This is just what I have been recommending in the search
for UFO in space.

Recently there have been other reports of the discovery of
small satellites, and considerable debate as to whether they are
natural or artificial.

I have pointed out previously that these objects, considered
by most astronomers to be small planets or satellites, may not
be moving in orbits around either the earth or the moon, but may
be existing at a gravitational neutral between the earth and
the sun. To be maintained in such a position, without circling
around the earth, they would have to be artificially controlled.
If so, they fall into the category of UFO.

Such objects, located at a gravitational neutral towards the
sun, would seldom be seen crossing the face of the moon, since
they would line up with the moon only at the time of a new
moon. The fact that they are seldom seen is easily explained
by their being almost in line with the sun and practically in¬
visible because of its glare. I think it possible that both Mr.
Bagby and Mr. Tombaugh err in their assumption of orbital
motion around the earth. If they would look in the vicinity of
the sun they might make some startling discoveries.

Although other reports from Mr. Bagby were expected, noth¬
ing further has appeared. Persistent inquiries of publishers of
some small magazines have been ignored. Again, as in the field
of flying saucers and UFO, we run into mystery if not deliberate
secrecy. Why no announcements from professional astronomers
in this field? Have the Russians then, actually beaten us to the
launching of an artificial satellite, and is this fact being concealed
by both Russia and the U. S. A.?

104 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 105

news that Russia has had a satellite for some months, or even
years? Is this another result of the absurd craze for secrecy
which has engulfed Washington, D.C.? Is this erratic secrecy
part and parcel of the program of concealment which has pre¬
vented the government in general and the military in particular
from issuing a candid and factual statement regarding the UFO?
Is not this kind of secrecy, defended as a means of preventing
panic, itself a form of panic?

Stewart Alsop pointed out that the possibility of the Soviets
eventually launching a satellite was taken so seriously that a
satellite detection project was established at White Sands and
another at Mt. Wilson.

This agrees with other statements made about various searches
for satellites. There was a big stir at the Pentagon when not
one, but two satellites were identified; but it was eventually
announced that both were natural, although never before de¬
tected. Yet, nothing more about these two satellites in the public
press nor in the astronomical publications, so far as this writer
knows. If, in fact, two natural satellites were discovered, the
entire astronomical press would be agog unless for some reason
astronomical announcements had been throttled.

Second, so Alsop pointed out, the Russians had announced
in April (1955) that they had created “A permanent Interde¬
partmental Commission for Interplanetary Communication,”
with their greatest scientist, Peter Kapitsa, on its staff.

Here again, our government appears to have underestimated
the Russians. What is this blindness in our national character
which refuses to allow us to admit any superiority in any other
nation? When will our omniscient pundits in the Pentagon stop
considering themselves the only informed group of people on
the face of the earth? It is high time some of the “boasting” of
the Soviets be taken seriously. Perhaps, at last, the Pentagon is
doing so.

In closing his comment, Alsop stressed the enormous military
value of such satellites for reconnaissance and missile-guidance.
He also said that the news of such a feat on the part of the
Russians would have far-reaching effects on an impressionable
world. If the Russians have beaten us to the launching of a
satellite it is a vast gain for them in prestige and a vast loss
of face for us. It may even indicate a decisive Russian lead over
the Americans and the West in general in the race for what
may be called “The Ultimate Weapon.”

The question is, then, have the Russians actually beaten
us, and has our government been forced to predict our own
launching to save face? Is the U. S. Satellite announcement of
July 30, 1955 merely a step toward breaking the unpalatable

On September 5, 1954, two amateur astronomers named Peter
Bartkus and Theodore McColm were watching the moon through
a six-inch reflecting telescope, using magnifications of 150-200.
Between 10:35 and 11:15 p.m., they observed an astonishing
phenomenon. The moon was in the first quarter, and they saw
what appeared to be a spherical object moving away from the
northern section of Mare Humboldtianum.

The object was not glowing or brilliant, but (and this is
important) it seemed more like a planet’s dull, reflected light.
The same appearance might apply to a satellite. Whatever the
object was, it moved up from the moon in approximately forty
minutes. The observers checked every possibility of reflection
or other illusion and tried different eye pieces and also traversed
the telescope. They were forced to conclude that the object was
definitely in space and in the same telescopic field with the
moon. It was not moving with the moon, for the moon was going
down in the sky or setting in the west, and the object was
moving upward. There was no way of saying for sure how big the
object was or how far from earth.

♦ Newton’s Laws and Space Flight ♦

Sir Isaac Newton, born in 1642, was first to generalize the
mechanical laws of the universe into mathematical form. The
earth, and the rest of the universe so far as we know, operates,
at least approximately, on his three basic laws of motion.

106 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

These laws represent as much genius as do the advanced
equations of Einstein, because Newton had to begin with un¬
coordinated materials of dubious accuracy. To him must go the
credit for making the first broad basic conclusions regarding
universal mechanics, at least in the racial generation of man
which has arisen since the Flood.

Newton’s laws are particularly applicable to rocketry and
equally so to the launching and establishment of an artificial
satellite. They may be summarized as follows:

1. Inertia

Every object continues in a state of rest or of uniform motion
in a straight fine unless influenced by some outside force. Un¬
fortunately, to the average reader of today, the word inertia,
like many others loosely used, has been weakened by additional
meanings. Commonly, we think of inertia as lethargy or slug¬
gishness. But in its scientific sense, inertia is that characteristic
of matter which causes it to resist changes in its velocity or
position.

2. Acceleration

This defines the result of applying a force to a movable mass.
Like any other natural law of physics—including UFO phenomena
—this is a generalization from observed data. Acceleration, it
states, is directly proportional to the force which produces it,
and the change in motion takes place in the direction in which
the applied force acts.

Here we become involved in still further definitions, which
call for some very fine distinctions. We must distinguish between
speed and the more technical term, velocity. Technically, in the
language of physics, speed is the rate at which distance is
traversed, while velocity includes both speed and direction.
Speed alone cannot be conveniently represented by a vector in
graphs, but velocity is readily represented by an arrow whose
length represents speed and whose head points in the direction
of the acting force. In other words, if a force is applied to a
mass, its speed and direction are changed, and the change is
in proportion to the force applied.

Since any mass resists, through its inertia, any attempt by a

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 107

force to change either its speed or its direction, it is possible to
say that acceleration is proportional to force divided by mass.
This law is beautifully simple in application.

One of the least understood applications of this law of
acceleration is the phenomenon of curvilinear or circular motion.
A ball swinging around your finger at the end of a string, although
its speed may be constant, is undergoing acceleration because
its direction of motion is being forced to change continually. It
may be covering a uniform number of inches per second in the
air around you, but it is constantly diverted from the normal
straight line on which it seeks to move. The continuous diverting
force is exerted by the string attached to your finger. This ball,
revolving at any speed you choose, is changing its velocity, but
not its speed; covering a uniform number of inches per second,
but in a constantly changing direction. Technically, the change
is acceleration, just as if the speed itself varied.

This is of the greatest importance in studying the possibilities
of artificial satellites. The moon is moving around the earth in
a path which is almost circular and with a speed which is
practically constant. However, it is constantly changing direction
like the ball you swing at the end of a string. The string is
replaced by gravitation, possibly the least understood of all
known physical forces.

The greatness of this force of gravitation may be conceived
by the following. If the gravitational force, compelling the moon
to circle the earth, were replaced by a steel cable it would have
to be several hundred miles thick. The calculation needed to
compute it would wear out your pencil simply writing down
the number of zeros involved.

In contemplating the establishment of an artificial satellite,
it is necessary to give thought to Newton’s second law of motion.
It is necessary to calculate a velocity, or rather a speed, of the
satellite, just sufficient to balance the earth’s gravitational pull
at the predetermined altitude above the earth’s surface.

3. Action vs. Reaction

While the second law of motion can apply specifically to the
satellite, the third law can more directly apply to the rocket or

108 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

other means by which the satellite is lifted to the altitude of the
predetermined orbit. It defines the relationship of action and
reaction, stating that to every action there is an equal and
opposite reaction.

It may come as a shock to you that you cannot exert any
force unless it is opposed by an equal and opposite force. Have
you ever tried, for example, to step on a stair which was not
there? If you did, you attempted to exert a force against which
there was no equal and opposite force and you will admit that
the results were disconcerting. If you strike a baseball with a
bat, the ball resists the force applied by the bat with an exactly
equal force; but since the ball is quite small and of compara¬
tively little weight or mass, as compared to the bat and your
arms, the ball takes on a very rapid motion because of the
impact. Since acceleration is proportionate to force divided by
mass, the large force exerted by the heavy bat produces a large
acceleration on the small mass of the ball, and a high speed or
velocity is the result. It is something like this which we have to
contemplate in launching a rocket.

To lift a rocket from the earth we have to apply a con¬
tinuous force to the structure itself, and this force cannot be
obtained except through reaction against some mass other than
the structure of the rocket. Accordingly the fuel of the rocket
must be ejected through a nozzle at great velocity, and it is the
inertial resistance of the fuel to the expelling force which creates
the driving force, or power” of the rocket. The burning gas,
of comparatively small mass, moves through the jet at many
thousands of feet per second, whereas the much greater mass of
the rocket and the unbumed fuel starts at a velocity of only
a few feet per second. It is the continuation of the force which
accelerates the rocket to high velocities.

By this time you are asking yourself: “What has all this to do
with the UFO?”

Unfortunately it has been necessary to clear the air clouded
by the government obfuscation about rocket power and astro¬
nautics, and therefore I have had to take a negative approach. I
hope you have gained a clearer picture of rocket power and its
inadequacy to powe* UFO. The little basketball which will weigh

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 109

fifty pounds, more or less, will require a two-stage, or possibly a
three-stage rocket to lift it to its destined orbit. This means many
tons of rocket in stages one and two which will be dropped as the
fuel, tons of expensive liquid, is exhausted. The basketball is the
payload; all the rest is expendable. The ratio of payload to total
weight? Well, about one to eight hundred!

This may strike you, rightly enough, as poor efficiency. Worse
yet, with all that heroic effort we place a fifty-pound ball only
two himdred or three hundred miles above the earth, not even
outside the atmosphere!!!

Before you whistle, remember that we have no control over
the widget when it gets there. To put one ton of usable material
into a space station will require some 800 tons of expendable
materials. As yet we have no assurance that a rocket can be built
sufficiently large and sufficiently well-powered to carry aloft
pieces of assemblies big enough to be serviceable.

An intermediate space station, to be used as a launching plat¬
form, could, of course, facilitate other rockets in their departure
into space. The space platform is already moving at a speed more
than half the velocity of escape. A rocket starting from the plat¬
form would only have to generate the difference to overcome the
drag of gravity.

Secondly, the drag of gravity is slightly less at the higher
altitude, though this is not a major consideration. The platform
is only about 4,200 miles from the center of the earth as compared
(roughly) to the 4,000 miles at the surface. The advantage, then,
in percentage of gravitational drag is insignificant. Together, how¬
ever, these two factors reduce to a fraction the fuel needed for
taking off from the platform, as compared with the fuel require¬
ments for a takeoff from the surface.

Conceivably, a rocket trip can eventually be made to the moon
at a cost of some billions of dollars. But this is not astronautics,
nor is it in any sense UFO-activity. For sustained space existence
something must be thought of which does not depend upon rocket
power with its wasteful expenditure of materials.

That something is controlled reaction with gravity or the
gravitational fields.

UFO do not use rocket power. They are not limited to a

110 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

mathematically fixed orbit. They can undertake tremendous,
erratic accelerations.

UFO are astronautical craft, or entities. If they have a fixed
base of any kind, that base is likely the moon. They may have
bases (past or present) on the earth, possibly in mountainous
areas where there are craters suitable for landing cradles—such
as are on the moon.

Such areas exist in Mexico.

The silly little satellite does not appear to be a potential parent
either for space-craft or UFO-craft.

To sum up, the Bureaucratic Mountain has labored — ponder¬
ously—and brought forth an M — O — U —S— E. . ..

THE MOON

♦ A Case to Consider ♦

In Fate Magazine, August, 1955, Cassens points out that nowhere
in the Bible is it implied that man is God’s only creation of a race
possessing intelligence and personality. His hypothesis is that the
moon may once have been inhabited and that the space travel
hinted in the book of Genesis may have originated there.

In our unending search for evidence of a pre-cataclysmic, or
pre-flood civilization, we must consider the theme of lost con¬
tinents, e.g. Mu and Atlantis, and lost civilizations on the main¬
lands of Asia, Africa and South America. We ponder not only
where these lost worlds may have been, but also what they may
have been. One possible location is the moon. Some life forms on
the moon might have grown to giant stature, because of the low
lunar gravity which would permit bone structures to carry much
larger bodies. There are many Bible references to giant races
which hint (e.g. Genesis 6) that some such race of giants arrived
from space.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 111

Early English explorers reported a race of giants in Patagonia
and H. T. Wilkins in his Mysteries of Ancient South America
(Citadel, 1956) cites Andes Indian records of men eighteen feet
tall who came from a source unnamed and killed women with
whom they attempted intercourse. The isolated remains of giants
have been reported in graves in various parts of the world, par¬
ticularly the American southwest and other parts of the great
Cordilleras, extending the full length of the American continents.

Cassens posits that these giants may have come from the moon.

On the other hand, the reverse of this theory is perhaps more
acceptable. If a very ancient civilization arose on the earth and
discovered space flight its people may very well have colonized
the moon at a remote age when it may have been more habitable.

Magnificent Petavius: Complex interior of lunar crater.
(From Our Moon)

112 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 113

Under the influence of lesser gravitation, the colonists may have
evolved into a race of giants.

After all, the Pygmy races are shown to have been on earth
in the Miocene Age, more than thirty million years ago. A civiliza¬
tion may have thrived and perished during that long span of time.
We must remember that the little iron meteorite from the Aus¬
trian coal-beds is a very old artifact. Through a peculiarly re¬
peated error, the age of this tertiary coal bed was stated to be
300,000 years in my book The Case for the UFO. Fortunately,
Willy Ley, in a TV broadcast with me on May 16, 1955, pointed
out that these tertiary coal beds are more than 30,000,000 years
old instead of 300,000. Thus we have the antiquity of intelligently
made iron and steel artifacts established at millions of years ago.
Either a native terrestrial race dropped a little “erratic” into the
incipient coal bed or it came from space. No other explanations
are tenable.

If space travel was common in the remote times when the
moon may have been habitable, there may be indeed some
factual basis behind the story of invading giants who suddenly
appeared in the Andes mountains.

Having less gravitation to cope with, it would have been
easier for the Selenian moon dwellers to have developed a device
for getting off their small planet and beyond the control of its
gravitation. If at the same time they developed, as we appear to
be doing, vast destructive powers without the capacity for rational
restraint, they may have caused uncontrollable explosions on the
moon’s surface. Such explosions may have caused some of the still
unexplained great crater rays or splashes which stretch almost
entirely across the face of the moon, as from the crater Tycho.

As might be expected, the few items observed on the moon
which seem to have been constructed by intelligence are of a
cyclopean nature.

Possibly if the moon was, in fact, captured by the earth instead
of developing simultaneously with it from primordial materials of
the solar system, then it may have brought civilization and pos¬
sibly giants with it from some other part of the system.

Mr. Cassens has also proposed that these giant Selenians may

have been the ancestors of Mt. Everest’s “abominable snowmen.”
We may smile at this, but after all, if giant Selenians were
dropped on mountain ranges of South America, why not in Asia?
And if these have no discernible connection, is this any more un¬
acceptable than a similar distribution of isolated Pygmy races
from contacts or crashes of UFO?

Was (is) there then a race, human or semi-human, on the
moon? If so, were (are) they the descendants of our race, or are
we the descendants of theirs? After all, our notorious missing link
has yet to be established with finality.

The moon has been under telescopic observation from the
earth for almost 350 years, but it is only from the time of Schroe-
ter, before the beginning of the nineteenth century, that records
and drawings of the more minute features have been secured.

The question of changes on the surface of the moon is peren¬
nial. Diehards deny them, but painstaking observers, such as
Moore and Wilkins in our day and Birt, Neison, Schroeter, Klein
and others in past decades, insist that changes do take place.

In looking for such changes on the moon as would signify
life or the result of intelligent action, we have been, and still are,
handicapped because even our largest telescopes will not clearly
show anything under 300 to 400 yards in diameter; although long
cracks of 300 to 400 feet width may be seen if they are quite long
and contain dark shadows.

Thus, unless the effects of intelligent action on the moon are
on a grand scale, it wall be difficult to become aware of them.
Yet, there are some evidences of such large-scale action. We
must be alert and open-minded enough to apprehend events or
phenomena which might ordinarily be overlooked because of their
large size, or a very slothful and slow-acting time cycle. It may be
something like looking for a name on a very detailed and cluttered
map, and being chagrined to find that one has missed it because
it was the biggest thin g in sight and spread over a broad area.

We cannot assume that life as we know it—that is, animal life
—can exist on an airless and waterless moon; but we must be
prepared to accept evidence of “life” or “intelligence” of a differ¬
ent nature. Such entities and their works may be on a far vaster

114 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 115

scale than we would anticipate on the basis of our own structures.

The lunar surface is extremely rugged. The larger the tele¬
scope and better the definition, the rougher it appears. In most
lunar districts, travel from place to place would be virtually
impossible for animals moving on the surface; and wings would
do them no good on an airless planet. We can be reasonably sure
that wings have not developed on the moon unless in very early
geological times when the moon may have had an atmosphere.

Lunar changes, for the most part, have been on a compara¬
tively small scale and are barely detectable with our telescopes.
Certainly there are no new craters on the scale of Plato, Coper¬
nicus, or Aristarchus. So-called “minute” changes may actually
cover several square miles of area and involve craters up to three,
four or five miles in diameter. Changes have also been observed
in the lights and streaks within some of the larger craters.

Schroeter was one of the first observers to announce evidence
of changes and artificial structures on the lunar surface. He
thought a small crater had formed inside of one of the larger
craters during the period of his observations and that changes
were in progress in other areas.

Some recent observers attribute most of Schroeter’s changes
to his imagination, defects in his instruments, or to changing
illumination on the surface of the moon. But there is a trend
toward accepting some of Schroeter’s observations.

The two classical illustrations of changes on the moon, and the
hassle which goes on between the conservatives and the open-
minded observers, are those of the craters Linne and Hyginus-N.
Observers today are conceding that Linnd has undergone major
changes, while maintaining skepticism regarding Hyginus-N.

In 1866 Schmidt of Athens suddenly announced that the well-
known crater Linnd, repeatedly drawn by Lohrmann, Madler and
himself over a period of about forty years, had disappeared. He
declared that Linne had turned into a whitish cloud. Other ob¬
servers have noted either a pit on the upper surface of this cloud,
or something which looked like a hill or protuberance. There has
been much disagreement as to whether the “pit” was in the center
or near the edge. Furthermore, it appears to be moving around.

Somewhat later than Schmidt’s announcement, Goodacre in
England described Linne as a cone on the edge of a shallow
depression. Today, Linne appears to be a low dome, with a pit
on the summit and practically in the center of a large white area.
If Lohrmann, Beer and Madler, Goodacre, Neison, Birt, or any of
the other observers in the nineteenth century have correctly
described what they saw—namely a deep crater in the case of
Lohrmann, or a cone in the case of Goodacre—then major changes
have taken place in this limited region.

As evidence accumulates, there are indications that the
changes in Linne are repetitive or even cyclic. Whether or not
something actually moves in and out of a crater-like depression
in the Mare Serenitatis is something perhaps which the reader
will have to decide for himself, but I propose to present a large
quantity of observational data and the personal expressions of a
number of honest observers. I believe that this presentation is
important to the study of UFO.

In the Selenographical Journal (April 17, 1882, opposite page
26) are comparative—and confirmatory—drawings by Hyginus-N
by Neison and Green made on March 26th. Neison describes it as
resembling a deep, blackish-grey rounded spot with softened
edges, about two-thirds the diameter of Hyginus. To the south¬
west was a somewhat smaller, somewhat fighter spot of similar
character, the two being connected by a short, narrow band. (The
dumbell formation, again.) It was remarkably distinct.

Green says:

The two views of Hyginus-N at the lower part of the plate were
added as confirmation of Mr. Neison’s drawings. On both occasions
Hyginus-N was a most conspicuous object and could not possibly
have been everlooked by anyone making a drawing of the locality. It
is visible at sunrise long before the nearby small craters which are
frequently drawn.

The many drawings of the region of Hyginus made by the
sharp and persistent Gruithuisen fail to show Hyginus-N.

The reactionary Proctor claimed, in the S elenographical Jour-
nal (volume II) that he had identified Hyginus-N on some photo-

116 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

graphs, but nobody else seems to have done so, and this would
be a most difficult object to photograph even with large modem
equipment.

Madler and Gruithuisen noted variable tints near Hyginus—
an indication that something was happening. On March 22, 1879,
the appearance and disappearance of the dark spot at the location
of Hyginus-N was reported, but no crater. On March 1, he saw
the spot. On March 2, nothing. The whole region around Hyginus
seems to be unsettled and Neison speaks of remarkable changes
in tint and appearance. It seems obscured at all times, and occa¬
sionally crossed by a fine network of dark streaks.

On October 17, 1879, Gaudibert reported having seen two
small, darkish spots near Hyginus-N. The previous year, on
September 18, he had seen a low, rather large mound, somewhat
elliptical (oval, or spindle), and with a minute white spot at its
center.

On February 17, 1880, Capron described Hyginus-N as a very
marked feature resembling an inkspot, not misty or dull as on
other occasions. He calls it a deep hole, although others have been
reporting it as shallow or of no depth at all. He saw two dark
markings nearby. Here are Capron’s observations:

1878, Nov. 2: Faint dusky spot, not well defined, crater-like,
slightly oval, somewhat nebulous.

1879, Dec. 4: Large and conspicuous, but soft and no defined
margin; had all the appearance of an elevation with appropriate
shadings.

1880, Jan. 19: Faint dull spot, with faint light-border shaded
obscurely as a depression.

1880, Jan. 20: Very faint, misty greyish-black spot, looking like
an elevation with a bright ring around it.

1880, Feb. 17: Apparently a deep depression.

Capron, a good observer, says:

It may seem strange that the same object should be seen . . .
sometimes as a depression and sometimes as an elevation, but I have
no doubt as to the accuracy of my observations.

In 1879, Nathaniel E. Green made a series of observations of
Hyginus-N. On one occasion he saw it first as a “large black crater

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 117

filled with shadow” and later as a “large black spot surrounded by
a vaporous border.” On March 29, he watched the sun rise at this
location and saw nothing but a dark spot—no crater.

The question of Linne is perennial. Doubts have been ex¬
pressed as to whether Lohrmann, Madler, Schmidt and Schroeter
can be relied upon for accurate descriptions of the appearance
of Linne in their time. But we must also reckon with Goodacre,
who saw Linne as a small cone on the edge of a shallow pan, a
condition not reported by any other observer. Dr. H. P. Wilkins
repeats, for emphasis, that Linne today is a pit on the summit
of a dome which is itself at the center of a whitish area.

To quote a recent newspaper report:

It is said that in July a whale gave up a lump of ambergis weighing
926 pounds. The market was $9.00 per ounce, so this was quite a
trove. The account says two other lumps of ambergris were said
to have exceeded the latest weight of 926 pounds, but the reports
date from the last century and are considered unreliable.

Why is it always universally considered that our predecessors
did not know what they were talking about?

In Celestial Objects for Common Telescopes (page 68) Webb
says, while discussing the possibility of life on the moon:

It is, in Beer and Madler’s words, no copy of the earth; the
absence of seas, rivers, atmosphere, vapors and seasons bespeak the
absence of the “busy haunts of men;” indeed of all terrestrial vitality
unless it be that of insect or reptile. Whatever may be the features
of the averted side on which, as Gruithuisen and Hansen have sug¬
gested, other relations may exist, we perceive on this side merely
an alternation of level deserts and craggy wildernesses. The hope which
cheered on Gruithuisen and others, of discovering the footsteps of
human intelligence must be abandoned. If it should be thought prob¬
able, as it very well may, that the lunar surface is habitable in some
way of its own, we have reason to suppose, that where the conditions
of life are so extremely dissimilar its traces would be undecipherable
by our experience as a brief inscription in a character utterly unknown.

This philosophical observation falls short of being entirely
adequate. We do have to consider gigantic size and peculiar
design, but there is more to be pondered. We know that speed of

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 119

118 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

movement generally decreases with size. We also know that
vegetative life moves with great deliberation. But speeded-up
motion pictures of plant movements show almost as much dex¬
terity and purposefulness as animal motion.

If, then, we are contemplating entities that may be a mile or
more in diameter, we must expect movements which appear to us
grotesquely slothful. They may require several of our days to
complete even simple movements. Unless we can find a way to
compress the time scale, we may easily fail to recognize such
manifestations of intelligence when we see them.

It has been reiterated that no “high form of life” can exist on
the moon. If by “high form of life” we mean only mammalian
life, or the even more restricted human life, then, of course, we
must agree (unless such life is housed in protective structures).
But since we are continually faced with phenomena which seem
to demand intelligence for their behavior, we must contemplate
intelligence incorporated in some other type of physical organism,
different from ours.

Consider the reports of changing color on the moon, particu¬
larly within some of the larger craters. The crater Eratosthenes
has sometimes been called “the crater of insects” because of the
American astronomer W. H. Pickering’s speculations of insect life
there. This selenologist pointed out, what anyone who studies
the lunar details can verify, that during the lunar afternoon dark
areas can be seen spreading over part of the interior and even
spilling over the walls. These cannot be shadows, because the
sun has moved to such a high altitude that shadows are im¬
possible; and frequently the patches move in directions other than
those which spreading shadows would take.

Now, daylight on the moon lasts fourteen of our days; there¬
fore an afternoon lasts one of our weeks. We do not say that these
dark smudges can actually be seen to move, but they do slowly
change their position; and if these ponderous movements could
be speeded up by slow-speed movies the results might be aston¬
ishing.

Professor Pickering was one of the earlier observers to recog¬
nize the fact that non-systematic motion on the moon or anywhere

in the universe, implied intelligence or at least an equivalent of
life, no matter how low an order it might be. Because of his open-
mindedness on this subject and his willingness to interpret his
own observations as well as those of other selenographers in an
open-minded and objective manner, Professor Pickering was the
object of many snide remarks within the American astronomical
profession. In fact, he was considered by many to be a little bit
peculiar. However we are now coming to realize that the pioneers
in this field were rendering a great service.

Pickering stated that since we could not predict the speed and
direction of these moving spots, they must be caused by some
kind of life. He considered vegetation, but also postulated insects.
(So far as I know, he did not suggest what these boundless
hordes of bugs were eating.)

Although the floor of the crater Plato sometimes displays a
wealth of streaks, white spots and craterlets, at other times
nothing can be seen there. On April 31, 1952, H. P. Wilkins and
Patrick Moore looked at Plato with the 33-inch Meuden telescope,
and each made a drawing independently of the other. When com¬
pared these drawings agreed throughout, particularly in the fact
that nothing whatever was shown on the far, eastern side of the
interior of Plato.

Yet a small object, which has been called a crater, has been
seen there by observers many times.

Also a few hours afterwards an American observer named
Craig, using a good telescope, could not see anything at all within
Plato, not a trace of craters or spots. Craig could not even see the
four other little craters in the center which were plainly visible
to the European observers. Certainly this little object on the east¬
ern wall did not disappear permanently, for it was seen again in
October of the same year, and in April, 1953, at both Cambridge
and Meuden. This is a modem and current report of the sort of
thing that takes place within Plato, but identical phenomena were
happening seventy-five, eighty and ninety years ago.

There is a complex region of craters and hills to the north,
beyond Plato, extending to the edge of the “Sea of Cold,” another
area of mystery. As noted elsewhere, Madler drew and described

120 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

a small bay in the Sea of Cold as an almost perfect square, with
a perfectly shaped cross, formed by white ridges, within. Today
there is no such thing; one side of the square no longer exists; and
the cross is gone. These features were assiduously sought by
Wilkins and Moore with the best optical equipment of today, and
so it is reasonable to assume that they have been altered or moved.

We are going to have a great deal more to say about the object
or “thing” called Hyginus-N, near the well-known crater Hyginus.
This object was reported as a newcomer in 1878 by Klein, and the
ensuing excitement raised a controversy which has not yet en¬
tirely subsided. Dr. H. P. Wilkins says that the “N” stands for
the Latin word nova, meaning new, so that what we have here is
literally a “New Hyginus.” The peculiar, smoky-colored appear¬
ance of this region led Schroeter and other early observers to
believe there was actually smoke hovering about. This, they
speculated, might be an area of industrial activity on the moon,
the Pittsburgh of the Selenites.

It has been thought that other craters were new, indicating
that the moon was not truly a dead world. Changes were usually
attributed to natural, perhaps tectonic, causes, but we have
reasons to believe that this is not always the case.

The accompanying drawing shows the location of Hyginus-N.
It is a strange landscape; but many astronomers (not lunar spe¬
cialists ) believe that “N” has always been there, and was merely
overlooked by earlier observers. I cannot agree with this.

H. P. Wilkins admits that dark patches appear from time to
time in this area, and that, if they are not vegetation, then they
may well be due to some kind of clouds. He suggested the possi¬
bility of dust shot from the interior. We cannot accept the dust
theory because there is not sufficient atmosphere to support dust
even for a few hours. Regardless of the cause, dusky areas are
sometimes seen on what was previously a bright patch. Such
shades have also been seen along the edges of the great Hyginus
crack, which shows up so sharp in the drawing. There is a dark
patch to the west of Hyginus which varies in size but appears to
be flush with the plain. Surface activity?

Between the lunar Caucasus and the Alps there is an intrigu¬

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 121

ing crater called Cassini, which contains two minor craters and a
few hills. The larger of the two has long been known to have
something within it; but not until April, 1952, was that “some¬
thing” seen with any certainty. With the giant Meuden telescope
Wilkins discovered an “extraordinary” appearance within “the
washbowl,” as he christened this crater, very white and shallow,
perfectly circular with a minute pit like a plug hole.

The “washbowl” is approximately two miles in diameter, but
the pit is only 500-600 feet across, and cannot be seen except with
the very largest of telescopes and at certain phases of illumination.
While this may be what geologists would denote a cauldron on
earth, it is difficult to believe that a cauldron would have such a
smooth concave interior. This reminds us of the white patches like
Linne which have these little pits in them, about which there is
always some doubt, apparently, as to whether they are actually
depressions or domes.

Bill Raub, who spreads UFO news in Southern California,
told me about a recent sighting on the moon. He was using a
7 x 50 binocular about 9:00 p.m. on April 15, 1954, when he sud¬
denly noted a light about as bright as one of Jupiter’s satellites.
It pulsated and finally flickered out.

It was definitely over the moon’s surface, near the edge of the
disc. It was not a star in occupation,” for Bill is familiar with that
phenomenon. The light behaved as if guided by intelligence. He
reported the event to several agencies, but none deigned to reply.

Raub’s observation is only one of many, old and new. I believe
they substantiate persistent UFO activity of varied types. I be¬
lieve that these UFO are large, and that their movements are
correspondingly sluggish, judged by our standards. I hope some
means of observation may be devised to speed up the appearance
of the motions or activities so as to make them intelligible, as
recent speed-ups of seismological shock waves which require min-

° Occupation: an event similar to an eclipse. In fact it may be con¬
sidered an eclipse. Occupation is said to occur when a large body such
^ the moon passes between the observer and a smaller object such as a
star, or distant planet. Or, an occupation takes place when the satelhte of
a planet, Jupiter for instance, passes behind the disc of the planet.

122 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

utes to complete a cycle, have made earthquakes audible in all
of their awesomeness.

♦ Beaten to the Moon? ♦

W. J. B. Richards listed in Astronomical Register (volume XVII,
1879, page 100) eighteen lunar objects suspected of change, and
asked for consistent observation. Birt divided these into three
classes: 1. Objects that have changed appearance and form since
they were noted by earlier observers. 2. Objects more strictly
variable, changing in tint, shape, outline, because of variable
angle of illumination or causes unknown. 3. Objects seen as bright
points on the unilluminated part of the moon.

This means that the reality of changes on the moon has been
recognized by top authorities for at least a century.

Richards offered another list of possibly variable objects on
the moon, in the Astronomical Register (volume XIX, 1881, page
43). Here are fifteen of them:

Object Variable Feature

1. Posidonius Gamma Brightness

2. Paludes Amarae Curved dark streaks; tint

3. Linne Form, color, size

4. Hyginus-N Tint, size, shape, density

5. Gruithuisen’s “City” Form, permanence

6. Floor of Archimedes Streaks

7. LaHire Tint and form

8. Neighborhood of Mont Blanc Bright spots sometimes seen in

the dark beyond terminator

9. Neighborhood of Carlini Same as above

10. Plato Tints and streaks; bright spots,

lights

11. Aristarchus Bright spots as in 8; also other

variations

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 123
Variable Feature

Object

12. Crater rings of Chichus Size

13. Floor of Billy Tint

14. Spot on west side of Werner Brightness

15. Messier and Messier-A Relative form and size.

Professor Thury of Geneva reported a change in the center
of the crater Plinius, in September, 1889. With his six-inch re¬
fracting telescope he saw, instead of the usual two hills in the
interior of the crater, a circular, chalk-like spot in the center,
which had the appearance of the orifice of a mud volcano. (Why
do selenographers have to relate everything to volcanoes?)

Clearly this was a UFO. We are getting used to “something
of a temporary nature with a little spot in the center,” which fills
or replaces craters, and whose numbers have increased from two
in 1865 to about 200 today. Something of the sort was in the
center of this crater and temporarily obscured its two known
large hills. Linne was covered by one. What is this little pit or
nipple on top of the hazy white spots?

According to Nature (volume 12, October 7, 1875, page 495)
Loftus, an experienced observer, was aboard H.M.S. Coronation
at Kopongsom Bay, in the gulf of Siam, in July, 1875. Together
with Mr. C. E. Davidson, he reported two remarkable protuber¬
ances on the moon. On July 13, about midnight, they noticed on
the moon’s upper limb a projection visible to the naked eye
and similar in color to the illuminated part of the moon. On
July 14, at 8 p.m., the moon was observed perfectly clear without
a vestige of the projection seen on the previous night. However,
a small one was noticed in a different position on the limb and
which disappeared before the moon rose on the 15th. Visibility
to the naked eye implies a diameter of several miles.

Note that these protuberances were on the smooth circular
edge of the moon, called the limb, not on the terminator, the bor¬
derline between night and day on the moon, where detached
spots of light are frequently seen because of sunlight on moun¬
tain tops whose bases are in shadow. Our observers saw a mobile
or temporary object as large as a range of mountains.

124 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

In the Intellectual Observer, (volume II, 1867, page 201) we
read an almost prophetic phrase. The writer and diligent observer,
Webb, was the author of a textbook for observers called Celestial
Objects for Common Telescopes. Describing the craters Aristillus
and Autolycus, Webb said:

The character therefore of extreme relative depth—the goblet-like
impression—which might be easily received in such cases from the
appearance of the shadow near the terminator, is thus shown to be
somewhat deceptive when checked by actual measurements. But
though our lunar cups may thus be said to be turned into saucers,
enough remains in their proportions to fill us with astonishment.

Webb was discussing the traits of craters like Linne, which
seem to change their appearance from deep cup-like to very
shallow saucer-like depressions, or white spots having no apparent
depth. This, one of the strangest phenomena of the lunar land¬
scape, has never been explained satisfactorily. I believe it has
significance in the study of UFO on the moon.

Let us next examine a description of physical changes on
the moon, published in the Journal of the British Astronomical
Association (volume 48, 1937-8, pages 347 ff.). The report is by
Robert Barker, who firmly believes that lunar changes are taking
place, particularly vegetation with a very short life cycle.

On March 16, 1932, Barker was observing the Copernicus
region which had just appeared over the terminator. From Coper¬
nicus to about latitude S. 20°, the terminator was misty and hard
to define. Outside this area it presented its usual sharp definition.
This phenomenon lasted about three quarters of an hour. The
night was clear.

Barker suspected his equipment and his own sanity, so to
speak. He cleaned the lenses of his eyepieces and telescope but
the indefiniteness persisted. This reminds us of the great shadow
on the moon seen by Russell and Hirst from the Blue Mountains
of Australia.

There is no question in my mind but that cloud-like things
are moving around in the space not far from the moon, whether
considered UFO phenomena or not. They may be cloud-satellites.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 125

moving in orbits. This cloud may have been just above the sur¬
face of the moon.

Barker wrote his article comparatively recently—1937. He
staked his reputation on the reality of vegetation in some craters.

Barker avoids astronomical dogmatism as nearly as a profes¬
sional astronomer can. He is practically defying the science of
astronomy to deny his conclusions that the changes take place
and vegetation exists on the surface of the moon.

The Astronomical Register (volume XXII, 1884, page 93)
contains a discussion about small craters which many observers
of that era considered volcanic. In this article, Eiger cited two
examples on the floor of the crater Atlas. Other observers saw
only one, yet Eiger insisted that it could not be missed.

Such little craters seem to appear occasionally, and astrono¬
mers have not been able to agree on reasons for their origin.
Meteoric impact or the action of UFO must be invoked to explain
them.

Eiger mentioned several drawings he had made in 1870-71
showing small dark patches, under various conditions of illumina¬
tion. In comparing his drawings with previous observations, he
found discrepancies hard to account for, unless change had taken
place in the intervening thirteen or fourteen years. For example,
one form had become triangular in that time. (A geometric shape
suggests intelligent construction.)

Eiger attacked dogmatists who denied change. He said:

In many quarters opinions are so pertinaciously wedded to the
gratuitous notion that the moon is an exceptional body devoid of any
form of life or activity that nothing short of a paroxysmal catastrophe
involving the destruction and complete obliteration of Tycho, or of
some equally familar formation, would settle the question of change.

Eiger easily saw clefts on the floor of Mersenius, which had
been seen by the French astronomer Gaudibert, while Schmidt,
observing constantly over a period of years, had missed them.
Eiger commented: “Except on the supposition that it is either a
recent formation, or is frequently obscured from causes other than

126 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 127

terrestrial, I cannot account for this discrepancy in observation.”
(Italics mine.)

Consider the reports of the amateur astronomer, Proctor,
author of popular books and many articles on astronomy, one time
editor of a prominent English popular scientific journal. In 1878
he wrote a violently reactionary article in the Echo of London,
berating astronomer Russell in Australia for saying he had seen
a huge shadow on the moon. Perversely, in two other articles
written the same year, he had taken a liberal and open-minded
attitude regarding changes on the moon, even while questioning
the validity of much of the evidence presented by other observers.

Proctor doubted the reality of changes in Linne and Hy-
ginus-N, but admitted the unreasonableness of expecting the
moon, with one and a half million square miles of visible surface,
to continue in unchanging stillness century after century. He
said: “But it must be confessed that the evidence of change is not
satisfactory, while the evidence of such systematic changes as we
associate with the existence of life seems wanting altogether.”
Elsewhere, discussing Linne and Hyginus-N, he observed that:
“Changes may possibly have occurred, but if they did, they must
be volcanic.”

In his book, The Moon, he says: “So far am I from consider¬
ing it unlikely that the moon’s surface is still undergoing changes,
that, on the contrarry, it appears to me certain that the face of
the moon must he undergoing changes of somewhat remarkable
nature, though not producing any results which are readily dis¬
cerned by our imperfect telescopic means.” (Italics mine.)

Fauth categorically denies all changes on the moon, yet postu¬
lates a deep cover of ice on the moon. This is inconsistent, for ice,
being amorphous, cannot possibly maintain itself indefinitely in
any rigid outline. Fauth admits unexplained discrepancies in the
maps of various areas. For example, Madler omitted seventeen
craters of such dimensions that they ought not to have escaped
him. He included 337 small ones that Fauth could not find! When
Fauth failed to find a twelve-mile crater mapped by Schmidt, he
dismissed Schmidt (one of the best lunar observers of all time)
as one who did not know what he was doing. He dismissed many

other observers similarly and even denied Hyginus-N completely.

Can one avoid questioning the basic accuracy of a man so
opinionated, so apparently afflicted with a mental block?

In the Astronomical Register (volume XXIII, 1885, page 144)
Eiger reported a very dark rectangular formation, southwest of
the crater Menelaus. Schroeter showed this as a large crater desig¬
nated as “a,” inserted a somewhat smaller crater “b” to the
north of it. In Eiger’s time there was no trace of it beyond an
ill-defined white spot, never seen as a depression by Eiger. Eiger
also commented on two very curious square depressions of great
depth near by.

Question: Are these rectangular formations surface mines or
strip mines by any chance? If so, by whom are they worked?

The crater Posidonius is always coming in for notations of
changes and variability. Schroeter found repeated changes in the
small inner details during the latter part of the eighteenth century,
but Beer and Madler, in observations during the first quarters of
the nineteenth century saw nothing unusual. Yet, on Feb. 11,
1849 Schmidt found this crater to be shadowless, as had Gruithui-
sen on April 7, 1821. The phenomenon of one crater out of thou¬
sands suddenly appearing without shadow defies all explanation
unless you invoke intelligent control.

The undeniable changes observed in the pair of craters called
Messier and Messier-A still remain to be explained by astrono¬
mers. Some attribute these changes to chemical deposits which
alter their size and visibility with the cyclic change in heat and
illumination from the sun. However, if this is true, we must have
two different substances, for the Messier reaction to heat and
fight is the reverse of that observed in Linne.

As we shall see, their real changes in shape are even more
significant.

The interior floor of the crater Archimedes was found smooth
as a mirror by Beer and Madler early in the nineteenth century;
but it was not so in 1860. Grey, in 1880, observed changes;
Gruithuisen saw a small crater; Knott saw seven.

Just north of the crater now called “Schroeter,” Gruithuisen
discovered, in 1822, a “regular” formation known now as “Gruit-

128 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 129

huisen’s City,” consisting of gigantic ramparts, visible only when
near the terminator. They extend about twenty-three miles
along each side of a central rampart, from which they slant
away southeast and southwest, about 45°, like the ribs of a leaf.
The pattern appears obscured by clouds at times. Later, the
pattern changed, and Gruithuisen sometimes had trouble making
it out. Beer and Madler could not find it until 1838. Some of the
other observers who have seen it do not consider it “artificial.”
It needs most careful study.

The nature of Archimedes-F has been seriously questioned
because records, by independent observers, have variously shown
it as a bright spot, a hillock, or a projection on the inner slope
of Archimedes. Between April, 1880, and June, 1881, in the “in¬
credible decade,” it was seen as a crater. Its observers then con¬
sidered their notations as final, and deprecated the “unreliable”
work of their predecessors. We have the same attitude today
toward them. If variations are ruled out, then all previously
observed reports must seem the work of idiots. Defying critics,
Mr. T. P. Grey upheld variability in Archimedes-F of which he
had made a special study.

In the Selenographical Journal (October 15, 1879) Dr. A.
von Bienczwski of Jaslo, Poland, reported mysterious appear¬
ances and disappearances of certain clefts in the neighborhood
of Hyginus, which he related to the constantly changing appear¬
ance of Hyginus-N and “the possibility of similar occurrences
with other craters which come and go.” He said: “. . . It may be
possible that local occurrences, of a kind we are not acquainted
with, may cause temporary obscurations of these objects.”

He pointed out that Hyginus-N is not always seen with equal
distinctness and comes very close to suggesting, outright, opera¬
tions on the moon not accountable by “natural” activity.
Gruithuisen maintained throughout his life that he had seen
evidences of habitation on the moon, which is to say of “in¬
telligence.” Mentioning a little crater in Marius, von Bienczwski
insists that Beer and Madler could not have overlooked it had
it been there in their time. Gruithuisen saw it with a 3/2" tele¬
scope on March 31, 1825.

Patrick Moore notes that close to the western rim of the
crater Fontenelle, on the border of the Mare Frigoris, Madler
drew a regular square enclosure with high mountainous walls.
Denning, in Astronomical Register (volume VIII, page 86) com¬
ments on it as “a strange formation west of the crater Fontenelle.”
The conservative Beer and Madler commented that this would
“throw the observer into the highest astonishment.”

This is how Neison described it: “A perfect square, enclosed
by long, straight walls about sixty-five miles in length and one
mile in breadth; from 250 to 350 feet high.

“Today the enclosure is incomplete. Current observers note
that the southwest wall is no longer there, but there is a very
noticeable mountain-mass some twenty miles southeast of Fon¬
tenelle which Madler and Neison have ‘conspicuously misplaced’
(sic).”

Selenologists have, from time to time, called attention to a
general element of parallelism or geometric shape, in this region.
This is another way of saying “artificiality,” a naughty word in
astronomy. The most curious example is Madler’s square.

Webb describes the ramparts as being very unequal in height,
one being little more than a light streak. “Yet,” he says, “they
are so regular that it is scarcely possible to imagine them as
being natural—until we find that they are sixty-four miles long,
250-300 feet high and one mile or more thick.” (Italics mine.)
Unfortunately, as Webb points out, this significant object, like
so many others, lies in such a position that years may pass with¬
out a really good view of it. Why are artificial objects generally
limited to lunar areas out of the line of direct and easy observa¬
tion?

In Webb’s discussion of this rectangle in his Celestial Ob¬
jects, we have clear evidence favoring the case for the UFO.
Webb, a conservative but open-minded observer, says forth¬
rightly that only the size of this “thing” prevents it from being
considered artificial.

But consider the Chinese wall which is 1500 miles long, and
of a size that could be seen from the moon at times when

130 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 131

shadows were long. And what are we to say of a rock bridge
on the moon with a span of twelve miles?

Why should we reject construction, merely because it is
somewhat (and only somewhat) larger than we are accustomed
to seeing? True, this structure would be a major undertaking
today—larger by far than any unit structure made by modern
man. But the “ancients” had ways and means beyond our ken.
The forces and “men” that erected the colossal structures at
Sacsahuaman, Tiahuanaco, Angkor Wat, Easter Island and the
great Pyramid of Gizeh could have built walls, or halls, a mile
thick and 250 feet high. They could have done it even on the
earth where gravity is much more intense than on the moon.

In UFO-selenology we deal with entities which fit into
craters of one to four miles diameter. Surely Madler’s “square”
does not represent in detail anything that could be considered
disproportionately large in comparison.

The stones at Baalbek weigh about 1,200 tons; and there
was a monolithic structure at Tiahuanaco which must have
weighed at least 8,500 tons. These were moved, fitted, and
placed, as were the colossal statues, walls and blocks of Easter
Island, Sacsahuaman, and others. Sacsahuaman, in fact, is large
enough as a single structure to be seen from the moon with an
average telescope. A levitator which could lift these terrestrial
megaliths could easily lift far greater objects on the moon,
where they would weigh much less.

Possibly the stone citadels of earth were but outposts of those
greater ones on the moon; smaller outposts, merely because the
earth’s gravitational pull is more difficult to overcome. Many
thinkers have postulated an indigenous civilization on the moon.

To return to our subject: the geometrically artificial shape
of Madler’s “square” is significant, but there is even more sig¬
nificance in the changes recorded in serial observations covering
almost 200 years. This “now you see it, now you don’t” element
cannot be ignored. Something moved these huge walls, picked
up a part and dumped it twenty miles away. I am forcibly
reminded of the wreckage of the intra-mountain construction
at Sacsahuaman, above Cuzco, Peru. The manner in which

chunks of rock thirty to forty feet in diameter were torn out of
the solid mountain is hardly less awesome than the building of
Madler’s “square” and Gruithuisen’s “city” on the moon.

Just for spice, add the numerous impact craters of Mexico,
some of which are “half-craters” like some noted on the moon.
And they are accompanied by megaglyphs on the scale of those
at Nasca in Peru.

But there is also a cyclic element in these movements on
the moon.

“Strangely enough,” says Moore, “the difference between
Madler’s representation and the modern aspect was unnoticed
for many years, and it was only in 1950 that Dr. Bartlett directed
attention to it.” On the other hand, Moore finds data indicating
that the formation was about the same in Schroeter’s time as it
appears now. Moore, unlike Wilkins, seems categorically against
change on the moon.

Time after time, in the history of selenography, we find that
something was distinctly seen by Schroeter and Gruithuisen,
missed by Madler and Beer, and then again seen around 1865-
1880 or later, by Neison, Birt, Williams, and others. Then,
around mid-twentieth century, still other changes are noted.
There is more than merely hints of activity from 1780 to now.
This strongly suggests that the activity is cyclic. At least there
was an upswing around 1790 and a downswing in the first half
of the nineteenth century, and another upswing around 1865-80.
Many reports confirm this.

By capable work, Moore, Barker, Wilkins, and others are
contributing currently to our heritage of moon lore. Their
writings seem vibrant with restraint, for they do seem to believe
that significant changes are in progress on the moon.

The region south of the crater Picard was shown as featur-
less by all selenographers up to the first part of the twentieth
century. About 1930, Barker found a conspicuous quadrangle
of prominent craterlets connected by low ridges, where Madler
had shown nothing at all. Examination of old drawings showed
that parts of this quadrangle had been seen from time to time,
but never complete or conspicuous.

132 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 133

Moore says it is now visible through a very small telescope
and the whole region is dotted with craterlets and white spots
which cannot be mists. His chart published in 1949 showed over
seventy. Yet Goodacre, one of the best observers in England, did
not see them in 1910. Either this large number of craters and
other markings are new, or they were previously hidden by mists
or other obscurations. A thin haze would do it, but the question
arises how such a haze would be maintained in the very thin
atmosphere of the moon. We have to give some thought to
obscurations by mists, however, because they have been reported
dozens of times.

Schroeter on one occasion drew four deep pits in the interior
of the crater Ptolemaeus which he had never seen before,
although he had maintained continuous observation of the area.
Compare this with the period of Webbs and Birt’s observations
when there were only two minute craterlets.

These descriptions remind one of “surface mining” in the
midwestem coal fields. Many “spoil banks” are extensive enough
to be clearly seen from the moon and some would look like
Gruithuisens city.” Would mining on the moon account for
the geometrical shapes, the occasional mists and the ambulatory
walls of Madler’s “square”?

I wonder who has beaten us to the moon—by hundreds or
thousands of years?

♦ "Let There Be Light”—on the Moon? ♦

No single indication of UFO activity on the moon is more
intriguing than the unexplained, intermittent lights. They have
attracted observers for many years, but are not seen with suffi¬
cient regularity to be called normal features of the moon. When
they are noted there is generally some abnormality that indicates
intelligent control. Sometimes they fluctuate in a manner unlike

the steady glare of reflected sunlight. Sometimes they appear
suddenly, shine a few minutes or hours, and as suddenly dis¬
appear.

Lights on and near the moon have been seen for centuries—
ever since telescopes were first used—and are still seen. Charles
Fort listed hundreds of sightings of lights on the moon, but his
reports mingled bright spots with lights.

Astronomers make a distinction. What an astronomer calls
a “light” is a star-like, glittering point or gleam. When he refers
to a light spot or bright spot, he means an area that is bright as
compared to the surrounding surface but does not have the
appearance of a lamp, arc light or blast furnace. Both are
pertinent to our UFO investigation.

On June 12, 1865, Charles Grover wrote ( Astronomical Reg¬
ister, volume III, 1865, page 189):

On January 1, 1865, I had the good fortune to pick up one of
these curious objects. At 6:00 p.m., I directed my telescope to the
moon, and saw the dark side with its usual markings very distinctly,
and my eye immediately caught sight of a little speck of light, very
distinctly seen like a considerable star, a little out of focus. I most
carefully studied its position and found it to be just at the east foot
of the alps and very near the wedge-shaped valley. It appeared toler¬
ably well-defined and very distinct, and was well seen with a power of
fifty in my telescope of 2 inches aperture. I consider it the more
interesting as Schroeter picked up a similar object very near the
same place in 1768 (September 26), though Mr. Birt does not con¬
sider them identical. I believe the floor of Plato to be variable after
years of observation.

Now, Birt’s opinion is quite pertinent. There is other activity
in this region, and his opinion that the two sightings are of
different phenomena is indicative of the erratic and artificial
character of this locality.

In the Memoirs of the Astronomical Society of London
(volume VI, pages 157-8) William Olbers reported a bright
speck in the crater Aristarchus. The sighting was on the night
of February 1, 1821. The light differed from the usual faint
brightness of that crater when seen on the dark side of the
moon. The latter had been seen by many observers, including

1

134 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Herschel; but the speck looked like a star of the 6th magnitude,
the faintest to be readily seen in the moonless sky by the unaided
eye, but a bright object in a small telescope.

The Memoirs (volume VI, pages 159-60) carries a discussion
by M. Ward of changes in color inside the crater Aristarchus—
from red in 1644 to white in 1821, the year he made his observa¬
tions.

From VAstronomie (volume VI, page 312): On the 11th of
May, 1887, the astronomer A. Fauchier, observing at the Mar¬
seilles observatory, was startled to see two bright points of
light on the moon. But this is one of many such observations.
Astronomical literature fails to offer any explanation better than
UFO activity.

Then, in Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society
(volume VIII, 1848, page 55), this description of a self-luminous
spot on the moon:

On the 11th of December, last, at 6:00 p.m., while Mr. Hodgson
of Fir Grove, Eversley, was observing the dark body of the moon, “a
bright spot” about one quarter the angular diameter of Saturn, was
perceived, which, though it varied in intensity like an intermitting
light, was at all times visible. On this occasion, Mr. Hodgson used an
achromatic telescope of 5 feet focal length and powers of 50 and 80.
The bright spot was best seen with the higher power, probably as he
suggests, because the field was darker, but it was instantly visible
to the most uninitiated eye when the bright part of the moon was
excluded from the sky. On the following day glimpses of the same
spot were caught between the passing clouds with a Newtonian
reflector; power 40.

This is typical of transitory lights seen on the moon—except
for its intermittent quality, which indicates intelligent control,
and it may have been “beamed” toward earth.

The following note is from Denning’s Telescopic Work (page

120 ):

On June 10, 1866, Temple noticed a remarkable light appearance
located on the dark side of the moon in the known position of the
crater Aristarchus. The entire area was faintly illuminated by earth
shine, but this object did not exhibit the faint white light analogous
to that of other craters which are occasionally seen to be luminous on

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 135

the dark side. On the contrary, it was star-like, somewhat diffused, red¬
dish-yellow in color. It was evidently dissimilar to ordinary bright
spots. Temple called it a “chemical brightness.”

Throughout all lunar literature, there are constant references
to erratic activity in, near, or over the crater Aristarchus.

The English Mechanic (volume 25, page 89) reports Mr. C.
Barrett as saying that on the night of March 21, 1877, he saw
the interior of the crater Proclus entirely lighted, and without
shadows. Is it possible to conceive of any “natural” cause for
such an event? Since the entire surface of the moon is bathed
in sunlight, where there are elevations there must be shadows.
When one of these elevations fails to cast a shadow, then man’s
logical mind requires an explanation.

In the same volume (page 432) Frank C. Dennett writes:

. . . On June 17, 1877, at 10:00 p.m., I fancied I could detect a
minute point of light shining out of the darkness which filled the
crater Bessel.” And “. . . on April 19, 1877, at 10:00 p.m., I thought
that Linne had the appearance of a bright, conical peak, surrounded
by a circle of flat needle points clustering close to it.

This is clearly a description of a peculiar object surrounded
by some type of activity too small in scale to be identified. UFO
is indicated. The “flat needle points” could be searchlight beams.

In his Celestial Objects, Webb says of crater La Hire:

There is nothing striking in its usual appearance, but it was twice
seen by Schroeter under very different illuminations, so brilliant as to
glitter like a star; and he also noticed changes in its form—I once
found it on the terminator—the brightest object in sight and radiating
as described by Schroeter. On another occasion I noticed a similar
hill about one third of the distance from Lambert to Timocharis, glit¬
tering on the terminator like a star with rays.

Hunt says that he saw a striking exhibition of this phenom¬
enon on November 19, 1863. Its brilliant glow was accompanied
by flashes of singular brightness. Later it faded somewhat, but
remained the brightest object in sight for some hours. Clearly
an indication that some intelligently operated mechanism was
producing these lights. Note that this is not routine on the moon

136 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 137

but is definite and rare enough to occasion comment in technical
publications.

James Short, observing an eclipse at Aberdour Castle, Scot¬
land, on July 14, 1748, saw “a remarkable large spot of light of
an irregular figure and of considerable brightness, about seven
or eight seconds of arc within the limb of the moon next to the
western cusp.” The Reverend Mr. Irwin, at Elgin, also observed
it. Clearly this is abnormal activity and belongs to our lore of
UFO on the moon. The description could be applied to photo¬
graphs taken at Ottumwa, Iowa, of the eclipse of 1869, where
a similar bright patch was “explained” away as a reflection of
light from a drop of water adhering to the back of the photo¬
graphic plate.

In any discussion of UFO in space, the eclipse of 1869
deserves a prominent place. It had more unexplained phenomena
than any other eclipse on record . . . and a UFO was clearly
seen near the moon.

W. O. Williams wrote to the Astronomical Register (volume
IV, 1866) that on November 24, 1865, observing the moon at
about 6:00 p.m., he found the dark part unusually clear and
distinct. His eye caught a “very pretty speck of light near the
lower limb, towards the northeast and very much like a star
of 8th magnitude but very distinct and clear.” This sighting
lasted an hour and a half, and was verified by other observers.
These little self-luminous points of fight cannot be ignored—
and note that an ardent professional lunar map-maker was so
impressed that he spent 90 precious minutes studying it.

Also recorded (volume IV, page 132): During an eclipse of
the sun, Schroeter, Harding and Kohler saw a small luminous
spot on the dark disc of Mercury. Some observers attributed this
to volcanic action. Obviously this was not volcanic action since
it would have certainly been too faint to be seen from the
distance of Mercury. Nor was it an inter-Mercurial phenomenon,
since it was seen against the planet as background. This was a
UFO of great brilliance, operating in space, and similar to
those seen over the moon.

In Astronomical Register (volume XXIII, 1885, page 64), A. S.

Williams called attention to a variation in the brightness of the
interior of the crater Boscovich, normally one of the darkest. It
brightened very noticeably, then faded. The variations took
place in a manner unrelated to the diurnal passage of the sun.
He thought these changes were unquestionably due to some
“physical” cause. “Physical” is astronomical gobbledegook for
UFO!

Several times Mare Crisium has been speckled with minute
dots and streaks of fight—reported by Schroeter and Beer and
Madler; by Webb, who saw them in 1832; by Slack and Engle
in 1865. The head of the comet of 1882 was speckled like that
for one nightl

A curious observation of something that looked like a red
lamp on the moon was made by Lorenzo Kropp in Uruguay, and
reported in VAstronomie (volume IV, page 227).

The following items of things seen and unseen are from
Webb’s Celestial Objects, a most reliable astronomical text book.
In the lunar Alps there is a peak 12,000 to 14,000 feet high called
Mont Blanc. Close to its eastern foot Schroeter, on September
26, 1789, saw a small speck of light on the dark side of the
moon as bright as a 5th magnitude star to the naked eye. The
fight remained in view for fifteen minutes. Normally there is a
round, small shadow there which is sometimes black, some¬
times grey.

Undeniably some kind of activity takes place at this point.
Notice that the time of this observation is almost identical tvith
the time of Schroeter s first observation of the obscuration of
Linne. And this is the first such obscuration of Linne on record.
On January 1, 1865, close to the time when the disappearance
of Linne was first observed by Schmidt, Grover saw this same
spot again as a 4th magnitude fight, but larger than that seen
by Schroeter and unchanged for thirty minutes.

All this drives one to the conclusion that the peripatetic lunar
dark spots are UFO or evidence of UFO activity. They seem to
occupy and vacate craters, produce fights, come and go, change
size, shape, color, etc.

J

138 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 139

Webb reports that Mare Tranquilitatis, at times of full moon,
is sometimes covered with small bright specks or points.

Schroeter once saw a minute point of light on the dark side
of the moon near the crater Agrippa. And in Astronomical Reg¬
ister (volume V, page 114) Eiger reported a light spot of 7th
magnitude on the dark part of the moon. He watched it for an
hour and during the last fifteen minutes the spot grew fainter.
Returning half an hour later, he noted it was gone. He says he
has seen similar phenomena several times.

The editor of the Selenographical Journal (August 17, 1879,
page 62) discussed bright spots on the dark part of the moon:

It is well known that under certain conditions of illumination
Aristarchus appears as a bright point on the dark side of the moon!
It is curious, however, that during the present century it has uniformly
appeared white, while Hevelius was so struck with its red hues when
on the unenlightened (sic) side, that he describes it as being formed
“rape, rutra, aut sabulo, sive terra rubicunda.”

In the philosophical transactions for 1792, the unimpeachable
authority, Sir William Herschel, states that with a power of 360 on
his big reflector, he perceived some 150 “very luminous spots scattered
over the surface of the moon during the total eclipse of October 22,
1790.” [Again a timely coincidence with the first-recorded disap¬
pearance or obscuration of Linn6.]

On April 25, 1844, Schmidt saw a bluish glimmering patch
of light southeast of crater Pico, within the dark part of the
moon, although there are no elevations there to catch the higher
rays of the setting or rising sun. There were similar sightings by
Gruithuisen and Madler, and, in 1871, by several English ob¬
servers.

♦ Icc ♦

Fauth, in his comprehensive book on the moon, sets forth a
determined case for the moon as being completely covered with
ice. He is convinced of the existence of meteoric ice in space, of
which there is evidence aplenty in ice falls on earth. Fauth writes
that he is acquainted with some cases where flattish eminences

lie much like thin discs on the floor of the moon. They generally
have a little ‘crater’ inside them.” This description is typical of
the features of the variable and unpredictable crater Linne.

As for changes of the lunar landscape, Fauth is “agin” them,
like a hard-shelled preacher “agin” sin! He overlooks the fact
that ice, being amorphous, tends to flow under continued pres¬
sure, as do our glaciers, and that it would be above thawing
temperature during the long lunar day. However, his reactionary
stance almost proves the case for the UFO, as did C.H.F. Peters’
bigoted tirade against intra-Mercurial planets.

We can agree with Fauth that there is ice in space and that
it does, perhaps, strike the moon as well as earth. We can agree
that the size of an ice-covered spot on the moon will fluctuate
when surface temperature rises above freezing during the lunar
day.

We cannot agree that the entire surface of the moon is ice.
We conclude that some mists seen on the moon are caused by ice
meteors when they strike and vaporize and that it is only natural
that some UFO activity seen at these points is that of UFO using
the water. This explains some of the moon’s white spots, their
periodic changes in size, and their eventual disappearance.

In this way, temporary mists can be explained in spite of
lack of lunar atmosphere. Reflection and refraction from them
would explain some of the anomalously illuminated interiors of
craters. Thus we can thank Mr. Fauth. In taking his unreason¬
able stand, he provided useful data for us. The circumstances
which Fauth cites as being opposed to change actually explain
the changes seen.

♦ Atmosphere ♦

In A Guide to the Moon , Moore has this to say about its atmos¬
phere:

140 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Despite the statements so often met with in textbooks, there is
a little air left on the moon. However, the atmosphere is extremely
thin and no earth-born creature could possibly breathe it. If the
moon was once a part of the earth, it is reasonable to assume that
it took a small share of the atmosphere with it when it broke away.

As indications of a rarefied atmosphere, lunar twilight has
been noted as well as thin extensions of the crescent horns. Also
filaments, comiecting the tops of lunar mountains, are reported
on the dark side of the terminator. These all indicate, to Moore
at least, a remnant of atmosphere around the moon—but are not
these phenomena merely local nebulosities such as are seen in
the craters Plato, Aristarchus, Schickard, and others?

Moore concludes after an excellent analysis that the moon’s
atmosphere at the surface is about 1/10,000th as dense as that at
the surface of the earth. However, because of the relatively lower
gravitational pull, the moon’s atmosphere at fifty miles altitude
should be as dense as that of the earth at the same height. Above
fifty miles, the moon’s atmosphere may be denser than that of the
earth at corresponding levels. So, if there is any space life depend¬
ing on air in such altitudes, it might find more hospitable condi¬
tions at high altitudes over the satellite than over the planet.

In the levels at which meteors become visible over the earth,
they should also be visible over the moon. Numbers of lights have
been seen moving over the moon, but not as many as theory
would indicate, and they have not always been identifiable as
meteors. Small meteors such as we see in our atmosphere would
not be readily seen over the moon, because of their faintness and
short arc of flight. A few flashes, lasting one to three seconds, have
been seen on the dark side of the moon, which may be the result
of meteors striking the surface.

The few known observations of lunar meteor-trails indicate a
length of about seventy-five miles which is in agreement with
theory. Since meteoric velocity ranges from fifteen to forty or
more miles per second, a lunar meteor, seen telescopically from
the earth, would appear slow-moving, crossing about one minute
of arc of the lunar surface in two or three seconds of time. The
very rarity of lunar meteors is indicative, however, of weakness in

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 141

this whole concept. With our modern telescopes there should be
thousands of sightings of lunar meteors, if they were comparable
in number to terrestrial meteors.

Selenographers have reported shadows, especially in some
craters which were not pitch black. This might indicate a mini¬
mum amount of atmosphere, serving as a light-diffusing medium;
but it is difficult to explain these localizations on the basis of a
generally overlying atmosphere. We face the fact that if any
craters show this effect, then all should show it. On the contrary
such grey shadows are exceptional. If gas is the cause, the gas is
strictly a local phenomenon. Yet it is unthinkable that local clouds
could maintain themselves in the presumed vacuum of the moon,
unless deliberately controlled.

Sometimes penumbra are seen with lunar shadows, which
Moore considers an indication of atmosphere. But the assumption
would be sounder if the atmosphere were denser than it has
proven to be. The point is, these shadows are very long—hundreds
of miles in some instances—and considering the size of the sun,
relative to the objects and their shadows, there should be thin
penumbras in any case. But none are seen as a rule, and an iso¬
lated case does not indicate a widespread atmosphere, but rather
a locally controlled lighting arrangement.

On March 29, 1939, Dr. H. P. Wilkins saw the central moun¬
tain of the crater Copernicus faintly lit against the black shadow
of the floor, for about a quarter of an hour.

There is UFO significance in this. If it were due to atmospheric
effect, the phenomenon would have lasted much longer. If it were
due to atmospherically refracted light, then it should have ap¬
peared all over the surface of the moon. As we have already seen,
any number of reported cases of similar abnormal illumination
have been wrongly attributed to atmospheric action.

None of these explanations, however, can rationalize the local
nature of the observed phenomena. The conclusion becomes in¬
escapable: some type of highly localized “control” is being exer¬
cised. And by “control” we mean, in the last analysis, UFO action.

De Fonville pointed out that not only would water vapor
freeze on the moon, but the air itself would freeze where the

142 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 143

sunlight had been withdrawn for any considerable length of time.
This precludes any extensive atmospheric blanket around the
moon and emphasizes the restricted nature of clouds and of all
phenomena dependent on the action of mists and fogs.

#> Action #>

While it is no longer possible to doubt activity on the moon, it is
not yet feasible to appraise its exact nature. The resolving power
of our telescopes is too limited and our own atmosphere too dis¬
turbed. Activity originating from sources too small to be readily
analyzed through our lenses does, nevertheless, spread into our
range, or at least creates by-products which spill over into our
cognizance. We will have to make careful deductions based on
them, in addition to continuing direct observations in search of
basic phenomena.

On earth fog, clouds, mists, etc., are usually considered to
be made up of water vapor, or some other volatilized liquid.
But on the moon, we have to give thought to other kinds of
clouds.

Patrick Moore, after a lifetime of studying the moon, doubts
that lunar fogs are water vapor. He suggests that they may be
carbon dioxide whose vapor, he deduces, would dissipate more
slowly in the rarefied lunar atmosphere; its weight would hold
it more closely to the surface, and for longer intervals.

But the probability is remote that any gas could maintain
itself as cloud, unless controlled, without expanding explosively.
Moore points out that these mists or fogs are local and do not
prove a moon-wide atmosphere. But I take exception. I cannot
believe that, if mists exist, they do not eventually expand and
spread uniformly over the surface, unless artificially controlled.
Therefore, until it is proven otherwise, I must suppose there is
UFO significance in local clouds or mists—in other words, control.

Or that these localized things (when very temporary) are dust,
which does not have an explosive tendency.

Schmidt, in the early years of the last century, twice saw the
innermost cavity of crater A-399 feebly shining at sunrise as
though it contained partially illuminated mist, partially obscur¬
ing the underlying shadow. A larger crater near the south pole
has also shown internal twilight. According to Webb, obscura¬
tions in general have been confirmed by reliable observers. In
crater Schickard in 1939, Moore saw a dense mist covering its
entire 14,100 square miles and billowing over the walls, indicating
expansion from a blast or explosion, since the rarefied lunar air
cannot support high winds. H. P. Wilkins saw another mist on
August 31, 1944, which had disappeared next day.

The crater Plato is noted for mists and clouds, and, for at
least twenty years, mists have been seen also in the craters
Timocharis and Tycho. Birt repeatedly noted mists in Tycho
between 1870 and 1880, the years of the “incredible decade.”
Klein, who first noted the new crater Hyginus-N, reported some¬
thing like fog seen several times in the eastern part of Plato in
1878. This has been repeatedly confirmed, particularly by Neison
and Eiger. It was 1878 when Russell saw a shadow, fifteen hun¬
dred miles in diameter, on the moon.

Obscurations of variable density and size are often reported
in Plato and seem usually to originate in the same spot near the
eastern edge of the crater floor. In A Guide to the Moon (Norton,
1953) Patrick Moore says (page 112): . . there are many

records of mists inside the crater Plato, and obscurations un¬
doubtedly take place there.” His own observations and the
recorded observations have convinced him of activity in Plato.
He points out that A. S. Williams observed a white spot at the
base of Plato’s eastern wall in 1892, which Birt, reporting a few
years earlier, had not seen. In 1920, Stevenson saw this spot as
a small crater with inner shadow, while observing with the
great 28-inch Greenwich refractor.

Both Wilkins and Moore failed to see this spot with the 33-
inch Meuden refractor in France on April 3, 1952, though most
of the remainder of the floor of Plato was clearly defined at the

144 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

time. Four hours later, the American T. A. Craig could see
nothing of the floor with a 12-inch reflector. Moore thinks a
mist or other obscuration spread over from east to west. This
phenomenon in Plato has been seen by many others.

W. H. Pickering, American lunar expert, observing in the
wonderfully clear mountain air at Arequipa, Peru, found that
changes had taken place since Plato was systematically observed
around 1869 to 1880. Moore states unequivocally that changes
do take place in Plato. The obvious inference is that the changes
in Plato are erratic and non-permanent, which we expect from
mists—and UFO.

Such obscurations, in view of the almost total absence of
lunar air, make us think of the nebulosities seen in space above
the earth’s surface, apparently controlled, or directed, or exhibit¬
ing volition. I also think of earth’s “dry fogs.”

In 1892, Barnard saw the crater Thales filled with a pale
luminous haze, although all surrounding features were sharp
and normal. In 1902, Charbonneaux, with the Meuden 33-inch,
witnessed a small white cloud actually forming close to the crater
Thaetetus. Mist—dust—smoke? ... or UFO?

On March 27, 1931, Barker saw the central mountains of
Tycho as a curious grey, as if they were phosphorescent, or arti-
fically illuminated, although within a usually pitch-black shadow.

The best example of a lunar cloud was seen by F. H. Thorn¬
ton, on February 10, 1949, near the “Cobra Head” in Herodotus
Valley. Under good observing conditions, and using his 18-inch
reflector, he saw a puff of whitish vapor obscuring details for
some miles, while the surrounding surface details remained
sharply clear.

Mists seem to prefer certain localities, which may be, although
not necessarily, an indication that they arise from certain local
features of a fixed nature.

On July 26, 1881, the Selenographical Journal reported the
interposition of a thin cloud over a streak, and that Williams
saw an “obscuring medium” spread over a portion of Plato. (See
also Astronomical Register, July 1881, page 181). Consider this
along with Gudibert’s report of January 18, 1880: “The whole

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 145

of Mare Nectaris was foggy so that, with the exception of crater
Ross, and a black patch to the east, no detail whatever could be
seen. The fog reached midway into the floor of Fracastorius.”
Here, in the very middle of the “incredible decade” was a defi¬
nitely limited nebulosity not attributable to a fault in the tele¬
scope.

We have accounts of mysterious clouds passing over the
earth. One was the rapidly moving thing seen over New York by
Harrison in the 1870’s. Barnard saw a “comet” on May 12, 1881,
which remained two days and disappeared.

The astronomical descriptions of these nebulosities tally
almost exactly with the descriptions of mists and fogs on the
moon. Since both manifest UFO characteristics, we cannot but
wonder if they are not the same thing. They may be indigenous
to the moon . . . what are they?

♦ Obscuration <#>

In the Siderial Messenger (volume III, 1884, page 252) Haywood
of Otterbein College, Westerville, Ohio, stated that on Septem¬
ber 16, from 3:30 to 4:00 a.m., he found a bright glow covering,
nearly uniformly, the dark part of the moon. Professor Haywood
considered it an electrical manifestation because it was too
bright for earthshine, and it obscured the features of the moons
surface. The professor said, “This latter fact is puzzling and
unsatisfactory.” Telling us?

Here is the undoubted counterpart or identical cloud that
caused Russell’s shadow on the moon”! Here it is between the
earth and the moon, illuminated by sunlight!

On March 24, 1882, at 10:00 p.m. the Rev. W. J. B. Richards
noticed that a part of the dark limb of the moon was considerably
brighter than the remainder (A.R. 1883, vol. XXI, page 18). He
checked what he saw with several eyepieces. The eastern part

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 147

146 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

of the limb was brighter than the northern and southern parts.
This irregularity of illumination is significant as an indication
that shadows are occasionally cast on the moon by -partially
transparent things in space, or that these clouds reflect sunlight
to local areas.

On page 176 of Light Science for Leisure Hours Proctor
speaks of the effect of “the earth in meteoric shadow,” and sug¬
gests that shadows cast by meteor swarms in space may cause
erratic cold spells on the earth by shutting off the sunlight.

This would appear to be quite a concession from Proctor,
who was so caustic regarding the 1,500-mile shadows seen on the
moon, in daylight, by Russell and Hirst. Yet Proctor admitted
that the earth may experience cold spells from what he calls
meteoric shadows.

Here again is something: In the Astronomical Register (vol¬
ume XVII, 1879, page 38) the selenographer Neison reported
that “. . . the sky had been too cloudy for the purpose except
one night in August, and then a shadow came over the place
where the new crater Hyginus-N ought to be.” Now—what can
we make of that? Wasn’t something moving above the surface
of the moon at the site of Hyginus-N? One observer, while trying
to prove the existence of Hyginus-N, reported something moving
about twelve miles per hour at that place.

And the night of the “Maunder Object”! You will find in the
Astronomical Register (volume XXI, 1883, pages 139-140) that
Williams reported an unusual view of the head of the great comet,
as seen on the night of November 17, 1882. It seemed to be a
large luminous mass surrounded by a much greater envelope.
“On closer attention the whole of the large luminous mass was re¬
solved into numberless points of light and looked exactly like a
resolvable, globular star-cluster.”

Williams was also reminded that, on July 1, 1881, the great
comet of that year was preceded by “a bunch of lights which
looked like a star-cluster. Both these comets appeared in the
incredible decade.”

Brooks and Barnard saw strange cloud-like organisms in space
accompanying the comet of 1882. Schmidt, in Athens, confirmed

some of these phenomena and also observed a number of such
large entities moving at right angles to the comet, but apparently
accompanying it in its forward course. Schmidt, a serious profes¬
sional, thought this so significant that he published elaborate dia¬
grams of the bodies and their interrelated movements. Viewed
in retrospect, the entire phenomenon seems to reflect control of
a gigantic and incredible kind.

There is solid significance in the fact that a number of
anomalous wonders were seen contemporaneously, some the
same evening. These various spatial “objects” have a striking
similarity to the local, mottled bulks of glowing “haze” and
undulating lights seen on the moon, particularly the “things” in
the interior of Plato. They are certainly suggestive of intelligent
manipulation on a scale of time and space indicating a different
order of existence from ours. The tremendous and deliberate
“Maunder Auroral Object” was one of them. (See The Case for
the UFO.)

On November 20, 1878, ( English Mechanic, volume 28, page
444) Hammes, an American astronomer, saw an uprush of some¬
thing in a crater in the vicinity of Baco Barocius and Nicholi.
His immediate thought was that it was a volcanic eruption, and he
reported it as such to the U. S. Naval Observatory. The distur¬
bance was easily seen for half an hour with a 6 / 2 -inch telescope.
Was it, indeed, a landing or blast-off?

We may note in passing that 1878 was the year when the
Great Red spot broke out on Jupiter; and that the disturbance
seen by Mr. Hammes occured within a few days of Russell’s
1,500-mile shadow on the moon. November, 1878, opened the
“incredible decade” when a number of UFO were see in space.

We can assume that Mr. Hammes saw the dust raised by a
UFO as it took off from its lunar crater lair. Throughout the
history of such sightings, there is the suggestion that the entities
may be several miles in diameter. Hammes’ sighting recalls
Schroeter’s in the late years of the eighteenth century. He saw
a swirl of dust or vapor and a crater formed before his tele¬
scopic eye.

Parenthetically, for researchers among my readers, the English

148 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Mechanic (volume 27, 1878) issued at the opening of the “in¬
credible decade,” would repay a thorough scanning for material
of UFO import. The subsequent volumes covering 1879-1886,
inclusive, are also worth attention.

A remarkable description of the total eclipse of the sun that
occurred on November 30, 1853, was sent by Dr. Mosta, Director
of the Observatory at Santiago, Chile, to a Lt. Gillis. ( Astronom¬
ical Journal, volume III, number 19, page 145, February 17,
1854.)

. . . Twelve or fifteen minutes before the beginning of total eclipse,
the space between the moon’s limb and the bright limb of the sun was
instantaneously covered by a dark rosy nebulous matter and I am
sure that there was no kind of connection between them prior to the
apparition of this matter. As the unobserved portion [sic: does he
mean obscured?] of the sun became smaller, this nebula became of
a darker color, as though compressed, and finally it became difficult
to distinguish the limbs with satisfaction. As soon as the second con¬
tact took place, the clouds disappeared, leaving no trace behind.

But from this instant the eclipse presented an aspect more glorious
than I can describe. The moon was surrounded by a luminous corona
of uniformally white light, just as you have seen on clear evenings at
Satiago, when the full moon chanced to be concentrically covered by a
smaller and dark body which, for the instant, caused an annular
eclipse. (Italics mine)

Now what in the world does he mean? Have bodies the size
of the moon passed in front of the moon, as seen in Santiago ... ?
That is certainly what he says\

Where can we find something more about this?

Almost all the more prominent selenographers have noted
temporary obscuration. Clouds in such a rarefied atmosphere as
the moon’s would seem to be almost an impossibility—yet some¬
thing does obscure limited areas on its surface.

We well know that a gas injected into a vacuum immediately
expands to fill the container. On the moon the container is practi¬
cally infinite in size and, therefore, no natural cloud would exist
more than a moment.

Some scientists have suggested that the obscuration is caused
by clouds of dust kept in motion by escaping subsurface gas.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 149

While this is remotely possible, it is hardly an acceptable explana¬
tion.

On the other hand, dust particles do not tend to dissipate
in a vacuum, like gas molecules. Clouds of dust may, therefore,
be able to maintain themselves in space, perhaps in orbits, for
indefinite periods of time.

The alternative we keep turning to is that some of these
“space clouds” may have an intelligence incorporated within
them which enables them to maneuver not only in space but also
on the surface of the moon.

We are reminded of our “dry fogs,” which appear inexplic¬
ably from no determinable sources. They sometimes maintain
themselves over large but limited localities for a period of days
or even weeks in spite of winds and other climatic deterrents.
These “dry fogs” of ours are certainly as large as those that fill
the craters on the moon. They have been known to blot out the
stars and sharply reduce sunlight intensity; they are thought to
have caused some of the phenomenal dark days of history. Even
such conservative writers as Proctor have postulated that during
unusually cold seasons vast space-clouds interposed between the
earth and sun, especially during the very cold winters of 1878-
1883.

Contemplate this: During the total lunar eclipse of May 18,
1761, the moon disappeared altogether for about half an hour
and could not be found, even with telescopes. A total eclipse
does not mean complete blackout for the moon. For the moon
to so disappear is almost unbelievable because normally there is
enough light during the eclipse to enable observers to distinguish
many lunar surface features. In fact, there have been total eclipses,
such as that of March 19, 1848, when the moon was so bright that
many people did not believe an eclipse was under way. To
account for its disappearance in 1761 we must consider some other
cause than an eclipse. It is difficult to envision anything other than
an obscuring medium between the earth and moon large enough
to blot out the satellite. If this “cloud” was only a few miles above
the earth, it would not have to be more than a few miles in dia¬
meter to obscure the moon. The fact that it remained stationary

150 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 151

over the moon indicates control. Was it hiding in the earth’s
shadow?

In the Selenographical Journal (May 17, 1882) we read a
remarkable report by selenographer A. S. Williams on what he
describes as an “abnormal appearance,” on the evening of March
27, 1882, “in connection with the shadow on the floor of Plato.”

. . . the first thing that struck my attention was a long broad streak
of light on the floor to the east, and somewhat to the north of the
center. There were also some fainter and smaller streaks to the south
but what struck me was that nearly the whole of the floor in the
shadow seemed to glow with a curious luminous, milky kind of light.
(Italics mine)

This milky appearance extended over the whole of the floor in
shadow except for about one quarter of the diameter of the floor
from the west wall, which appeared quite black. At 8:10 p.m., clouds
intervened and when they had cleared at 9:00, not a sign of this
remarkable phenomenon could be seen, the whole floor in shadow
appearing uniformly black. It is possible that this is analogous to
Schroeter’s “kind of fermentation” in 1789 (the time of the first re¬
corded obscuration of Linn6) and of the late Mr. Birt’s impression
that a kind of sparkling or agitation played over the dark floor deep
in shadow, on November 20, 1871. From my own experience I recall
one instance similar to the above. This was at sunset on Plato on the
evening of August 31, 1877, when . . . the crater was seen filled with
shadow and over nearly all of the southern half of the floor there
appeared a glow corresponding very nearly with the one forming the
subject of this note. . . .

There we have several references to the “cloud” that frequents
Plato, with evidence that it is self-luminous, or controls a source of
light.

In the June 15, 1882 issue of the Seleno graphical Journal, Pratt
commented on the “inexplicable” changes in the shape of the
shadow of Bessel.

Webb says that Schroeter saw unaccountable, erratic varia¬
tions in visibility of the crater Manilius.

There are many notes in the Seleno graphical Journal and
elsewhere on the varying size of Hyginus-N, which often appears
merely as a dark spot. On January 4, 1879, Capron saw it with
a brighter border and larger than the reported crater. This is a
characteristic shadow with umbra and penumbra. On November

3 and 4, 1878, Baxendale saw it as an irregular dark spot. On
November 2, 1878, Noble could not see Hyginus-N, but later
the same night it was described by Capron and Baxendale as
being very distinct. These are rapid changes.

Remarkable changes have been reported in Posidonius-A.
Madler, Schroeter and Gruithuisen all report that sometimes the
inner shadow is not visible. On April 7, 1821, the small hills on
the crater floor were sharp and clear, but there was no shadow
and almost no darkening. Yet the next evening the crater interior
was the usual sharply marked shadow. This disappearance of
lunar shadows is one of the most mysterious of lunar phenomena.

#> Hyginus-N #*

In the English Mechanic (volume 28, December 20, 1879, page
369) Lord Lindsey exhibited a series of drawings, made near the
crater Hyginus, showing markings which changed their appear¬
ance completely in twenty minutes. This is too rapid a change to
be ascribed to changing altitude of the sun, which is only l/28th
as fast as on the earth. As we have seen, there have been many
other reports of changes near Hyginus, particularly among the
dark, ill-defined spots which are apparently flat on the surface,
having neither height nor depth.

In the Astronomical Register (volume XVI, pages 35-37) there
is a transcription of a report made by Neison to the Royal Astro¬
nomical Society describing the discovery of Hyginus-N. The area
in which Hyginus-N lies was sketched ten times by Schroeter;
ten by Lohrman; fifteen by Julius Schmidt, and many times by
Neison, himself. All of these top ranking observers saw several
craters in the immediate neighborhood but not Hyginus-N, now a
prominent object. Yet conservatives insist that Hyginus-N was
“there in the first place.”

In the talk before the Royal Astronomical Society in 1879,
during the “incredible decade,” Birt called for a study of the
region near Hyginus. He says that Goodacre was studying a

152 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 153

Hyginus and Hycinus-N: One of the most controversial
areas on the moon, where smoky vapors have suggested
industrial activity to expert observers. (From Our Moon)

known dark spot southwest of Hyginus when he saw to or three
bright spots. These, Birt indicated, were transient features.

In the Astronomical Register (vol. XVII, page 144) N. E.
Green called Hyginus-N a spot rather than a crater and says that
its brightness changed from night to night—“evidently no crater
or hollow . . . but seems rather a spot of color instead of a crater,
but this cannot be the case because it is lost when the sun rises.”

In his recent book, Moore reports continuing activity near the
crater Hyginus-N. On April 4, 1944, Wilkins found Hyginus-N
much darker than usual, while the south edge of the Hyginus
valley was bordered by a narrow dark band for about eight miles.

In the English Mechanic (volume 28, page 562) Birt said that

there were strong indications of rapid change, within the span of
one evening, in the area near Hyginus, and noted that blackness
in some areas increased noticeably in thirty minutes. Variability
was particularly noticeable at Hyginus-N which became invisible
between 6:45 and 8:00 p.m. This is very indicative of temporary
activity.

In the same publication, (page 605) Capron reported great
changes in the size of Hyginus-N on November 2 and December
4, 1878, and January 4, 1879. On December 4, Hyginus-N and the
crater Agrippa were misty and hard to focus, although nearby
objects were sharp. Three drawings published with this article
showed changes. On November 2, 1878, Hyginus-N was depicted
definitely as a crater, whereas on January 4, it was shown as a
white ring, and much larger. Why?

There is still, seventy or eighty years later, disagreement on the
reality of the sudden appearance of Hyginus-N, but the prepon¬
derance of positive evidence favors drastic changes, and an
abrupt advent of the crater. Discussions are similar to wrangles
about UFO. There is little disagreement on the reality of the
changes in shading or tone in the immediate area of Hyginus.
Dark spots, resembling shadows or fields of vegetation, come
and go or change intensity and shape in rapid and unpredictable
ways. Whatever may be said of the catastrophic arrival of Hygi-
nus-N on the moon, variations at its site are established.

♦ Spots and Streaks #

The Astronomical Register (September, 1883) carries a discus¬
sion of small bright spots and streaks on the moon. These streaks,
and particularly the spots, differ from the large patches such as
Linne and those of Hyginus. In fact, these small luminescences
almost always are confined to the interior floors of medium-
size craters. They are usually, but not always, associated with
small, fine, bright veins or streaks on the crater floors or, now
and then, on the surface of the smaller seas.

154 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 155

The spots frequently seem to be connected with small craters
and crater cones or crater pits. Among the regions where these
“glows” are found are Plato, Fracastorius, Mare Imbrium, Mare
Huinorum, and Ptolemaeus on whose floor they are especially
prominent, and where only four of one hundred and forty-five
glows are not on streaks.

In contrast to the larger, fluctuating white spots which develop
into domes, these are scarcely large enough to be clearly re¬
solvable to our telescopes. They appear in considerable numbers,
but not all can be seen at any one sighting. It is these, largely,
that Charles Fort called lights, making no distinction between
them and the glittering star-like lights on the other hand, which
are much rarer.

The brighter the streak, the more and brighter the glowings
on and near it. There is also a tendency for these glowings to
collect in pairs and groups, and their separations range from
one second to four seconds of arc, approximately one to four
miles. The streaks seem to be elevated, with sometimes a shading
on the side away from the sun. There is a tendency for the
streaks to be parallel. When they cross, which frequently happens,
it is usually impossible to tell which one is uppermost.

Occasionally a small streak can be seen to cross over a larger
one and it is assumed that the upper one is newest. Birt tried to
relate the streaks to glowing lava, but most of them appear to be
mathematically straight which would not happen with flows of
lava. The streaks tend to traverse the surface without much re¬
gard to local irregularities.

This discussion relates to minute streaks, mostly within craters,
rather than to the great ray systems springing from Tycho and
other large craters.

Drawings of the streak-spot systems in many craters look
surprisingly like irregularly laid-out real estate subdivisions com¬
plete with street lights at the intersections. We cannot make such
an assumption lightly, for such lunar streets would have to be
several hundred feet wide. Yet . . . ?

In Astronomical Register (1882, page 288) Williams discussed
bright streaks and indicated that many of them are double, and
that the two components have glows on them, opposite to each

other. He says the two halves of the streaks sometimes alternate
in brilliance, which may make the combined streak appear to
shift its position. There is a hint that changes do take place
along the streaks involving the glows. Some streaks may be up
to a hundred miles long. The central dividing lines are less than
a mile wide. There appears to be some connection between streaks
and spots, with spots occurring at intersections of streaks.

Webb writes ( Celestial Objects, page 89) about Mare Crisium:

On rare occasions it has been seen by Schroeter and in part by
Birt and Madler, speckled with minute dots and streaks of light.
Something of this kind I saw ... on July 4, 1832, near [the time of]
first quarter. A similar appearance was noticed by Slack and Ingall,
in 1865. It would be difficult to say why, if these are permanent,
they are so seldom visible; a suggestive, though at present unintel¬
ligible, phenomenon.

Unintelligible in 1865—before UFO were recognized as space
phenomena.

In the Astronomical Register (1882, page 165) Williams main¬
tains that these occasions are not particularly rare. He says well-
defined bright streaks frequently appear. On May 9, 1881, he
remarked that there must be nearly 1,000 streaks and light spots.
On March 26, 1882, he remarked that Mare Crisium was one
mass of light streaks and spots. These unusual appearances, he
said take place once in every two or three lunations, or months.

On April 10, 1873, Schmidt found a small “grey spot” on the
floor of Hipparchus. This “temporary object” was seen the next
day—but never since although hunted by experts. Another UFO?

Near Pico, Madler showed a bright elliptical spot south of
Mare Imbrium. Lohrmann did not show it. Neison, however, saw
it at 5° bright, but fainter than in Madlers time. Schmidt could
not find it on February 12, and March 12, 1851. Neison saw it
several times. Schmidt once saw a small crater nearby, not seen
ot any time by anyone else. A bright spot was seen twice in the
Mare Crisium, on May 15 and October 16, 1864. Such evanescent
spots are puzzling unless we assume controlled activity of some
kind.

In the Selenographical Journal (volume IV, February 28,

156 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 157

1881) T. P. Gray reported on a series of observations made by
him and by F. B. Allison and T. G. Eiger of a spot designated as
“L” on the floor of Archimedes. These are important for the
theory of UFO.

The first discovery was by Allison on April 19, 1880, when the
spot appeared as a faint white patch. In successive observations,
brilliance varied from a maximum between June and September
and a minimum through October, November, December and
January, when it faded to a white spot. Then, on February 11,
1881, in clear air and a good telescopic definition, it suddenly
appeared as a faint circular dark patch with two minute but
brilliant spots on its border.

Changeability of this type argues some kind of control, and
usually occurs at about the limit of visibility of average telescopes.

♦ Vegetation ■#

There are many areas on the moon which seem to have changes
of color as the lunar day advances, some within craters and some
outside. These spots change size, spread and contract, or dis¬
appear. They move in a manner suggestive of amoebae seen in
the field of a microscope.

As the day progresses, the spots darken and become brownish
or greenish, as though some kind of quick-growing vegetation
sprang up in the morning, and passed through a complete growth
cycle in the course of one lunar day, which, it must be remem¬
bered, is equivalent to about fourteen of our days. For all practical
purposes the moon’s day is also its year, although the intensities
of heat and cold vary considerably depending on the earth-
moon orbital position in relation to the sun.

Interest in the problem of vegetation on the moon has been
intense and continuous for more than a century, for vegetation
means life. We have been so eager to find life on the moon that
we have even developed a sort of brotherly longing for anything
as much alive as a lichen. If there is vegetation on the moon, there

is hope of higher life as well. 1 am confident that there is some¬
thing more. The UFO are demonstrating it to all who wish to see.

In the Intellectual Observer (volume V, page 360) Webb dis¬
cussed possibilities of vegetation on the moon. He assembled
much, favorable evidence, particularly in those patches of cyclic
change. Gruithuisen, he remarked, had noted the changing tints
so continuously and repeatedly that he was able to classify them
into colors, shadings, and types of development. Gruithuisen was
convinced that they indicated vegetation.

Webb and others belittled Gruithuisen for this, and for a
correlative belief in activity on the moon. Now, in the light of
modem work by Moore, Wilkins, Pickering and others, we are
beginning to think that Gruithuisen may have been close to the
truth. Gruithuisen’s observations are now among the most valu¬
able of all for the case for the UFO although repugnant to formal
astronomers. He recorded whatever suggested life and intelligent
action on the moon. His era may have included another “in¬
credible decade.”

Around the turn of the century, W. H. Pickering, who wrote
and illustrated the finest book on the moon produced in America,
came to the conclusion that life does exist on the moon, at least
vegetable life. Pickering’s observations were made in the clear
air of the Andes, under unsurpassed conditions.

The floor of the crater Eratosthenes, which sinks about eight
thousand feet below the average level of the plain, has cracks
and rills seen intermittently, being interpreted by some observers
as canals. This is doubtful, but if there is any lunar atmosphere,
it would be very likely to flow into and settle in these depressions.

The deep floor of Eratosthenes has been found to darken
with prolonged sunlight. The dark tint appears after about fifty to
sixty hours of sunlight. Since, otherwise, the surface of the moon
brightens with rising sun, a growth of vegetation is the simplest
explanation of the darkening in the depths of Eratosthenes.

It may be that you and I, liberal thinkers though we are,
are too limited in our th inkin g. After all, there is no reason for
assuming that “life” is restricted to only the two forms, animal
and vegetable. If changes of tint are definitely observed on the

158 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

moon, under conditions at variance with what we believe to be
requirements for “life,” perhaps we have observable evidence here
of a new “kingdom.”

Tints possibly attributable to vegetation, have been fre¬
quently reported in the craters Plato, Atlas, Aristarchus, Grimaldi,
and Alphonsus, not to mention the more extensive areas of the
Mare Imbrium and Mare Serenitatis. The tints may be either
green or brown, and usually retain the same color, though they
change in size and density. In Atlas, at least, the vegetation
has been associated with cracks, leading to tentative conclu¬
sions that these are vents for vapor exhalations. Incidentally, they
seem to be increasing in number.

The crater Endymion has a long crack and some dark spots
which become darker with prolonged sunlight. The areas expand
from night to night, as lunar day progresses, and many observers
think they may be a kind of moss.

The region of Hyginus, particularly Hyginus-N, has been
subject to particularly acrimonious debate. Its many shifting dark
patches or spots, which are associated with cracks, seem at
best “unstable.” They may be clouds expelled from the interior,
or they may be growth of some kind. Actually they are so
erratic as to arouse speculation that they are at times intelligently
directed.

Pickering pointed out that it was impossible to predict the
movements of the dark patches from night to night—proof of some
kind of life. He thought it was vegetation, but admitted the possi¬
bility of masses of insects.

When we say that the spots move, we do not necessarily mean
motion that one can actually watch in a telescope (although
some such cases have been suggested). We mean that a spot
shifts from one place to another overnight, and in unpredictable
directions.

The extremely bright crater Aristarchus has been continuously
changing over the last fifty to eighty years. Early observers de¬
picted it as uniformly a glaring white, but by mid-twentieth
century, dusky bands or streaks have appeared in a radical pattern
over the eastern wall, with one or more traceable on the outside

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 159

plain. Robert Barker and other modem selenographers believe
that these are steadily becoming more conspicuous than twenty
years ago. Using the greatest telescope in Europe, Wilkins found
these “streaks” to be made up of a series of dots and dashes, the
nature of which nobody knows. They may be alternate patches
of bare rock and vegetation. But they are real and they are
discontinuous.

Dusky bands on the moon are more common than most people
realize. Lenham and Moore have both noted many. More system¬
atic recent observation alone cannot account for their increasing
numbers. Robert Barker, who is probably the most persistent stu¬
dent of such lunar phenomena since Pickering, has staked his
astronomical standing on the assertion that the shifting dark areas
in Aristarchus and Plato are caused by vegetation. Wilkins, noting
that the bands are discontinuous and acknowledging that no one
can prove Barker wrong, suggests that the vegetation grows in
clumps.

Haas and Latimer Wilson made color photos of the moon
with a 12-inch aluminized, parabolic mirror. These bring out,
near the time of the full moon, an olive green tint in the Sea of
Rains, and part of the Sea of Peace, and brownish tints else¬
where.

Color is not really pronounced on the moon. The casual
sighting will likely miss colored patches altogether, for the colored
matter is sparse as if occurring in clumps rather than overlaying
the surface. Competent professionals differ in ability to detect
color, probably due to varying degrees of sensitivity to color
or even color-blindness. Madler, Schmidt and Pickering noticed
colors better than the equally assiduous Goodacre. Greens and
brown predominate, but blue, violet, red and purple have also
been reported. All seem variable, if not actually transient.

The greenish tint is most common on the great plains or
seas, or within such puzzling craters as Grimaldi and Ptolemy.
The Sea of Conflicts shows most green when illuminated by a
low-angle sun, and the color may therefore be a characteristic
rock tint, or a chemical reaction set up by the diurnal cycle. The
floor of Grimaldi, on the other hand, in a comparable location,

160 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

is a maverick, and may be greenest at most any time of day,
thus manifesting the characteristic vagaries of life.

All things considered, the case for life on the moon, on the
evidence of something which may be vegetation is indicative
rather than definitive, but it is . . . indicative.

Aristarchus, clearly depicted by Wilkins, is the brightest
crater on the moon, dazzling through large telescopes. Its steep
central hill is most prominent. It is twenty-nine miles in diameter
and contains peculiar dusky steaks on the inner slope which are
thought to be vegetation.

Wilkins’ remarkable drawing of Aristarchus and its artificial
appearing area recalls the vast, strange geometric designs on the
sands of the Nasca desert in Peru, which were obviously inscribed
to be read from the air or from space. The great crack known
as Schroeter’s valley, whose line has peculiar geometrical angu¬
larities, is another example.

Wilkins has recently discovered a very fine crack extending
from the angular bend of Schroeter’s valley at the lower right
in the drawing, to the “Cobra Head” just above the center. He
believes this crack is new because he discovered it with an
instrument of average size; yet this area has been drawn by
dozens of observers in the past. An apparent extension of this
crack from the Cobra Head to the base of the outer wall of
Aristarchus also seems to be new.

Neison has seen the high mountain a little north of Webb’s
object #149 near Aristarchus as blurred and violet-tinted when
surrounding objects were sharp and white.

Aristarchus is so bright as to be visible to the naked eye
on the bright side of the moon, and an average size telescope
can pick it up on the dark side. Webb says: “There are, however,
as already mentioned, variations in its light, noted by Schroeter.
Smythe, who has seen it every size, from a 6th magnitude to
a 10th magnitude star, says it is difficult to account for the
fluctuations.” Schmidt and others have seen a darker “nimbus”
of violet hue around the wall and also in the interior. Webb,
himself, saw a bluish glare in Aristarchus in 1867.

The area around the crater Gassendi is even more startling.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 161

It has a marked geometric and hieroglyphic appearance. Part of
its wall, next to the sea, has been destroyed by a flow of molten
lava, but within the walls are specimens of practically every
type of lunar topography. In the center is a group of large
hills, one with a pit on its summit. Many cracks intersect or
run parallel, some only a few hundred feet wide and visible only
because of their length. These cracks give the crater floor its
peculiar geometrical appearance. One of its little hills shines
brilliantly at full moon. Schroeter noticed many changes here, and
there is a strange diversity of drawings by various observers.

#> Plato #>

The problem of the lunar crater, Plato, is the essence of the
problem of life, intelligence and UFO on the moon.

The interior of the crater Plato, as charted by selenographers,
has almost the appearance of a city map; or rather, perhaps, of
one of the modem urban sub-divisions which avoid strictly
rectilinear streets.

The bright spots and streaks on the floor of Plato are certainly
interrelated. They fluctuate in brightness and visibility, and
sometimes in a complementary manner. As one fades, the adja¬
cent one may brighten. The bright spots appear almost invar¬
iably on streaks which are less bright, and mainly where streaks
intersect. The number of spots is variable, and this variability
is not always due to the sun’s altitude or the angle of its light.

Webb devoted considerable space to Plato, mentioning, among
other items, changes in the shading of the four main streaks on
the crater floor, prior to 1855. Careful work by Pratt, Gledhill,
Eiger and others, coordinated, analyzed and checked by Birt,
show transitions of a local nature. The number of specks and
streaks varies from observer to observer, from night to night,
and from hour to hour. Plato’s interior darkens progressively
with the rising sun which is contrary to lunar features in gen-

162 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 163

Plato, Home of Lunar UFO: Puzzling interior of crater
Plato, where objects appear to come and go, or move
about. Large “object” at right of crater has never been
satisfactorily explained. (From Our Moon)

eral. If this is not a chemical reaction, it is almost certainly due
to life of some kind.

Mr. R. A. Proctor, a skeptic regarding changes of the moon,
unbent with regard to Plato:

There is one spot on the floor of the crater Plato . . . which has
been scrutinized with exceptional care, and some observers are satisfied
that as day progresses on this crater floor, the surface darkens as though
some form of vegetation spreads over it. . . .

The Journal of the British Association for the Advancement
of Science (volume 14) contains an almost book-length report
on Plato. It was prepared by Birt, foremost selenolgist of his

day, acting as clearing agent for reports from all observers and
he recommended concerted efforts to solve its puzzles. It would
have been a better report had it been less inhibited, for Birt
apparently strove to avoid offending the more conservative
astronomers.

Birt himself shared the professional resistance to acknowl¬
edging anything which might be considered as indicating
“organic” change on the moon. Yet, only such hypotheses would
seem to rationalize otherwise anomalous observations. These
observations demand a new concept of what goes on in lunar
craters.

In his book The Moon, Goodacre, too, tended to deprecate any
idea of changes on the lunar surface. However, he conceded that
observers have seen many different white spots in Plato, in
various locations, and that it is hard to believe that they do not
come, go, and move about. From the evidence in intensive
studies made by cooperating teams of observers operating at
intervals of several years, he was forced to conclude that the
bright spots and streaks vary in visibility, independently of solar
altitude.

Goodacre further conceded that the surface of Plato is
occasionally obscured by mists or clouds, citing observations of
fogs forming on the east side of the crater, where there is
a peculiar conformation. Neison had seen the whole surface
obscured by a fog at (lunar) sunrise which dispersed later.

Waugh has seen the whole surface of the floor of Plato
covered with minute specks of light as if reflected from floccu-
lent clouds near the surface. This is the same mottled illumina¬
tion reported on several occasions in Mare Serenetatis and other
places.

On October 2, 1904, from 1300 until 1600 hours no detail
could be seen on the floor by Hodges or by Goodacre, inde¬
pendently. Something very remarkable was observed in 1882
at the time of the greatest and most mysterious of comets. The
observer was A. S. Williams, who, on March 27, at 8:10 p.m.,
while the whole floor of the crater was in shadow due to the sun
being low in the lunar sky, saw the interior aglow with a milky

164 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

light which covered about three-quarters of the crater floor. The
remainder was completely black in the normal manner. The
glow disappeared after an hour. This would indicate some kind
of self-luminous material, able to maintain itself in a vacuum
over defined areas.

For the serious reader, the English Mechanic (volume 27)
contains a serialized article on Plato which has much valuable
information.

In the Astronomical Register (volume XIX, page 180) is a
monthly report on the moon. Birt reports that Williams had
seen a new spot in Plato, and that over thirty such spots had
been listed. Some were double; some very small, round and
white; and they were not always seen with equal facility. Eiger
reported that spot number five changed its position in 1870.
Williams reported a new streak which he thought might be lava,
flowing from spot three. Spot nineteen appeared to be especially
variable, sometimes being seen clearly and at other times not
at all. Williams called attention to “a remarkable obscuration
of the northwest part of Plato on May 10, and 11, 1881”—which
was contemporary with another great and mystifying comet.

Everybody who owns a telescope looks at Plato. Its walls
are rugged, but the level floor looks smooth except for a few
tiny craters and the capricious streaks and spots. At lunar sun¬
rise the towering peaks of its circular ramparts begin to catch
the light, and shine like stars in the still unlighted area on the
dark side of the terminator. As the light increases, the entire
ring is seen, while the interior remains in blackest shadow. As
the interior shadow retreats, the spire-like shadows of the eastern
peaks are outlined, with a few scattered craterlets between them,
each throwing its own tiny shadow. The white spots and streaks
show up only when the sun approaches the moon’s meridian . 0

Some observers doubt that the floor of Plato darkens at high
noon, but none deny that strange things happen there, for some¬
times nothing at all can be seen on the floor.

0 Meridian: the north-south line across the sky, passing through the
zenith, which the sun crosses at noon. From this noon-passage we get the
terms a.m. and p.m., meaning ante-meridian and post-meridian.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 165

On April 3, 1952, Moore and Wilkins made independent
drawings of the crater, using Europe’s largest telescope. They
agree perfectly. Neither shows the peculiar pit or craterlet at
the foot of the eastern wall. This object has frequently been
drawn, but on this date not a trace was seen, although cus¬
tomary detail was present over a large portion of the crater
bottom. Four hours later a skilled observer, using a large instru¬
ment, saw nothing at all within Plato. Craters do not come and
go capriciously; yet this occurred again on October, 1952, and
April, 1953. It seems impossible to avoid the assumption of a
moving and transient obscuring medium which unfolded across
Plato in one evening—in less than four hours, in fact.

If this was a cloud of gas, what force kept it within the
crater Plato? What directed its determinate course over the
crater floor?

Why doesn’t some group of observers maintain a sentry-
watch to catch this cloud in action?

Wilkins states that he, Moore, Haas and Goodacre have all
seen these obscurations. So have dozens of other observers. They
have been seen in crater Schickard also, but no systematic,
uninterrupted scrutiny has been maintained.

Plato is about sixty miles across and Wilkins says that it has
often been suspected of being invaded by mists or clouds. He
have been seen in crater Schickard also, but no systematic,
through apertures on the floor or walls. He thinks dust is a
better explanation than mist.

On August 12, 1944, in very clear weather, Wilkins viewed
Plato with an 8 / 2 -inch telescope. It was then near the terminator,
and about a quarter of the floor was already streaked with
shadows. The remainder was of a dark grey tint, with nothing
distinct showing except a very bright round spot near the center.
Wilkins assumed this to be the largest of the craterlets on the
floor of Plato, but says:

Why an object which usually requires some looking for should have
suddenly become a large bright spot is a mystery. It looked as though
a little craterlet was filled with something which strongly reflected

166 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 167

sunlight. Whatever it was, it completely altered the usual appearance,
turning a well-defined craterlet into a bright spot.

Wilkins seems to have failed to note the parallelism here
to Linne and other ‘howler hat” phenomena which he himself has
mentioned. The sunlight reaching the interior of Plato was very
oblique, and not likely to evoke bright reflections from anything,
particularly the interior of a small crater. These white spots
behave in a peculiarly volitional manner, and this one seems
to be a quick-acting Linne.

Robert Barker has many times reported areas of changing
color on the moon, but none more important than the interior
of Plato where a reddish-brown tint has been seen on the western
wall and adjoining areas of the floor. Barker is convinced these
tints represent life, probably vegetation. Where there is one
kind of life, there can also be another.

Plato, Shickard and other craters are badly in need of sus¬
tained, continuous, intensive and systemic study. Solve the
puzzling problems of Platonian metastasis and vagaries and you
will be well on the way toward a new and awesome reappraisal
of space life in the earth’s environs.

•# Cleomedes #

The crater Cleomedes has not had great prominence in astro¬
nomical literature, although Birt (Astronomical Register, volume
XIX) put the puzzle of its variability second only to that of
Plato. He mentioned “shades” seen within Cleomedes and averred
that they were not shadows, such as are cast by crater walls and
mountains. Birt also mentioned an obscuring medium reported
by Schroeter within Cleomedes.

There is a most interesting little story about Schroeter (who
reported the first recorded obscuration of Linn6) and Cleo¬
medes. When he first looked at Cleomedes, he saw nothing
inside but a mountain in the lower (northern) part. Shortly
afterwards he saw something “eddying” there and suddenly a
well-formed crater made its appearance. We are indebted to

Wilkins for bringing this to our attention. Wilkins says: “Schroeter
thought he had witnessed a real volcanic outburst, and that
the crater was formed under his eyes, but we now know that this
was very unlikely and the reason he did not see it at first was
that the lighting was not just right.” (My italics)

In spite of our approval of Wilkins’ generally open-minded
attitude, it is difficult to excuse this example of negative snap
judgment. Bear in mind that in Schroeter’s day it was almost
universally thought that all lunar craters were of volcanic
origin; meteorites had not yet been accepted as objects arriving
from space much less UFO. Schroeter could be pardoned for not
assuming that he had seen a meteor strike the moon. Yet, the
“eddying” must have been the dust created, agitated and blown
aloft by the metoric impact, or by the sudden movement, or
taking off, of a UFO.

There is no reason except bigotry to deny Schroeter’s report,
or question its accuracy. The denial of this critical observation
is on a par with scientific denials today of the sightings of UFO
and science’s past denial of meteors. We still have scientists
denying in the press that the great Arizona meteor crater was
formed by a meteor, in spite of tons of meteoric material picked
up on the site. Exploding gas is offered as a substitute, believe
it or not! Here, in Cleomedes, a crater was seen in the act of
forming or being vacated, and Schroeter’s valid sighting is elo¬
quent refutation of those die-hards who object to lunar changes
“because no one has ever seen a change taking place.”

Cleomedes may be the king-pin on which turns the whole
concept of a progressively changing lunar surface.

# Fracastorius and Schickard ■#

In the Astronomical Register (volume XXI, page 200) stenog¬
rapher Eiger publishes an extensive report on the crater Fracas¬
torius. Forty or more light spots were known, he says, but few
were accurately mapped or located. He says of spot (a):

168 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 169

This puzzling object is situated near the center and on the cul¬
minating point of the irregularly convex floor. Under high illumination
it is generally recorded as a single round spot without definite outline,
but with a central bright point. However, it is described sometimes as
double, consisting of two large hazy spots with a minute bright point
on each. Occasionally it is seen three-fold or even four-fold. On Jan¬
uary 6, 1881, a small craterlet was seen on a short tongue of light
proceeding from a large ill-defined spot to the west of it. . . .

(b) A heart-shaped mountain sometimes seen as a crater, which
Schmidt, in his large map represented as four ridges surrounding a
square space.

Those white spots with brighter points on the top are indica¬
tive of UFO. The bright point may well be the UFO.

Eiger also described a spot (c) in Fracastorius, which, under
a high sun, appears as a large, round, nebulous spot (like Linne).
However, in oblique light, it resembled a low, circular hill or
“round-topped tableland,” which cast a shadow. Then it was
one of the “domes,” or Wilkins’ “bowler hats.” In spite of many
observations, Eiger never saw it as a crater until the 24th of
January, 1883, when it had a remarkable appearance:

It seemed to be surrounded by a peculiar glow quite different from
the lights of the other spots on the floor of Fracastorius, and in the
center of the glow I could just distinguish a delicate crater of the most
minute type, which would certainly not have been visible had not the
definition been exceptionally good.

Only four or five of the more than fifty objects listed within
Fracastorius have had their positions accurately determined, and
these have produced very puzzling data, hinting changes.

There is also the huge plain of Schickard, not far from
Gassendi. It is 134 miles in diameter, and walled in by mountains.
Its surface varies from dark to light tints of grey. Wilkins states
unreservedly that there can be little doubt of its extraordinary
variations. The interior may be beautifully clear one night, so
that craterlets and cracks stand out distinctly, but on the next
night everything in the interior may be veiled. In this respect
it parallels Plato.

Eiger commented on the Schickard tints that the phenomenon

has not received sufficient attention. “In no other lunar object
are there peculiarities of tint more prominently displayed, or
better calculated to induce an attempt to discover some feasible
hypothesis to account for them.”

Barker is convinced that the changes of tint are produced
by vegetation which completes a growth cycle within the four¬
teen earth days of sunlight comprising the moon-day.

Eiger also said:

In connection with many observations, it is strange that Schroeter
should describe as distinct objects two craterlets in the interior of the
crater Schickard which are now the faintest craters in its interior, and
fail to see many others which are now certainly easily detected.

Reports of lunar activity which lay buried in the archives of
nineteenth century astronomical literature are now vibrating with
new meaning, and thanks to Patrick Moore and H. P. Wilkins,
English selenographical traditions are being carried forward.
The new contributions may well be the most sensational made in
astronomy.

I believe the discovery of life and intelligence in the environ¬
ment of the earth-moon binary system is of as great ultimate
importance to man as the photographing of new galaxies, millions
of fight years away. I believe that this discovery, and our con¬
sequent awareness of this space intelligence, is of vastly greater
and more immediate importance to us. It has the effect of
putting us into a new world. Once this new world is established,
contemporary science will doubtless forget its opposition and
claim credit for a new intellectual outlook.

♦ Alhazen ♦

In the Astronomical Register (volume V, page 170) Birt gives
an intimate account of the lunar crater Alhazen:

This crater has been very puzzling to observers because of the
protean shapes it has assumed. Sometimes it has presented the appear-

170 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 171

ance of a depressed grey surface within a ring; at others, that of a
longish flat ridge. Perhaps the most curious ... is that of its general
indistinctness [italics Birt’s], while neighboring objects have been well
defined—a phenomenon which I have often noticed in other cases;
and this is strongly in contrast with its having been seen with extraor¬
dinary distinctness even when near the limb. These phenomena were
recorded by Schroeter at the end of the last century. In 1825, it could
not be found by Kunowsky; but in 1827, Pastoroff and Harding could
always see it. Kohler, in 1828, recognized it as corresponding to Beer
and Madler’s Alhazen, but observed that it was very variable in aspect.
During the progress of Beer and Madler’s survey, it appears to have
been missing, as they could discover no ring mountain in its place. In
1862,1 found it to consist of two ranges of mountains that under some
circumstances assumed the appearance of a crater; but I was then
quite unable to detect with an aperture of 2%, inches, the slightest
vestige of a real crater. On July 5, 1867, I saw it under very favorable
circumstances with the Royal Society’s achromatic of 4’a inches aper¬
ture, power 230, Schroeter’s pair of craters lambda and delta in its
neighborhood being very distinct. I then ascertained that Schroeter’s
Alhazen is really a crater situated on the surface between the two
ranges of mountains and but slightly depressed below it. Although not
greatly depressed, it is sufficiently so to present under this illumination
and visual angle the true crater form. It would seem that its apparition
as a crater is rare, probably from a number of causes.

Here is another clear-cut case of periodic variation in lunar
activity. Again and again, on reviewing recorded observations
of specific lunar areas, we find that what Schroeter saw in the
latter part of the eighteenth century was not seen by observers
in the first thirty years of the nineteenth century. Often these
things were again seen in the second thirty years, missed again in
the third thirty, and seen again in our own times. This “thirty-
year” cycle is only a rough assumption. I am willing to consider
any cyclic interval from eighteen to fifty years for these lunar
vagaries; but cycle there does seem to be.

♦ Messier and Messier-A ♦

From 1829 to 1837, the selenographical team of Beer and Madler
made over 300 observations of the pair of craters which they
called Messier and Messier-A (now called Pickering).

Beer and Madler described them as being exactly alike . . .
startlingly so. Several observers have since measured them and
described them in detail. Pickering is now described as triangular
and Messier as elliptical, whereas, earlier, they were identically
circular. Pickering usually but not always appears larger. Moore
thinks these changes are illusory, but does not deny them entirely.

Moore says that Klein twice found mists in the crater Messier,
and Moore himself has several times found both Messier and
Pickering to be blurred. Again this suggests a strip-mining opera¬
tion to us.

Moore states unequivocally that on August 20, 1951, there
was a brilliant white patch inside the crater Pickering, so
brilliant it could not possibly be missed. Such a sighting is per¬
tinent to the problem of UFO. There are far too many such
observations for all of them to be accidental, and note the simi¬
larity of these transitory white patches to space clouds which
have been seen.

Fauth’s map of Messier and Pickering shows the two as of
very different size and shape. Goodacre thought that Messier
and Pickering do not actually change and the apparent changes
are due to differences in illumination at different phases of the
moon. This obliges him to discredit earlier observers such as
Schroeter and Gruithuisen, which he does, saying that their
drawings were full of mistakes.

Wilkins says of Messier (1954): “This is the more westerly
of the pair, the other being Pickering. They were described by
Madler as being exactly alike, but now are not only different
shapes but exhibit variations.” Thus, the very latest authority
establishes that the lunar craters are undergoing variation and

172 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

change, which suggests that powerful, intelligently directed
forces are at work there.

Strip (or surface) mining, which can take in large areas, can
explain much.

Aristarchus, Herodotus and Schroeter’s Valley:
Showing artificial appearance of certain lunar regions.
(From Our Moon)

♦ Selectivity and Structural Similarity ♦

Any description of the lunar surface should contain a com¬
parison with the terrestrial landscape. Scientists of the past have

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 173

concentrated on emphasizing the spectacular differences and
contrasts. Yet there are some similarities as well and, strangely
enough, it turns out that the similarities are more sensational
than the contrasts.

It has been reiterated that the earth has nothing comparable
to the great ring plains and craters of the moon, such as Ptolemy,
Plato, Cleomedes, etc. Yet there is accumulating evidence that
analogous features do exist. Long Bay, on the east coast of South
Carolina, is the western rim of a vast submerged crater. Belcher
Islands, in Hudson’s Bay, appear to be outcrops of the central
peak of a crater whose eastern rim makes a semi-circular notch
in the coast. Ungava Bay seems to be a great crater hole, and
the proven meteoric crater “Chubb” two miles in diameter, lies
between the two. The entire Gulf of Mexico resembles the lunar
seas.

Dr. V. B. Meen, of the Canadian National Museum, has
demonstrable evidence, on Canadian geological maps, of a
walled plain or crater thirty miles in diameter, which has escaped
detection from the ground.

But the most striking resemblances are in Mexico, on whose
high volcanic plateau there are also clusters of explosion and
impact craters not yet studied by formal science. Their extra¬
terrestrial origin is categorically denied by geologists, simply
because the craters occur in volcanic regions. These craters
range up to at least a mile and a half in diameter. It is among
these that we may observe astonishing similarities to certain
features of lunar topography.

In the Astronomical Register (volume II, page 183), Birt
called attention to a phenomenon which he described as “half-
craters,” which have been brushed aside as mere curiosities.

It seems that many meteoric impacts should be slanting and
should produce distorted craters. But almost all lunar craters
are circular, girdled with mountainous walls. The absence of
distorted craters has been a frequent argument against the impact
theory of crater formation. At first thought, these half-craters
would seem to fill the gap. Yet they are too scarce to substantiate
the meteor-impact theory. Their scarcity and abnormal profile

174 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

make them objects of suspicion. What caused them? Perhaps the
similar topography of the Mexican plateau may provide some
clues, particularly the cluster of impact and explosion craters.
Some are perfectly symmetrical, circular, walled pits like the
minute lunar craters. They are potential laboratory specimens,
which, up to now, we have refused to study because they are in
a volcanic region. They are proven in many ways to be of extra¬
terrestrial origin. One lies on a mountain slope and has a
secondary crater inside—like many lunar craters. The largest
is a mile and a half in diameter.

But they are of two types: symmetrical, circular rings; and
elliptical “half-craters,” on one side of which no sign of debris
but on the other, debris piled up to mountain heights propor¬
tional to the size of the pits. The underlying lava layers are
distorted and bulge upward. Where there is no debris the rims
are clean-cut, sharp. The rims on the hilly side are shattered
and rugged. An uncontrolled explosion or volcanic eruption dis¬
placing the surface on one side only is difficult to conceive.

About half the group are normal and the rest half-craters.
The axes of the half-craters are parallel to each other and the
piled debris is at the northwest end of the ovals. The lunar
half-craters also have their debris to the north.

Questions: What caused these craters? Why are half of
them elongated and non-symmetrical? Why are they in a cluster?
Why is there debris on one side only— the same side in each?
Why are they located in areas almost identical in appearance and
condition with lunar areas containing similar small pits? Why are
these crater-pits so identical in size and appearance to the small
lunar craters which appear and disappear occasionally? Has this
small area served as a landing and take-off field? Could some-
thing blasting off from the Mexican plateau leave debris on one
side only of a huge crater? Is there selection and control in the
alignment of the asymmetrical craters? What is the connection
between the circular and the non-circular craters in the same
group?

The largest of these puzzling craters is a mile and a half
in diameter, and the hill of debis on its northwest edge is about

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 175

three hundred feet high. A local resident who made soundings in
a small boat could not reach bottom and declared it to be
“muy prof undo.” (The central pit on the top of Linne is also
assumed to be “very deep.”) Debris is heaped in a gradually
ascending ridge around 190° of the rim of this big crater. The
remaining 170° is level with the plain. The half-craters on the
moon are similar.

Webb observed that incomplete surface rings are more com¬
mon in the lunar north. Ours are in the northern hemisphere.
The heaping of the debris is usually on the northern rim; so, too,
in Mexico. There are far more double-craters on the moon than
the law of averages can explain. There are at least two double¬
craters in Mexico and several multiple craters indicative of super¬
imposed impacts or departures. Both in Mexico and on the moon,
multiple craters tend to line up along a North-South axis. Both
in Mexico and on the moon the craters appear in clusters, and
along straight fines.

Webb said that we have nothing on earth similar to the
double, multiple and half-craters of the moon; but that was a
hundred years ago. We do have them.

In the “incredible decade” a Mexican astronomer saw more
than a thousand objects cross in front of the sun, flying in pairs.
His photo of one, a cigar-shaped affair, was published in the
French journal, L’Astronomie. This may have been the first
genuine photograph of a space ship, but in those days they
didn’t dream of UFO. What were those thousand objects, in
pairs, seen at Zacatacas?

Fauth supports Webb and others regarding the formation of
double and multiple craters. In his book on the moon he pre¬
sented many fine examples. Their arrangement and frequency
preclude explanation by statistical laws. Even the arch-conserva¬
tive Goodacre stressed double objects and multiple craters and
illustrated them in his book The Moon. There must be some
significance in the analogous structure and distribution of the
double craters in Mexico, and on the moon.

East of Mexico City, there is a splendid double or twin crater
of a size that would be barely discerned from the moon in an

J

176 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

average telescope. It is not a volcano and is not recognized by
science.

H. T. Wilkins (not to be confused with astronomer Wilkins)
says in a letter to me that he has valid reports that in similar
rugged country in neighboring Guatemala, a huge UFO is using
a charred and blackened crater in Northern Guatemala for an
operating headquarters.

♦ Unfocusable Nebulosities #>

The editor of the Reports of the British Association for the
Advancement of Science once said:

Bright spots on the moon are of two kinds: (1) those clearly and
unmistakably slopes of mountains or the interior of craters; and (2)
those which appear as round, nebulous spots. The spots of the second
class are apparently horizontal [his italics] but it is not yet obtained
by direct observation whether they are in contact with the ground
[italics mine]. The three most observed individual spots of this nature
are Linn6, Posidonius gamma and Alpetragius-d, and these present
some quite remarkable differences.

Almost all through the lunar day, Linne appears as a white
spot varying in brightness and size. It is usually about the same
size and brightness as Posidonius gamma, which is the highest
part of a ridge on the Mare Serenitas, with a small pit in its
summit. Early in the lunar day, Linn6 exchanges the character¬
istics of the first class for those of the second, being reduced,
toward the end of the day, to a nebulous white spot. Posidonius
gamma retains the appearance of a mountain much longer.
Alpetragius-d, which seems to be a crater opened in the bottom
of a depression, retains its form much longer than the other two.

While the three objects, under high sun, present an identical
appearance, the lunar surface surrounding each differs materially.
Linne has the appearance of a small isolated cone with an open¬
ing on a comparatively level surface; Posidonius gamma is the
minutely perforated summit of a mountain range; Alpetragius-d is

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 177

a somewhat large opening, with a small central cone, in a depres¬
sion on a mountain range.

To all appearances, under the scrutiny of the most careful observers,
these spots appear to be on the surface. [Italics ours; note that this
was the nineteenth century.] In the case of Linne, the spot spreads
around the cone or crater; in the case of Posidonius gamma it extends
around the summit of the mountain; in the third case it covers the
depression and the included crater. Their variable appearance is
doubtless associated somewhat with the altitude of the sun, but there
is more to it than this. Any apparent connection with the altitude of
the sun is obviously of a more complex nature than simply the chang¬
ing of shadows. The objects differ greatly but have in common the
minute central pit, seen at low angles of illumination; and the white
spot at high angles, nearer lunar noon.

W. H. Pickering was among the many selenographers who
noted that not only Linne but other small craters have from
time to time been replaced by patches of light, of poor definition
and difficult to focus. The transition is similar in all cases. A few
have been known since the earliest days of telescopic lunar
study; the others have appeared within the period of modem
telescopic observation.

Many white spots were described in the Selenographical
Journal. McCance reported the crater Messier appearing as a
bright spot as big as crater Pickering. And a bright spot was
noticed near the busy crater Plato; verification was requested by
the astonished observer.

The white spot longest and most consistently observed is
probably the “bright spot west of Picard.” Herbert Ingall once
wrote that recently the bright misty appearance surrounding the
spot had been growing fainter.

He notes:

April 10, four hours before full moon, not a trace of the spot west
of Picard, but in its place a most minute point of light glittering like
a star with about 10° of brilliancy. In size, the point of fight could not
have been more than one second (or one mile). On May 12, after a full
moon this place was close to the terminator and I then perceived a
small hollow or pit, the sides having about 5° of brightness and the
pit was about two seconds (or miles) diameter. On April 10 and 11,

178 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

the surrounding Mare was intersected with bright veins mixed with
bright spots.

Note that there is no way of judging the size of a point
source of light at such a distance. That it is seen at all gives
it some apparent size. Ingall’s statement that the light could not
exceed one second of arc is meaningless, since he saw a star-like
point of light, not a circle or lighted area. Also keep in mind the
rare but puzzling appearance of the Mare.

We feel that the behavior of this area is of great interest.
Consider the absence since October, 1864, when Ingall observed
it, of the white cloud-like appearance that exceeded Picard in
size. On July 10, 1865, the spot was only slightly brighter than
the Mare and very small (about one to two miles on the moon).
Consider, too, the reduction of the pit-like marking, its wildly
variable reflecting power (4° to 10°), and a crater or craters
having been seen on the site since October, 1864, widely differing
from Birt’s observations in 1859. If these observations are con¬
sidered insufficient to establish physical change as a fact, they at
least indicate alterations in reflective power and a change in size
of something sometimes larger than Picard, which is thirteen
miles in diameter, to a point one second (mile) across.

How solve the enigma of small clouds associated with minute
craters on the surface of an orb with practically no atmosphere?
Something must be generating and dispersing these clouds that
appear and disappear in a manner not consistent with a highly
rarefied atmosphere.

Birt, one of the most persistent observers of the white spot
near Picard, writes (Astronomical Register , volume II, 1864,
page 295):

In the course of my observations, as I observed the locality under
oblique illumination, the white cloud-like spot either became invisible
or did not exist; which, I cannot say. But its want of definiteness and
its similarity in appearance to a cloud led me to hesitate before ex¬
pressing an opinion as to what it really appeared to be. Further obser¬
vation brought to light a small pit-like depression in its neighborhood
with which the larger cloud-like marking appeared to be connected.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 179

The pit-like depression is of a beautiful whiteness and shows up when
the cloud is not visible.

This looks very much like the lair of some sort of UFO.

Captain Noble, another persistent lunar observer, stated
that the white spot west of Picard sometimes resembled the
puzzling Linne. He reports that from 8:00 to 8:20 p.m., June 15,
1877, it had almost the identical appearance of Linnd on January
19, 1869. It is important to note that the change was so rapid
that it held this appearance for only twenty minutes.

I cite these older observations because the lunar observers of
those days made more systematic studies of evanescent features
on the face of the moon, and gave more detailed reports; and
also because such unpredictable activity is by no means a thing
of the past. Modem observers of the highest calibre also see these
puzzling erratics, and interest in them is reviving rapidly.

In Moore’s recent book, there is a description of the famous
“white spot” north of Picard. Moore confirms its continued
activity. While he considers many white spots to be small craters,
this one, he says, has more the appearance of a surface deposit,
sometimes showing haziness, sometimes abnormal brilliance,
which leads him to assume that it is a vapor, though he makes no
attempt to explain how it maintains cloud-like condensation in
the atmospheric vacuum of the moon.

H. P. Wilkins, in Our Moon, one of the most modern of lunar
treatises, and most generous to lunar activity, says (pages 133-
34);

It is curious, to say the least, that the earlier observers, many of
them possessed of good telescopes, should have recorded few of the
domes or “bowler hats.” Nasmyth [a foremost selenographer] says that
no such things existed apart from the one to the north of crater Birt,
near the Straight Wall. Yet, today, they are known in considerable
quantities. The author [Wilkins] and Patrick Moore have found nearly
a hundred, and most of them have a pit at the summit. To the west
of the crater Picard, in the Sea of Conflicts, is a white patch on
which various people have noted a minute pit. Epsin, quoted by Webb,
declared that the white patch marked a depression. F. H. Thornton
found on September 26, 1953, that the patch is a low dome with a
summit pit. On that date the terminator crossed the “sea” and had

180 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 181

actually passed the site of this patch. Had it been a depression, or
even if it was level as most observers thought, it would have been
invisible, concealed by the shadows.

But Thornton saw it as a sort of island of light amid the blackness,
clearly proving that it was raised, in fact a dome. It is curious that this
is the first time that such a thing has been seen. Is it possible that it has
only become a dome recently? ... is this a new blister on the moon?

Now, mark you: this is not ancient history. This is mid¬
twentieth century.

H. P. Wilkins clearly states (1954) that domes or “bowler hats”
are increasing in number—rapidly, and he is confirmed by other
observers of today, using the best telescopes. In spite of his own
extensive study and review of all other reports, he cannot explain
the domes.

“The spot west of Picard,” however, is certainly not the
only one where there has been confusion as to shape, size,
appearance, pits, sharpness of focus, and domes versus depres¬
sion. The classic is the evasive crater Linne.

The author knows of no report of a similar nature before
Schroeter. Most important was Schroeter’s notations about
Linne in 1788, the first report of this series of UFO operations —
the disappearing craters, superimposed nebulosities, and the rest.
Their number doubles just about every twenty years!

Twenty years—a cyclic period that forces itself on our atten¬
tion. Some authorities put the present number of domes or
“bowler hats” at more than two hundred.

Two hundred years ago there were none.

Something is colonizing the moon. And something is per¬
meating our own atmosphere in increasing numbers. Is it the
clouds we see, clouds that refuse sharp focus in our telescopes
(such as were seen here by Harrison, Swift, Barnard, Schmidt
and Brooks)?

Or are these clouds merely an accompaniment, or a by¬
product, of something more tangible and, perhaps, more sinister?

Eiger describes ( Astronomical Register, volume XXIV, 1886,
pages 45 and 207) one of the elliptical white spots as a convex
surface on the moon, although no shadow was formed. (Italics

mine.) Even though this object was not the “spot west of
Picard,” the description tallies, showing that dome-like structure
has been long under debate.

Some of these very low but very broad convex surfaces would
cast shadows (if at all) only at the moment of sunrise or sunset.
Eiger also noted a white spot of 6° of brightness near the crater
De Lisle, previously unreported, indicating recent activity. We
are coming to recognize that signs of action go together with
the peculiar white spots.

Eiger adds largely to our understanding of activity that
seems related to the peculiar white spots and “bowler hats” on
the moon. ( Astronomical Register, volume XXII, 1885, page 172).
He says that east of Crater Alpetragius there lies a large, bright,
anomalous spot, designated as “d”, shown in reproductions of
drawings by Madler, Lohrmann, and Schmidt. In Beer and
Madler’s map, it is a well marked crater, five miles or more in
diameter, with a small crater to the south. In a letter to Birt
dated June 5, 1868, Julius Schmidt of Athens says:

This crater “d” is now no longer existing, but in its place is a round
spot of light more than ten miles in diameter, extremely brilliant,
which has quite the character of the bright spot on Linne, and of the
few others of this kind which are also found on the moon. The small
neighboring crater south of “d” is still distinctly visible.

Nobody but Eiger took much notice of this at the time.

These white spots definitely show that something is happen¬
ing on the moon. As long ago as the mid-nineteenth century
reports indicated that such spots were increasing in number. We
have every reason to believe they are still increasing. Whereas
a dozen or so were known in the period 1860-1870, more than two
hundred are now reported by Tulane University.

By mathematically extrapolating the indicated rate of in¬
crease backward for the past one hundred sixty years, it can be
calculated that the first of these white spots appeared around
the year 1800. The first recorded obscuration of Linne was seen
by Schroeter in 1788, from which it may be assumed that the
‘march of the white spots” began about that time. Was Linne

4

182 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 183

tlie first “colony”? There must be some significance in these
unfocusable spots and nebulosities on the moon. What prevents
a telescope from receiving a sharp image when the surroundings
are perfectly clear?

♦ Disappearances and Linne ♦

In a region west of the crater Parry, objects seem to come and
go. While new craters could be explained by meteoric impact,
explosions, UFO excavations, collapse of the lunar crust, or
other causes, a disappearing crater is harder to explain. In
the area near Parry, Schmidt reported the disappearance of two
“remarkably deep” craters. (Linne was once a deep crater, too!)
At least one seemed to become a dome (as did Linne, at times).

Madler mapped a number of small craters just west of Parry,
the inside diameter of one of which measured two and one-half
miles, the outer five miles; this was described as very deep. Such
an object is visible even in modest telescopes; but this and a
nearby crater were said by Schmidt to have disappeared before
November 1878, the beginning of the “incredible decade.”
Lohrmann saw no craters at this point, but at the sites designated
“B” and “C” by Madler, he saw bright round hills about the
size of small craters, which come and go; and, incidentally, about
the size of the extra-terrestrial craters clustered on the Mexican
plateau.

A changeable widget within the crater Archimedes looks
variously like a craterlet, a rock mass, a small hillock and a
projection of the crater wall. Birt mapped bright streaks nearby.

Schroeter, circa 1780-95, (was there another “incredible
period” at that time?) showed, at one point of the lunar land¬
scape, four deep pits, two about the size of the considerable
crater Ptolemaeus-A. About three-quarters of a century later,
Webb (a careful observer) definitely located on this site only
two minute craterlets. Neison, outstanding map-maker, later con¬
firmed Webb. Yet, somewhat later, one of the missing members
was reported visible —but with four bright spots on it! Some
commentators pointed out that the behavior of one of these
changeable objects was much like that of Hyginus-N.

.

184 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Note the association of these disappearing craters with bright
spots, domes, lights and clouds. What are they?

And, what is more, note the frequency with which spots, lights
and clouds appear in groups of one to eight or nine—on the
moon, in space, in the heads of comets and in the terrestrial
sky.

No story of strange disappearances on the moon would be
complete without Madlers “square." On the edge of the Mare
Frigorias, not far from the ever-variable crater Plato, there is a
large “bay,” which Madler described as an almost perfect square,
within which was an almost perfect cross formed by white
ridges. H. P. Wilkins, using the greatest telescopes in Europe,
reports confidently that one side of the square no longer exists
and the cross is gone. The area was searched with a telescope
ten times the diameter of the one used by Madler. Something,
then, moved away a huge wall and a great cross.

Many disappearances are only temporary, and some do not
seem to be cyclic or repetitive. The Spanish comet hunter Sola
once saw only a white patch where there should have been the
small, but sharply defined, crater Reiner.

Let me quote here from Our Moon, by PI. P. Wilkins:

... All this is mysterious enough, almost enough for us to sym¬
pathize to some extent with the idea often expressed by Schroeter, that
some of these appearances are caused by the “industrial activities of
the Selenites.” We cannot subscribe to this idea because without au¬
to breathe it is exceedingly difficult to contemplate the existence of
Selenites let alone to speculate as to their possible activities, industrial
or otherwise. It is equally difficult to explain these things on natural
grounds. [Italics mine]

There is an active mind striving against the fetters of dogma¬
tized science. This is as far as we may ask an astronomer to go
in advocating intelligence on the moon, or anywhere else in
space. More would cut him off from his profession. Let this
man of authority state the observational facts. I, already an
outcast, will cheerfully take the rap by stating bluntly what
the facts imply—UFO activity!

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 185

I am, at this time, offering an explanation, not necessarily
the explanation. If I succeed only in stimulating thought, and
encouraging somebody to achieve one more tiny step toward
truth, the effort will be worth while.

The classic and possibly the prototype of lunar disappear¬
ances is the crater Linne. Nothing else, aside from Hyginus-N,
has caused so much comment.

Linne changes with puzzling rapidity, as illustrated by a
report from Webb. On November 13, 1866, Webb, Talmadge
and Birt observed Linne. Webb saw “an ill-defined whiteness,”
Talmadge “a circular dark cloud,” and Birt—nothing.

Denning remarked about Linne that to an observer of his
acquaintance it had appeared on January 8 as a small hill rising
up as a very brilliant point from the ravine which was still
in darkness. Later considerations led him to conclude that
the “hill,” if hill it was, was to the west of the center of the
white cloud which had replaced crater Linne. Combine this
observation with the persistent sightings of a small orifice in the
top of this cloud. What is the nature of this object and what
accounts for the instability or activity of whatever existed on top
of it?

In the Astronomical Register (volume VIII, 1870, page 190)
Birmingham reports that on June 6 he saw “a very marked cen¬
tral depression on the white spot of Linn6—very shallow and
rather east of the center of the white spot.” More movement.

The following pages recount in chronological order the fan¬
tastic history of this outstanding lunar puzzle.

Before 1866, all acceptable maps of the moon indicated a
small but prominent crater located at lunar longitude 11° 32'
28" W; and latitude 27° 47' 13" N, on the extensive lunar plain
named Mare Serenitatis. But the existence of this crater, with
a diameter of approximately six miles, has not been serene.
Situated on a low, broad ridge, it was prominently isolated. The
maps showed no crater, large or small, nearby, although diligently
prepared by famous lunar map-makers, such as Beer and Madler,
Lohrmann, Schroeter and Neison.

Although definitely seen, measured and mapped by observers

186 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

for two centuries, Linne had not been entirely without its darker
history. According to the Intellectual Observer (volume X,
page 444) Schroeter had turned his telescope on Linne on the
evening of November 5, 1788, and had seen not a crater but a
darker spot, diffused and without sharp border. Its brightness
was rated at & on a scale wherein dense shadows are rated zero,
and the brilliant, possibly irridescent, interior of the crater
Aristarchus is rated 10. This observation did not get too much
attention from the astronomical fraternity until late in 1866,
when . . . Linne disappeared.

Nobody seems ever to have attached much importance to the
fact that in the autumn of 1788, for at least one evening, a deep,
dark, definite crater almost six miles across was obscured by
a dark “something” which, so far as we can ascertain, cast
no shadow.

Schmidt, who had known Linn6 since 1841, saw, on October,
1866, nothing where Linne should have been except a glimmer,
a small whitish cloud. This persisted through November.

So Schmidt announced the first authenticated disappearance
of a lunar crater.

Contemporary selenographers rushed to their observatories
to verify it. Birt considered this sudden disappearance “con¬
cealment” by a “cloud,” though neither he nor anybody else
accounted for the fact that this cloud did not cast a shadow.
Almost uniformly, the literature of 1866 to 1870 refers to the
“obscuration” of Linne as being a “white spot,” which, on
December 15,1866, had no defined edges, was almost eleven miles
in diameter, and cast no shadow. If Linne was still there under¬
neath, it was a changed Linne.

Similar cloudy spots had been observed from time to time.
Between 1858 and 1863, Birt had made several sightings of a
white cloudy patch west of the crater Picard. A very bright,
cloud-like patch nearby, seen by Ingall in 1864, had practically
faded out by the end of the year. These patches were associated
later with minute craters or orifices. Something of the sort
eventually developed at the site of Linne as well. It has never
been determined at what point these little black points made

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 187

their appearance. The interest in Linne was heightened by the
fact that this was at least its second obscuration in eighty years.

Something was going on at Linn4. Birt has tabulated the
brightness of the location (or object) over a period of years:

Observer

Date

Degree of Brighti

Schroeter

1788, November 5

0.05

Lohrmann

1823, May 28

7.0 plus

Breed and Madler

1831, December 12-13

6.0

De la Rue

1858, February 22

5.0

De la Rue

1865, October 4

5.0

Rutherford

1865, October 4

6.0

Buckingham

1866, November 18

2.0

The location of Linne is shown on the photograph on page 65.

Schmidt’s announcement appeared in a number of publi¬
cations. In part, he says ( Intellectual Observer ):

I have known this crater since 1841, and even at full moon it has
not been difficult to see. In October and November, 1866, at the phase
of the moon when previously it has had maximum visibility, this deep
crater, with a diameter of 5.6 English miles, had completely dis¬
appeared and in its place there was only a little, whitish, luminous
cloud.

There is significance in this cloud’s being luminous.

Webb was among the earlier observers in England to con¬
firm the defection of Linne. In the Intellectual Observer, (pages
11-58) he lists some observations:

1866, December 13: I was much struck by finding that the site
of Linn6 was occupied by a whitish cloud.

December 14: The whitish spot in the place of Linne is
barely as large as Snip. Gallus; it is the
most conspicuous object in the E. half of
M. Seren.

December 25: Fine definition. Linne a very conspicuous
white, nebulous patch, containing some very
indistinct and almost doubtful markings
within it.

188 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 189

1867, January 12: On the site of Linne nothing but a small ill-
defined whitish cloud, not quite so large as
Snip. Gallus. There seems to be some slight
marking as from a small shadow, towards its
center, but far too indistinct to say whether
caused by hill or hollow. The white cloud
was by no means bright or conspicuous, al-
thought perfectly distinct.

Repeatedly the earlier literature had described Linne as
being deep and dark. Beer and Madler, a sort of Damon and
Pythias of astronomy, referred to “the deep crater Linne.” No¬
body made such a reference after October, 1886.

This reported change on the lunar surface attracted much
attention in its day, but contemporary astronomers are indifferent.
Their concern today is outer space, the problems of cosmogony,
the constitution of stars and nebulae. But it may be that we have
overlooked something important close by.

It is interesting to note that the diehards consider that the
intense observation after the disappearance of Linne in 1866
served only to establish its true state, and not to verify its
change!

At about this time Temple expressed great interest in the
increasing number of white spots on the moons surface, attribut¬
ing them to what he called chemically warm activity, as opposed
to any brightness depending upon oxidation or other atmospheric
effect. His comments appeared in the Astronomische Nachrichten
(Number 1655) and were translated by Lynn ( Astronomical Regi¬
ster, pages 58-219). He believes that two obscurations of Linne
indicate that these nebulosities are something more than ground
markings.

Birt’s resume in the Reports for 1867, referred to above, quotes
Schroeter as follows ( Selenotopographische Fragmente, 1-181;
November 5, 1788):

The sixth ridge [in Mare Serenitatis] comes from a depression close
upon the south boundary of the mountains, passes northward towards
v where it has within it a somewhat uncertain depression about the
same size, but quite flat and resembling a white very small spot.

Schmidt says that “v corresponds ... to the place of Linne,”
and thus identifies Schroeter’s description of the first obscuration
of Linne.

But note the entirely different description, reported by Lohr-
mann as of May 28, 1823 ( Topograpliie der Sichtbaren Mondo-
berflache, page 92):

“. . . (Linne) is the second crater on this plain . . . near a ridge be¬
ginning at Sulpicus Gallus; it has a diameter of somewhat more than a
mile [German mile, about 4& English miles], is very deep, and can
be seen under every illumination. [Italics mine]

Of observations made by Beer and Madler of the region adja¬
cent to Linne on December 12-13, 1831, Madler wrote in 1867:

The crater Linn6, situated in 27° 47' 13" N. Lat. and 11° 32' 28"
W. Long., has a diameter of 1.4 geographical miles (6.4 Eng. M.).
In full moon the edge of it is not very sharply limited, but in oblique
illumination it is very distinct, and I have measured it seven times with
great facility. The light of the edge is permanently 6° and the small
inner space retains its brightness until shadows begin.

In February, 1867, Schmidt assigned to the original crater a
diameter of just over seven miles and a depth of just over 1,000
feet. His earlier observations included about 1,300 drawings of
the lunar surface, some pertaining to Linne and its environs.
The latter included the following:

1840: On a general chart of the moon, diameter 12", constructed
from my own observations about the end of 1840, Linne
is marked as a crater.

1841: April 27. In a sketch, (#4) Linn6 is wanting, but two
small craters are strongly marked in the NW.

1841: May 28. In No. 11 Linne is not marked.

1841: September 6. In No. 36 Linne is not marked.

1841: December 2. In No. 52 Linn6 is marked as a crater.

December 2. In No. 53 Linne is given proportionately very
large as a crater.

190 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

December 3. In No. 54 Linne is represented distinctly as a
crater.

1842: January 3. In No. 63 Linne is not marked, although close
to terminator.

February 16-17. Linn6 which was near to the light boundary
(terminator) was not seen.

July 14. Observed Linne at Hamburg with a good telescope
by Banks; with power 88 it was represented as a very small
crater.

1843: May 9. The air being particularly favorable, I counted with
the last mentioned telescope 22 craters in the Mare Sereni-
tatis, and amongst them is certainly included Linne.

August 17. With the great telescope of the Hamburg ob¬
servatory, the two mountain veins running northerly from
Sulpicus Gallos were well visible on the evening terminator,
but of Linne no trace.

Now, while these many observations leave no room for doubt
about the previous existence of Linne as a crater, or crater-like
object; and while a careful study of the exact times of observation
shows that its appearance and details depend somewhat upon
the degree and angle of solar illumination, we must ask whether
there were no indications of alternate appearances and disap¬
pearances during the century of 1788 to 1866. Although Schmidt
and Birt provide no suggestions, we cannot escape the suspicion
that something out of the ordinary was going on around Linne
during those years.

Astronomers soon noted that the spot obliterating or replac¬
ing Linne fluctuated in size. Birt assembled the measurements:

Authority

Date 18 _

Sec. of Arc

Eng. Feet

Schmidt

66.794

6.90

48,688

Birt

66.953

11.61

81,932

Birt

66.961

7.07

48,871

Birt

66.964

7.32

51,652

Birt

66.969

6.75

47,644

Schmidt

66.986

1.81

12,789

Birt

67.036

7.95

56,105

Buckingham

67.197

6.00

42,340

SELENOLOGY

SPEAKS 191

Authority

Date 18 —

Sec. of Arc

Eng. Feet

Wolf

67.443

4.50

31,755

Birt

67.518

7.85

55,423

Huggins

67.518

7.85

55,423

Huggins (2nd)

67.518

6.14

43,314

Birt

67.518

7.00

49,426

Birt

67.520

5.36

37,848

Birt

67.528

6.31

44,528

So the “tiling” covering Linne was fluctuating in size as well
as brightness.

Now if this “cloud” occupied a crater or depression, how could
it fluctuate in size to such a degree without disclosing the outer
walls? If it was elevated above the plain how could it avoid
casting a shadow, or showing a lighter hue on the side towards
the sun? If below the surface, why did the walls cast no internal
shadows? What was the central hill and/or crater seen on this
white spot by observers with superior instruments? If this was a
real cloud, what prevented it from dissipating into the vacuous
atmosphere of the moon? If it was too tenuous to cast a shadow,
why was it opaque enough to obscure the surface below it? If it
was lava, why did it change size, and why did the old walls
sometimes show through, as seen by Noble and others? If the
spot was made up of the debris of the destroyed “old Linn6,”
where did all the material come from to fill the “deep” crater?

Schmidt and others made nine measures of the brightness of
Linne relative to the bright spot called Posidonius Gamma:

Compared with Posidonius

Observer

Date

Fainter

Equal

Brighter

Schmidt

Nov. 17 (1866)

X

Schmidt

19

X

Schmidt

22

X

Schmidt

23-24

X

Schmidt

Dec. 14

X

Schmidt

16

X

Birt

19

X

Schmidt

Jan. 13

X

192 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Compared with Posidonius

Observer

Date

Fainter

Equal

Schmidt

14

X

Birt

14

X

Birt

15

X

Birt

Feb. 11

X

Birt

Mar. 14

Buckingham

14

X

Birt

May 11

X

Birt

15

X

Birt

17

X

Birt

July 13

X

Birt

Aug. 10

X

Birt

12

X

This shows considerable fluctuation in the brightness of the
cloud over Linne, as determined by simultaneous comparisons
with Posidonius gamma, even after eliminating the effects of
variable sunlight.

Whereas the original Linne was a deep crater with heavy
internal shadows, the new object appeared level with the plain,
and shadowless. Early observations placed Linne on a long, low
ridge, but after the change, the ridge appeared discontinuous,
as though partially blotted out. Gradually, seen under high-
altitude sunlight, Linne began to resemble Posidonius gamma
which was definitely seen as a mountain about 1,000 feet high
at low illuminations. Both light spots had minute dark spots
near their centers, at high altitude illuminations which often
appeared to be minute craters or crater openings, reminding one
of the opening and closing of manhole covers.

Some observers described the minute black spot as being on
Linne rather than in it. Occasionally an observer described the
bright spot as convex. Some observers saw a “ghost” of the old,
original crater outlined in the brilliant white spot. This would
indicate fluctuation in the thickness or density of the cloud, as
well as in its size and brightness.

SELENOLOGY SPEAKS 193

The small, black “crater” on Linne was first seen February
11, 1867, whereafter it appeared frequently. Strangely enough
the similar one on Posidonius gamma appeared about the same
time.

At sunrise, when shadows should be longest, Posidonius
gamma cast very distinct shadows, as the original Linne had
done, but the new Linne was entirely invisible, not even appear¬
ing as a bright spot until the sun rose considerably higher in the
lunar sky.

Repeat: At sunrise Linne was invisible and neighboring Posi¬
donius gamma was distinct with shadows. At high illuminations
both became bright spots, with tiny black points centrally located,
sometimes described as crater holes.

At times, when nearby craters were plainly seen, the new
Linne was invisible or a mere white spot.

The consensus of Schmidt and most of the other observers
was: (1) in the first half of the nineteenth century, Linn6 was a
crater somewhat deeper than average; (2) sometimes between
1842 and 1866 it disappeared; (3) after 1866, at sunrise, when
shadows are longest and nearby craters are most prominent,
Linne was invisible; (4) at high-angle sunlight, Linne became
a bright spot of variable size and brightness, sometimes well
defined, sometimes nebulous, sometimes convex, sometimes with
a minute crater in the center of the cloud, sometimes with a small
hill which cast a shadow; (5) Schroeter, in 1788, saw Linne in
about the same condition as after 1866; (6) there are other bright
spots on the moon which have similar characteristics, sometimes
including the same minute black crater. The observations of Lohr-
mann and others, between 1788 and 1841, which were not given
sufficient consideration, also show unexplained variations.

It is especially notable that, while the new Linne was con¬
stantly altering its appearance, at no time did it revert to its
original deep cup shape.

At one time, Goodacre described Linne as a cone on the
e dge of a shallow depression.

In 1954, Wilkins said:

194 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

Today Linne is a pit on the summit of a low dome, and situated in
the center of a white area. If Lohrmann, Madler, or Goodacre correctly
described it as it really was in their time . . . then a change of some
sort has certainly occurred for today Linne is the reverse of a crater,
being in fact a hill or dome with a minute pit on its summit.

Interior of Crater Gassendi as seen by H. P. Wilkins
with Europe’s largest refracting telescope. Note the geo¬
metric layout. (From Our Moon)

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS

♦ Little People, Green and Otherwise ♦

The rash of news reports anent “little people” and “little green
men,” throughout 1954 and 1955, emphasized the persistence of
this theme in the field of UFO. After the climax of Miss Dorothy
Kilgallen’s sensational report in May 1955, a hunch made me stop
in the Miami Public Library to read up on Pygmies “just in case.”
It proved a minor revelation.

Of course I had read Scully’s yam. Of course I had noted
the erratic reports from France in late 1954. Of course I knew
about Miner Black and the dwarf who appeared, seeking a pail
of water, not too far from mysterious Chico, California. I was
casually familiar with the literature about little people and UFO,
but had sensed an element of unreality there.

My first rundown in the encyclopedias stopped me cold. Here,
before my eyes, was evidence of an entire race of “little people,”
who might have, probably could have, and maybe did invent
space flight eons ago.

On my arrival in New York in June for an extended sojum, I
walled myself into the New York Public Library with stacks of
books on Pygmies. In a short time I had come to the following
conclusions:

195

THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 197

1. We have had persistent reports of “little people” observed in,
or in connection with, UFO.

2. These “little people” are obviously of high intelligence, and
are sometimes dark in color—or even green.

3. We have undeniable evidence that space craft (UFO) have
existed for a very long time, thousands of years in fact.

4. There is no evidence that our “second wave” of civilization
has ever developed the ability to create space craft, although
there is some slight evidence that lifting machines were used
in the very early stages of this wave.

5. As pointed out in The Case for the UFO, remnants of artifacts,
made by intelligent “hands,” have been recovered from coal
beds and stone quarries originating at least as remotely as
Tertiary times.

6. The current period of civilization to which we refer as “his¬
torical times” is only two to eight thousand years old, depend¬
ing on the area under discussion. Culture areas whose records
are less graphically preserved do not extend backward more
than 25,000 to 50,000 years.

Thus our vaunted civilization is still a “beginner.” About
98 per cent of its total development occurred within the past
5,000 to 10,000 years; and almost the entirety of its scientific
development within the past 300 to 400 years. This disregards
possible remnants of the archaic science of the “first wave,”
such as the Great Pyramid of Gizeh.

7. Pygmy man is known to have existed since Miocene times, a
period of approximately 33,000,000 years. He is not a missing
link, but a fully developed human race—although not related
to other races through any known genetic connection.

8. Thus our scintillating intellectual progress has run its gamut
in 1/10th of 1% of the total time during which fully developed
homo sapiens is known to have existed; and its scientific upsuge
has taken place within l/1000th per cent, or within 1/100,-
000th of the known life span of the Pygmy race.

9. It seems within the bounds of reason, then, that a comparable
intellectual surge could have occurred during the vast span
of Pygmy history. If wiped out, or nearly wiped out by
cataclysm, it could easily have been lost in the subsequent
shuffle.

10. Since we know that space flight has existed for at least 3,500
years, and, according to the research of Leslie, H. T. Wilkins,
Churchward and others, we have reason to believe that space
flight may have been in existence for 70,000 to 100,000 years,
there is reason to believe that space flight derives from a time
in the pre-cataclysmic era which developed a first wave of
civilization. In this case, it is an improbability of lesser order
to assume that space flight originated on this planet in an
earlier wave of intellectual development, than to assume
that the UFO phenomena, more recently observed, are coming
from another planet.

11. If we do, indeed, have “little people” within the UFO, as re¬
ported by observers of varying responsibility, then we may
assume that the Pygmies, at some remote epoch, developed
a civilization which discovered the principle of gravitation
and put it to work.

These general conclusions are supported, sometimes positively,
sometimes by default, sometimes vaguely, by the findings of
history, archaeology, ethnology, mythology, paleontology, philol¬
ogy, theology, genealogy and geography.

Edward Potter and William T. Walsh have posed a very
tantalizing question. They suggested that there may have been
a sudden change in the earth’s gravitational attraction in a remote
period. Giant animals and plants, so large that we consider them
freaks and monsters, once throve on earth—huge dinosaurs like
Brontosaurus and the even larger Diplodocus, and the gigantic
tree ferns. Did these living forms reach such dimensions because
gravitational pull was smaller? Did they then weigh less than
they would if living now? I might add a related question: Was
this a temporary period of partial release from gravitation, lasting
perhaps only a few million years?

It is suggested that there may have been similarly phenomenal
growth of indigenous residents (or colonists) on the moon.
Ancient literature, myth, and tradition swarm with giants. There
are persistent stories of a race of giants appearing in Peru (with
no hint of where they came from) who were so large that they
killed the native women with whom they attempted intercourse.
Were they colonists returning from the moon? Were the enormous

198 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 199

megaglyphs at Nasca, Peru, made by those giants as a means of
signaling to observers with fine telescopes in space or on the
moon?

In such speculations we are dealing in millions of years, not
mere centuries. Startling things could have happened; still I
see no certain connection between these huge animals and the
moon or space travel.

One other thought: If evolutionary growth could increase
the size of beings on the moon, the reverse would be true of
colonists from the moon. We have had Pygmies here for 30,000,-
000 years who, as far as we can trace them into the past, were
small but fully developed humans. Is the Pygmy an equally mon¬
strous under-growth produced by evolutionary processes acting on
terrestrial colonists? Is the Pygmy related to the giants of the
past as the present-day horned toad is related to the dinosaur?

The UFO problem is complex.

Only a few years ago, a Swedish expedition was reported
(in the Svenske Dagblat ) to have found very small Pygmies in
the Cameroons of Africa, the adults only about three feet tall.
This, if substantiated, would make them the smallest known living
Pygmy tribe. The ethnologist Walter Kaudem, specializing in
Pygmy races, thought the earliest were possibly smaller than
those of today, and there has been a tendency for increase in sta¬
ture. This is pertinent in view of what we shall learn of the
mysterious Zimbabwe ruins of southeast Africa.

A recent report comes from France, checked by M. Marc
Thirouin who edits a UFO journal called Ouranos. A Mme.
Leboeuf was picking blackberries, when her dog started barking.
Raising her head, she spied a queer “thing” standing motionless
and staring at her “with intelligent-looking eyes.” It was about
three and a half feet tall and seemed to be without arms. A
shroud like a deep-sea diving costume, made of plastic or cello¬
phane, covered its entire body. As it started moving toward her
in jumps, Mme. Leboeuf fled. The shock made her take to her
bed for some days, during which time the dog whimpered
continuously. On the same day a UFO was seen high in the
nearby sky.

H. T. Wilkins states as a certainty that Pygmies existed in
ancient South America. He records that two gold-prospectors
are said to have found a fourteen-inch Pygmy mummy, with a
lively and intelligent facial expression, encased in granite in a
cavern which had been blasted open with dynamite. If this case
is verifiable, the body had been within solid, igneous rock for
millions of years, from pleiocene times, in fact. This episode is
of the “erratic” class. It is difficult to conceive of any process of
preservation which would permit the body to escape being con¬
sumed by molten rock. We must consider this with reservations.

At a very remote time there were Pygmy tribes in North
America. In 1885 their bodies or bones, it is reported, were
found in various burial grounds. Their faces differed from typical
Indian features, and the remains indicated elements of civiliza¬
tion. They were found in prehistoric stone graves in the Cumber¬
land Valley, not far from the Ohio Mound Builder area. The
corpses were buried with small, finely worked implements of
quartz and chalcedony.

The Maya of Yucatan and Central America have legends of
dwarfs who may have been the first people there. They were said
to have done their work in darkness. The dwarfish Piets of
Britain are also said to have worked only at night.

A curious fragment of tradition comes from the few surviving
works of the Maya and Quiche Indians. A great cataclysm or
flood is said to have been caused by cosmic forces, associated
with Venus, concurrent with a major distortion of the earth’s
orbit. The Maya had a respectable knowledge of astronomy, and
there may well be some truth in this. The Roman historian Varro
suggested the same thing. This was said to have ended the first
period or cycle of the little people.

There are vague memories among Polynesians of a race of
‘small people” possessed of great strength in spite of their small
stature. Numbers of colossal stone structures are said to be their
work. Lewis Spence and Robert Graves have mentioned similar
attributes among Celts and Piets—brute strength and the building
of megalithic stone structures, such as Stone-henge. This points
both to the immense antiquity of “little people” and to the

200 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 201

ancient world-wide distribution of a Pygmy culture of a high
order.

There are rumors, also, of Pygmy survivors of the “great sea
that swallowed the land” in the Pacific, and of the salvaged
weapons with which they fought giants. This may relate to the
submergence of the continent of Mu. There are megalithic stone
structures in the South Sea Islands comparable to those of Peru
and Africa.

Most megalithic structures are found in the tropics, and they
do encircle the earth. It is significant that many were obviously
built for the use of “little people,” especially Sacsahuaman,
Zimbabwe, and the Great Pyramid.

There seems little room for doubt that the ancient Pygmies
had some science, though it differed from the science of today.
It appears to have been based on non-metallic substances, pri¬
marily stone, handled and worked by means unknown to us. It
was probably not electric or electronic.

Some science cultists hesitate to admit any other types of
science than our physical science of the past few generations.
However, the handling and working of great stone masses must
have been accomplished by a form of power not yet discovered by
us. These accomplishments may have been rather in the nature
of accidental discoveries than of the systematic developments
we term “physical science,” or invention.

We hear that there were little people in forgotten cities buried
in the jungles of Amazonia. This finds support in what we will
have to say later about the tunnels of Cusco, Peru. There is a
hint of the lost science in a report of a “cold light” eternally burn¬
ing in one of the lost jungle cities. What is that light? And, come
to think of it, what was the light used by the ancient Egyptians,
when carving the vast interior tombs in the Pyramids and the
Valley of the Kings—a light that left no smoke traces?

There are caves in Europe which have been shaped inside by
masonry methods. They are 10,000 to 20,000 years old. Their
rooms and passages are too small for normal-sized adults of
today, and children use them as playhouses.

Similar caverns exist in the remote mountains of Spain, near

the age-long home of the Basques, whose language roots, as in the
case of the Pygmies, have never been traced.

The Pygmies of neolithic days left behind them delicate stone
implements in India, Africa, and France. The tiny “Hayden”
flints, which have left a trail from Eastern Asia to California via
the Bering Strait, are equally puzzling. They have been used by
archaeologists as evidence that the American Indian tribes emi¬
grated from the Orient. But it is just as likely that the migrations
began here and moved westward. More likely still, these mysteri¬
ous items were made by Pygmies in an age long forgotten before
the Indians settled in western North America.

Jesuit records indicate that there were Pygmies living in small
numbers in the Swiss mountains as recently as the sixteenth and
seventeenth centuries. Human remains of small stature have been
found there which seem to be about 9,000 years old.

The Greek historians Herodotus and Hecateaus mention the
African Pygmies, showing that Mediterranean travelers pene¬
trated into Africa as early as 450 b.c. Herodotus said that the
Pygmies of the Congo were sorcerers, evidence of a lost science,
perhaps gone “black” and occult. At this point we wonder when
and how communication was maintained with Zimbabwe or Cen¬
tral Africa?

In the early part of the nineteenth century, Dr. Grayson in¬
vestigated some ancient tombs in the Mississippi Valley, said to
be the graves of Pygmies. The bodies are all buried with their
heads toward the east. Why?

Both H. T. Wilkins and Dr. Flower, an English ethnologist of
the late nineteenth century, reported Pygmies in ancient Japan,
and the small stature of the modem Japanese would confirm this.
Note, also, that Japanese of relatively short stature often are very
strong and show the tremendous shoulder span of the Piets. It is
believed the Pygmies were in Japan “ages” before the yellow-
negrito savages from the old land of Pan invaded and conquered
the stone-age Ainu aborigines. The latter have reported that the
“little people” were about four and one half feet tall and had tails.
Their artifacts are said to have been found.

Then there is Zimbabwe, in Rhodesia, one of the world’s most

202 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 203

puzzling ruins. It is said to have been discovered by an American
named Renders in 1868; yet there is a remarkable map, in Dutch,
published in Amsterdam in 1763, which locates and describes the
site with astounding geographical detail, including the locations
of Pygmy tribes in the hinterlands—of which more later. For the
moment: What brought that knowledge of Zimbabwe to Holland
before 1763?

“Why,” you ask, “Zimbabwe? What’s that to do with UFO or
even little people’?”

That s easily answered. These slumbering remains of an
ancient mining project have been a frustrating enigma to archae¬
ologists. Zimbabwe, like other recalcitrant erratics, becomes elo¬
quent when underwritten by space flight and “little people 7

Did you ever meet a stranger on the street and wonder if you
had met him somewhere? After pondering vague resemblances
for a while, did you finally conclude that this unknown person
had a “family likeness” to some person or group of persons you
had known? Zimbabwe has a vague and haunting “family like¬
ness” to Sacsahuaman, Easter Island and Phoenicia . . . perhaps
Egypt . . . perhaps the Orient. And, in all, sharing an aura of the
world’s least explained archaeological puzzles.

“Well,” you ask, “for instance?”

Well, for instance: the little steps leading up the 350-foot
ascent of its Acropolis” . . . steps so small they are a positive
hardship to climb . . . which recall the little steps leading to the
“Inca’s Throne” at Sacsahuaman, and the basaltic stone staircase
in the mountain. The passages in the Zimbabwe ruins are too
small for the normal adult of today, as are the little tunnels of
Cusco, near Sacsahuaman.

Entrance doors in Zimbabwe are under five feet high! Ancient
gold mines in the Zimbabwe area have entries and passageways
too small for an adult white man!

Students of archaeology, who have commented on Zimbabwe,
have each, in turn, attempted to establish Zimbabwe as an out¬
post of some other one country. Always they have failed, largely
because of their own artificially created barriers—usually time
barriers— and their restricted concept of tansportation. They have

failed to recognize the true antiquity of a world-wide civilization.
Seen as a link in a world-wide network, the jigsaw pieces of
Zimbabwe begin to assume their place in a pattern.

In common with Peru, Easter Island, Baalbek, and other
megalith sites, Zimbabwe shows every sign of having been pre¬
cipitously vacated. Why? What happened all over the world to
drive strong people from prepared strongholds? So quickly that
they left tools and treasures behind? It is estimated that at least
100,000 people lived for centuries in Zimbabwe but left no bury-
ing ground, no mummies, no bones. Why? What was the mode of
exodus? Where did they take their dead . . . and how?

The Zimbabweans were phallic worshippers, so were the
Easter Islanders, and the Phoenicians. There are no writings or
inscriptions at Zimbabwe—and none on Easter Island except a
few remnants on wooden slabs. The Zimbabweans carved large
birds in wood; so did the Phoenicians.

Those people who mined $300,000,000 worth of gold and cast
it into ingots for export must surely have known how to write.
To whom did they export? How was the gold carried away? No
native tribe within hundreds of miles of Zimbabwe has attached
any value to gold within historical times. Who wanted it badly
enough to five in jungles to mine it, yet would not bury his dead
in Zimbabwe? What mode of transportation was so convenient
that dead bodies could be carried “home”?

And the stonework! A million or so neatly cut granite blocks
of approximately uniform size: about six by twelve inches; over
100,000 tons, shaped and fitted with the same skill as at Sacsahua¬
man, Easter Island, Angkor Vat, and the great Pyramid, yet
without a trace of local quarrying. Where did that stone come
from? How transported, if not by levitation or flight? The same
problem faces us in Peru, Easter Island, Baalbek, Egypt: ease
in handling heavy stone . . . and anomalous crudity in almost
every other field.

But, withal, a race desiring gold so badly that they established
an isolated colony of 100,000 souls to mine it! (The Incas and pre-
Incas loved gold. So did Solomon . . . and the Queen of Sheba.)
The logistics of such an enterprise would stagger a modern army.

204 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 205

No roads, no tractors. And these were little people, Pygmies. So
were the pre-Incas. So, probably, were the pyramid builders. And
their transportation problems were similar, and solved in ways
mysteriously similar. How? Was there a world-wide civilization
which “discovered” aerial or space transportation, without the aid
of what we call science? What was their secret?

Nobody has ever determined the age of Zimbabwe—nor of
Easter Island, nor Sacsahuaman, nor Baalbek. Nor—I may be in
a minority here—of the Pyramid. Miss G. Caton-Thompson ex¬
plored Zimbabwe and decided the ruins could have been built
only after 900 a.d. She also visited Easter Island. Did she ever
publish a comparison of Easter-Sacsahuaman versus Zimbabwe?
R. N. Hall after several years at Zimbabwe, decided that the
period of building covered at least three hundred years and was
done by “some civilized race from the Near East.” Mauch dated
Zimbabwe from the time of the Queen of Sheba. Randall-Mclver
could find no trace of either European or Oriental motif, and
significantly declared the structure to be typically African. Esti¬
mated dates run from 400 to 4,000 years ago. So do the estimates
of Sacsahuaman, Easter, and the other enigmatic areas.

Consider the isolation of Zimbabwe. It totally lacks connec¬
tion with its surroundings. Why? Neville Jones, antiquarian of the
Southern Rhodesian Government, says:

Here, away in what was until recently the unknown interior of
Africa, we are confronted with the evidences of a race of people who,
whether they were immigrants or indigenous natives, have disappeared
as a cultural unit. They have left for our inspection hundreds of ruins,
of which Zimbabwe is the noblest, which display great imagination
and immense energy, and have bequeathed to us no clue as to who
they were or whither they went.

In view of all these dead ends, may I suggest that this colony
came, with their material and equipment, by aerial transport and
took away their dead in the same manner? May I be pardoned if
I underwrite this aerial transport with a form of true space flight
carried on by “little people.” If you reject this, can you explain
how else?

It is certain that this gigantic ruin was not erected by the

local natives who had no money and no use for gold. And how did
the Dutch map-maker of before 1763 know of it? What closed
group obtained and used knowledge of inner Africa a hundred
years before Livingston?

Why was this area unknown, yet mapped? And how was it
mapped? How are we to explain that the map of 1763 located the
Pygmies of West Africa, and yet these Pygmies are said to have
been discovered less than one hundred years ago! If Livingston
did, in truth, discover the Victoria Falls, why are these falls noted
on a Dutch map of 1763. Was Churchward right in saying a secret
group of esoterics have had knowledge not available to you and
me? A very early use of aerial transport would explain many
things.

It is about 250 roadless miles from Zimbabwe to the coast.
But the gold must have been exported, for it was cast into ingots
on the site. How was the gold brought to the coast or to its
destination? How were workers, building stone and supplies
brought in if not by air?

What caused the sudden departure from Zimbabwe? From
Baalbek? From Easter Island? Only two explanations are possible:
World-wide cataclysm, or destruction of the common home-base
of all those colonies. A minor catacylsm could account for the
latter, such as took place in the Caribbean-Central America area
with the impact of great meteors or comets. But, if that home-
base were not on this planet?

If the base for these many colonies of “little people” was in
space, then each had its own lines of communication. A world¬
wide catastrophe would have precipitated evacution from all
points. Otherwise, where did all of these isolated colonies go to
so suddenly that they dropped their tools and personal effects in
their very tracks?

How many times am I to be reminded of some verses in the
Gospel of Saint Mark:

14. But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation . . . stand¬
ing where it ought not . . . then let them that be in Judea flee to the
mountains.

15. And let him that is on the housetop not go down into the house,
neither enter therein, to take anything out of the house.

206 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 207

16. And let him that is in the field not turn back again for to take
up his garment.

26. And then shall they see the Son of Man coming in the clouds
with great power and glory.

27. And then shall he send his angels, and shall gather together
his elect from the four winds, from the uttermost parts of the earth,
to the uttermost part of Heaven.

Does the fact of Zimbabwe being on a Dutch map of 1763
imply that the ruins were then being worked? Maybe, but we
doubt it. The literature of that time could not have omitted dis¬
cussion of one of the world’s greatest sources of gold, if it had
been worked then.

The stonework of Zimbabwe is skillfully executed. The blocks
are well cut and joined without mortar. The walls vary in height
from twelve to thirty-five feet. They are fifteen feet thick at the
base, nine feet at the top. There were originally large stone
monoliths on top. The towers are of phallic significance. The sur¬
rounding outcrops of rock show no sign of quarrying. The whole
complex was built on a hill about 350 feet high, just as at
Sacsahuaman.

In the many mine workings in the neighborhood, almost in¬
variably the passages are too small for men other than Pygmies.
They were made by and for little people . . . and the mines, like
the ruins, were abandoned in a hurry. Artifacts remain, but no
human remains. How did those people get out without leaving
their dead?

Phoenician coins and artifacts show conical towers, phallic
designs, etc., resembling those of Zimbabwe. These have been
interpreted to link Phoenicia to Zimbabwe. We grant the pos¬
sibility; but similar coins have been dug up in North America.
Some of the Zimbabwe phallic models bear the lotus design, a
prime Oriental motif. Moreover, according to Churchward, the
lotus was a major symbol of the ancient races which preceded the
Asiatic races (except the Pygmies, which he did not mention).
The lotus is certainly not a pattern native to Africa.

But antiquity of puzzling vastness constantly haunts us. Con¬
sider the gold thread found in solid rock in England, and the
beautifully worked metallic vessel blasted from rock in New

England. And the coins dug from mound-builder tombs in Ohio,
and those dug from deep underground in Illinois and Virginia.
Well, there was workmanship at Zimbabwe, too. A coil of gold
wire, thin and well-made, was found there. Gold may be pre¬
served for thousands of years where iron would disintegrate. The
Bantu make coils, but nobody has ever been known in all Africa
who could make wire.

Zimababwe? It has almost all of the elements of mystery com¬
mon to the many sites around the world which were abandoned
precipitously and which do not appear to have undergone long¬
term evolutionary development. If you can explain it on any other
basis than little people and space flight, I will listen to your
hypothesis long and attentively.

♦ The Voice of Little People ♦

As every UFO fan knows, there has been a brown-out of UFO
or flying saucer news for several years. Only a few publications
have kept faith with those who know that UFO are a reality.
Some general magazines have printed sporadic articles on flying
saucers, but in recent months these have been largely a re-hash
of widely known incidents; opinionated and unverifiable exposi¬
tions based on erroneous scientific concepts; or, worse, damaging
hoaxes.

Miss Dorothy Kilgallen’s International News Service report
from London in May, 1955, was the first UFO report given com¬
plete national distribution in several years, though there has been
no dearth of UFO activity. Miss Kilgallen’s report was featured
in many important papers. After hearing it via radio, this author
saw it first in the Miami Herald. Subsequently clippings were
received from all over the country. We quote the story as run
in the Miami Herald , May 23, 1955:

I can report on a story which is positively spooky. British scientists
and airmen, after examining the wreckage of a mysterious flying ship,
are convinced that these strange aerial objects are not optical illusions

208 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 209

or Soviet inventions but originate on another planet. The source of my
information is a British official of cabinet rank who prefers to remain
unidentified. “We believe, on the basis of our inquiries thus far, that
the saucers were staffed by small men—probably under four feet tall,”
my informant told me. “It’s frightening, but there is no denying the
flying saucers come from another planet.” This official quoted scientists
as saying that a flying ship of this type could not possibly have been
constructed on earth. The British government, I learned, is withholding
an official report on the flying saucer examination at this time, possibly
because it does not wish to frighten the public. In the United States,
all kinds of explanations have been advanced for often-sighted flying
saucers. But no responsible official in the United States Air Force has
yet maintained the mysterious flying ships had actually vaulted from
outer space.

We take one minor exception to the statements as reported:
It is jumping to conclusions to say the strange ship came from
another planet. To make another planet the only alternative to
terrestrial origin is so oversimplify, and to disregard masses of
evidence. Such assumptions indicate that our conceptions are too
narrow as regards life and intelligence. The existence of life in
surrounding space is more acceptable to reason than assumptions
that the great number of observed UFO must, of necessity, come
from another planet.

As for the “little men,” at least they are not new to earth.
We have had “little people” for millennia—for eons, and nobody
has set forth any logical earth origin, though it may be possible,
eventually, to find a niche for them in the accepted chain of
evolution.

There are “little people” in African and New Guinea jungles
today. They have been written about, photographed, measured
and studied. But nobody knows their origin or ancestry. They are,
perhaps, one of the “erratics” of ethnology. Were these people,
these isolated tribes, “planted” in the tropical African jungle from
UFO thousands of years ago? Did UFO land, or crash, and estab¬
lish racial germs or colonies? At Zimbabwe? For there are evi¬
dences of Pygmy races in many other parts of the world.

“Common denominators” help us to organize knowledge which
is in chaos. In the present chaos of UFO lore, can the concept of
“little people” serve as a common denominator? Let’s glance at
the encyclopedias.

In the International Encyclopedia (1930 Edition, volume XIX,
page 396), Kollman says that the primitive ancestors of mankind
were Pygmies. He cites three principal geographical areas where
Pygmies still live.

A. The wavy-haired, Asiatic Pygmies, the Saki or Senoi, live in the
southern part of the Malay Peninsula; the Toala in the Celebes; and the
Vedda and some jungle tribes in the Deccan (India). They are con¬
sidered survivals of a pre-Davridian race.

B. The woolly-haired Asiatics, Negritos, include the Andaman
Islanders; the Semang in central Malay Peninsula; the Aeta, in the
Philippines and others in New Guinea, etc.

C. The woolly-haired African Pygmies scattered through Equa¬
torial Africa.

Extensive references on Pygmies can be found in:

Pygmy Races of Men, by W. H. Flower, in the Journal of the
Anthropological Institute of London, volume XVIII; Pygmies, by
Frederick Star; Man: Past and Present, by A. H. Keane; The Pygmies,
by Quatrefages (translation from the French).

One of the best brief discussions is in the 11th edition of
the Encyclopedia Britannica. It cites a description in the Iliad
of a Pygmy race in the far south (Africa). Pliny mentioned
Pygmies in Asia and Africa, the Catize dwarfs in Thrace, and a
similar race in Caria. Ctesias wrote of Pygmies in the heart of
India . . . “black, ugly, hairy.”

Relics of Pygmy races exist in Sicily and Sardinia, along the
highroads between pleistocene Africa and Europe. Dr. Kollman
found neolithic skeletal remains of European Pygmies near
Schaffhausen.

Some anthropologists believe that a dwarf race, inhabiting
ancient Europe, gave rise to the legends of elves, goblins, gnomes,
etc. Were the fabulous Piets in this group?

Some scientists hold that a now-submerged Indo-African con¬
tinent was the original home of primitive man. (Churchward’s lost
continent of Mu.) The Britannica also postulates that the Miocene
ancestors of the Pygmies may have reached Java from this sinking
continent. This fits into our own postulates of the vast antiquity,
possibly reaching back millions of years, of intelligent mankind
on earth.

210 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 211

Do you recall the accounts of low types of animal life falling
from the sky? And our speculations that UFO crews may grow
larval, insect, or reptilian life in their craft for food? Well, it is
established that the Pygmies often eat larvae, ants, grubs, etc.

Among many points of distinction, The Andaman Island
Pygmies believe in a god, Puluga, who lives in a stone house in the
sky; and Malay Pygmies have a language which has no root
similarity to any known tongue.

Then, there is the little hand-worked meteorite from the terti¬
ary coalbeds, and the small worked stone from Tarbes, France,
reported so graphically by Charles Fort. Such wrought objects
extracted from coalbeds or rock quarries or dropped from space
are small and delicate, as though made btj little people.

We have inferred an ancient race on earth, with enough
intelligence to have developed true, wingless flight; and that
they either moved into space or were deposited on earth by UFO
from space; and that they may have been “little people.”

Pygmies.

Dorothy Kilgallen’s news feature from England was but the
climax of a long series of reports.

Have we, then, a common denominator: PygmiesP

Maybe yes, maybe no . . . but, harking back to the accounts
of things which fall from the sky, we see significance in an inci¬
dent communicated to the UFO Reporter recently by Miss Mil¬
dred E. Danforth. She suggests checking it in New York since she
cannot vouch for it personally. During construction work on the
Cathedral of Saint John the Divine, workmen left a high scaffold-
ing in place over a weekend. When they returned, they found
lying on the scaffolding the body of a little man with one eye in
the middle of his forehead. A New York Times reporter is said to
have written it up, but his story was “killed” to avoid the charge
of sensationalism. Army authorities were said to have removed
the body. Do little people then fall from the sky occasionally, as
well as frogs, snakes, periwinkles, fish, etc.?

The following generalizations about the little people have
been formed by scientists:

1. The Pygmies cannot be considered a degenerate form of
any known race of mankind.

2. They are of a very ancient human stock.

3. It is not yet fully established that the Pygmies are the
oldest type, or prototype, of tire human race.

4. There appear to be several variant races of Pygmies, but
it is not clear if all came from the same terrestrial stock.

5. The question of relationship, or affinity, between the Asiatic
Pygmies is especially puzzling.

6. The Andaman Islanders are considered an entirely unmixed
breed, but all tribes have very ancient racial components carried
through many thousands of years of development.

7. Apart from some few pronounced racial traits such as frizzy
hair and color of skin and, of course, stature, there are vague
anthropological affinities between the Melanesian Pygmies and
others. But the question remains unsettled.

♦ The Voice of Geography ♦

Such students as Kaudem and Nippold, making exhaustive
studies of world-wide Pygmy distribution, have conceded that
this is one of the greatest of all ethnological puzzles.

There are conflicting schools of thought on the matter of the
geographical distribution and origins of the Negro and Pygmy
races. One, for which Logan is spokesman, holds that they orig¬
inated in Africa and slowly penetrated into southeast Asia and
Oceania by way of the sea. Another school from whom Dr. Flower
is spokesman holds that the Pygmies spread eastwards and west¬
wards from southern India. Equally puzzling is how they could
have been distributed into so many isolated communities, scat¬
tered over a wide band, encircling the earth. Where and how
did they originate?

Professor Seely supposes that the African Pygmy races reached
Malaya via a sunken continent (Lemuria) which scientists be¬
lieve connected northeast Africa with India. This supposition is
not in conflict with Churchward’s statement that there are sub¬
merged cities of incalculable antiquity in the shallow waters just

212 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 213

west of the Indian mainland. If such a continent existed, as seems
probable, the migration could as easily have been from east to
west, as Dr. Allen posits, and would fit Quatrefages’ deduction
that central Asia was their origin.

In his book, The Pygmies, Quatrefages says that we cannot
separate the history of the black races, including the Pygmies,
from that of the yellow and white races. He says man originated
in tertiary times in northern Asia and migrated southward, east¬
ward, and westward, and developed basic racial variations. The
central highlands of Asia, he points out, still have three of the
basic races. The Pygmies were the first to arrive in the Eastern
Archipelago and in the Bay of Bengal. New data, however, make
parts of his theory questionable.

Note that throughout all the published discussions on the
Pygmy races, certain peculiar conditions are reiterated and em¬
phasized. One is the large number of isolated Pygmy tribes. We
have Pygmy tribes in New Guinea, far to the east in the South
Pacific; a distinctive Pygmy race in the Andaman Islands far to
the west in the Bay of Bengal; and equally distinctive Pygmy
tribes scattered through the Philippine archipelago. There are
also variant branches of Pygmy races in southwest Asia. Note
also that none of these scattered groups are large. Seldom did
any one group obtain more than a few thousand individuals, even
before contact with civilization reduced their numbers.

Also note that the same conditions obtain in Africa; namely,
that they occur in isolated tribes, though they have certain basic
characteristics in common, but exhibiting intra-tribal individuality
from long isolation.

Flower set the southern limit of the Oriental Pygmy races at
the Sunda Strait and the northern limit at Taiwan (Formosa)
with traces in Japan. The eastward limit is New Guinea; the west¬
ward, the Andaman Islands and probably India.

Some experts believe that the Pygmies once inhabited a vast
area of Southeast Asia, and that all these groups are interrelated.
Today only scattered remnants survive. This also seems to apply
to the African tribes.

Attempts have been made to show that the Pygmies in the

Philippine Islands, the Andaman Islands and New Guinea, all
reached these places by sea. This has been seriously challenged
by Kaudern, who doubts that the Pygmies ever had boats. Accord¬
ing to other hypotheses, the Pygmies reached these islands from
the Asian mainland by way of land bridges. This would give
them great geological antiquity. There is a difference of opinion
among scientists about the submergence of such land bridges,
whether they occurred before or after the advent of man.

Most challenging, perhaps, of the puzzles relating to this in¬
comprehensible human group is the origin of the Philippine
Pygmies. Geologists do not postulate land bridges from the Asian
continent within any time during which mankind could conceiv¬
ably have existed. And, if the Philippine Pygmies arrived via
bridge from Sumatra and Borneo, why are there no traces of
Pygmies in these two great islands?

Walter Kaudern considers the riddle of the origin of the
Philippine Pygmies insoluble. By this extreme statement we sup¬
pose he means insoluble by conventional science. He is convinced
that, throughout all their millions of years of history, the Pygmies
lacked the intelligence to create any kind of seagoing craft, and
that land bridges must have existed for the convenience of the
little men. Yet he concedes that no great tectonic or volcanic
activity took place there, in or since quaternary times.

The only other condition which could have produced land
bridges was glaciation prolonged enough to lower the sea level
throughout the world by transferring much of its water to exten¬
sive ice caps.

About three hundred feet of fall in sea-level would have
provided a land bridge from the Malay mainland to the Andaman
Islands, which have Pygmy inhabitants. This assumes that the
contours of the ocean have not changed appreciably during these
millions of years—a risky assumption.

But it would have required a drop from three to nine thousand
meters in the water level to expose a land bridge from the Asiatic
mainland to the Philippine Islands. No change of such a nature
is conceivable. It would presuppose an almost incalculable ac¬
cumulation of ice at the poles. According to Kaudern, the greatest

214 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 215

conjectured lowering of sea-level through glaciation is approxi¬
mately nine hundred feet, which is not enough to link the Philip¬
pines with the Malay peninsula.

Consequently, if the Pygmies did migrate by land from the
Asiatic mainland to the Philippines they must have done so in
slow stages, during quaternary times, and via very circuitous
routes, first from the mainland westward to mountainous country
the peaks of which, as the slopes were submerged by melting
polar ice, became the Andamans. From there the little folk would
have had to move tortuously southward, then southeast for hun¬
dreds of miles, to reach Sumatra. Thence, to reach New Guinea
they would have gone eastward, over mountainous terrain for
3,000 miles. They might have branched off from Sumatra to
Bornea and thence to the Philippines, via, perhaps, the Celebes,
a distance of 2,000 miles or so. Sumatra and Borneo are at the
center of this area. Why are there no Pygmies or Pygmy remains
there?

A trek to south Africa would have been more than twice as
far. Again we are faced with choice between high improbabilities,
and if more logical means of global migration can be found, they
deserve consideration.

Kaudern finally concluded that there must have been such
variations in sea-level, since no other means of exposing land
bridges can be admitted in the light of present geological knowl¬
edge. But it is not a satisfactory explanation.

The weakness in Kaudern’s reasoning lies in his assumption
that the Pygmies never reached cultural levels high enough to
devise water transportation. In our own thinking the Pygmies
may have developed a high civilization in ancient times, and
attained an intellectual level almost infinitely beyond anything
contemplated by Kaudern or other ethnologists.

It will be helpful to the reader to consult a large-scale map of
the Indian ocean, and the Indonesian area southeast of Asia. It
will at once be apparent that any land migration of Pygmies from
the Andaman Islands to the Philippines must have proceeded over
the huge islands of Sumatra and Borneo, or by even longer routes.

It will be seen from the map that these isolated Pygmy settle¬
ments are on the edges of the Malaya-Indonesia complex. Since

we do not find Pygmies in the center of the area, hypotheses of
means of distribution based on submerged land bridges are ques¬
tionable. Even Kaudern and Haddon have admitted the tenuous
nature of their own speculations. But if Pygmies did not migrate
via land bridges or by sea, then how?

Must we not seek another method of distribution?

In The Case for the UFO, when no “natural” explanations
could be found for proven phenomena, and where will or intel¬
ligence seemed evident, we did the logical thing and looked for
them in other than “natural” manifestations. Perhaps this is our
“way out” too from the maze of Pygmy scattering and origin.
Maybe there is another explanation?

We have long postulated a race of superior mental develop¬
ment in very ancient pre-flood times. We found much to indicate
that possibility. With only a slight mental adjustment, we can
picture Pygmies as that prehistoric race which developed space
flight in those eons between the Tertiary age and the flood.
If they were operating space craft around the earth; or if they
came to earth from space, it would follow that these isolated tribes
might be survivors or colonists from space craft which either
crashed or landed. Prolonged isolation may have produced their
well-known racial fear of “strangers.”

Also if space navigation was devised by early Pygmy cultures
many thousands of years ago, some of these space craft may have
been operating away from the earth when the flood wiped out most
of their kin. Thus, while these “sons of mankind” were “away on
a far journey” mankind may have escaped “by the skin of his
teeth.”

♦ The Voices of Chronology and Antiquity ♦

The dilemma of official science on this subject is evidence of
what is stressed in this volume: that the present framework of
science is inadequate to encompass the reality of the world in
which we five.

It is doubtless praiseworthy of science that it eternally

216 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 217

strives to secure each foothold before proceeding to the next. But
thereby it tends to limit itself to the quantitative at the expense
of the qualitative. Science is continually being frustrated through
its failure to recognize an adequate time-scale for human intel¬
lectuality and to acknowledge the scope of archaic mental
activity.

Let us review some chronological considerations as given in
geology, bearing on the Pygmy question, and the relationships
of the Pygmies to “little people” and the UFO.

AGE OF SOME OF THE MORE RECENT GEOLOGICAL PERIODS

Geological Eras

Millions of Years

(Recent

Duration
of Era

Time Since
Beginning of Era

Quaternary <

1

(Pleistocene

1.7

1.7

' Pleiocene

13

15

Miocene

18

33

Tertiary

Oligoscene

9

42

„ Eocene-Paleocene

11

53

One of the big questions about Pygmies, ranking with the
problems of their distribution and origin, is: “How long have
Pygmies been here on earth?”

According to ethnologists the Pygmy man of the Miocene
times, more than thirty million years ago, was a full-fledged
human being—not a missing link. Thirty million years ago is
15,000 times as long as the Christian era, and 5,000 times as long
as our recorded history.

Did the Pygmies (or any other race) in that vast stretch of
time develop a high order of civilization? Certainly they were
firmly established as a race for as long as any other, and perhaps
a good deal longer. If our civilization has developed to its present
towering peak in a few thousand years, others could have done
so (and disappeared) many times over. We need only reflect
upon these “races” and “civilizations” that have come and gone
within recorded history.

Fossil remains are important in the establishment of chronolog¬
ical and other scientific data. But fossil remains of Pygmies are
surprisingly scarce. Therefore, paleontology, archaeology and
anthropology have failed to throw much light on the age or
origin, of the Pygmy people, or on any archaic Pygmy civilization
above Stone Age level. Yet there are positive hints from combined
archaeological-geological sources. With Kaudern, we can turn
for a moment to zoogeography (the world distribution and move¬
ment of animal life) for clues to the antiquity and antecedents
of Pygmy stock.

Certain cultures are often said to have appeared as going
concerns complete with writing, mathematics and various ameni¬
ties as far back as we trace them. They do not show the develop¬
mental stages normally leading out of Stone Age existence. Some
archaeologists dispute this, but there remian the puzzles of Egypt,
the Orient, and South America.

However, few scientists have been so brash as to postulate
that an entire race appeared suddenly and without normal evolu¬
tionary development. We will not be that brash, either. We simply
say that no matter how far back one goes—perhaps thirty million
years to the Miocene—there were Pygmies. Not midgets, but
fully developed human beings, whom science has not been able
to connect with other races.

It might be observed in passing that that perennial best-seller,
the Bible, mentions an abrupt creation (or arrival ) of fully devel¬
oped man.

In its fauna, Indonesia is, strangely enough, more closely re¬
lated to Africa than to India. Some zoologists refer the Pygmy
to the Pleiocene, postulating their spread from the Orient to
Africa, along with Oriental fauna. This assumes some kind of land
connection either very deviously by way of India, Asia Minor and
Arabia; or by way of a now sunken land mass which may have
stretched from Northeast Africa to Oceania. This closely ap¬
proaches Churchward’s concept of a now submerged continent of
Mu, though differing somewhat in location, and is plausible in
the light of geological, botanical and zoological data.

The Australian Bushmen have been rated the most primitive

218 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 219

people on earth, and they share certain characteristics with the
Pygmies, although they are not quite so small in stature.

Flower considers the Bushmen of South Africa the earliest
race of which it is possible for us to have knowledge. This could
mean that these ethnological kinfolk of the Pygmies comprise the
oldest living race in direct lineal descent from primitive man. But
from new studies made since Flower’s time, I consider the pre-
Dravidian Pygmies the oldest—older even than the Australian
Bushmen, which makes me wonder why the most primitive races
in existence today seem also to be the oldest pure strains? Why is
orthodox science unable to establish their origin?

I believe, with Kaudern, that the Pygmies were in existence
many thousands of years before the periods of glaciation. Condi¬
tions must have favored the rise of archaic civilizations during the
interglacial eras and in the previous millions of years during
which there were certainly Pygmies . . . who may well have been
the dominant species on earth.

This is more or less in line with Churchward’s thesis that
ancient civilizations spread westward from a now submerged
continent which he called Mu. If we accept his hypothesis, and
also admit that such a civilization was made up, at least in part,
of Pygmies who are known to have been an established race at
that time, we may consider that world-wide cataclysms, one of
which was the “Flood,” may well have destroyed all of civilization
except a few remnants scattered here and there over far-flung,
and somewhat inaccesible, areas.

This might indicate that we have been mistaking as origins
what were actually surviving vestiges of a pre-Flood civilization
of vast extent. In other words, the first development from Stone
Age conditions took place prior to that destruction, and what we
are seeing is the re-emergence of a previously developed race.

It seems evident that these isolated Pygmy tribes occupy sites
which were once the mountain tops or plateaus of now submerged
areas. The survivals may then be from the backward, perhaps
even degenerate, portions of the early races making up the “first
wave of civilization.” The archaic “hill-billies” far from the sea¬
board centers of trade and culture would hardly have been the
most advanced elements of the race.

Bible students may recall that Christ left instructions for
mankind to make a dash for the mountains at the first shock of
disaster. Does this mean that a future cataclysm will repeat the
one which almost annihilated the world’s earlier civilizations?

Some of our dilemmas might be resolved merely by accepting
a new timetable for civilization, allowing for advanced intellectual
achievements before the Flood. After all, Noah must have in¬
herited some technical knowledge to have built an ark (large as a
modem tanker) capable of riding out the deluge. Even Church¬
ward may not have been sufficiently liberal in his chronological
scale. Perhaps he should have placed the mother civilization of
Mu in the Pleiocene or Miocene; possibly even antedating the
tertiary coalbeds in which was found the hand-worked bit of
meteoric steel.

There seems little doubt that the Pygmy people were a part
of the terrestrial scene in the Pleiocene. If they were also active
in the Miocene, this race is more than 30,000,000 years old and
was fully developed as human beings at that time. Who, then, are
we to deny that they could have developed even one civilization
in all that time—one capable of flight of a type simpler than our
heavier-than-air flight? Of space flight?

<#> The Voice of Psychology ♦

There is one peculiarity of Pygmy tribes which is of considerable
significance to our UFO problem. Not only do Pygmy groups
always appear isolated, but all have an antipathy to intercourse
with other races.

The mind of the Pygmy seems to be almost pathologically
conditioned to isolation. He is universally resentful of foreign
intrusion. Some kind of racial lesson seems to have been so etched
into his brain as to make it a racially inherent characteristic. The
mind of the Pygmy is the mind of a prisoner kept too long in
solitary confinement.

Now, where was the Pygmy held captive, or where did he
develop this xenophobia, or fear of outsiders—this introversion?

220 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 221

Would it be—could it be—that centuries of confined living in the
cells of space ships (or on the moon, in air-tight structures) would
produce these characteristics? Leave him with the instinctive feel¬
ing that he is a stranger on earth?

♦ The Voice of Genealogy ♦

Chronology and origins are related to the evolutionary continuity
of Pygmies with other mammalia; and to whether the Pygmy race
appeared abruptly, as a going concern, no matter how far back¬
ward we may look. Scientists have told us that the Pygmy of the
Miocene was already a distinct human type.

I have been referring to “little people” and “Pygmies” rather
indiscriminately. These terms have been used deliberately. A
Pygmy is a person well-proportioned and normal in every respect
except his small stature. A dwarf or midget, on the other hand,
is a stunted and often deformed individual.

From time to time, throughout the reporting of little people
either in UFO sightings or in ancient history, we encounter the
statement that a specimen or race had normal features and bodily
proportions. Science establishes that Miocene Pygmies were fully
developed, normal human beings of small stature. Thus we are
identifying a race, and not freaks.

There seems to be a discontinuity in the evolutionary stream
of the Pygmies’ beginnings; at the junction or point of contact
with origins of other human strains. Areas of discontinuity sug¬
gest intelligence and choice. We seem to be drawing ever nearer
to recognizing the distinction between the statistical realm of
Godhead and Divine Law, and those environmental elements
controllable by the intelligence of man, man-like beings, or even
uncamate intelligences operating below the omnipotent level of
Godhead.

In his work The Pygmies, Quatrefages states: “ Modern science
is sometimes misled by its own rigidity ”—an understatement
worthy of John Bull himself. That was said in the nineteenth

century, but the rigidity has not relaxed very much, so that one
fears this may be one of those rare cases in which rigor mortis
sets in before the death spasms. It has caused misreadings of
traditions and legends, in which nuggets of truth are encrusted.
Unbigoted researchers often pry out these nuggets and add them
to the treasure trove of human knowledge, and they are nowhere
more valuable than in the study of racial origins.

All variants of the Pygmy races seem to have some basic
genetic inter-relationship, but no specific, direct or tangible
physical connections have been established by the most painstak¬
ing students. It almost seems that there has been a relationship in
time, but not in geographical space nor physical contact. Not only
does each community of Pygmies differ greatly from neighboring
non-Pygmy races, but authors disagree as to which other races are
least distinctly related to the Pygmies—not caring to concede that
other races may be closely related. If geographical distribution is
the greatest puzzle of Pygmydom, then certainly the Pygmy
genetic relationships and antecedents are a puzzle second only to
the problems of their distribution.

Flower believed at one time that the Andaman Island Pygmies
might be the parent Pygmy race. At another time he ascribed the
descent of the entire Oriental group of Pygmy tribes to an early
pre-Dravidian (Indian) race. The two ideas are not entirely
incompatible, and fit in with Quatrefages’ postulate that all human
races sprang from a common source somewhere in mid-Asia.

The word “Dravidian” is generally applied to the races of the
subcontinent of India. They are universally conceded to be of great
antiquity, and Churchward supposed that they had arrived from
a motherland to the east, now submerged, which he called Mu,
some hundreds of thousands of years ago. Therefore, if the
Pygmies are pre-Dravidian, they are of greater antiquity than
any other known strain of Homo sapiens. Quatrefages, one of the
best authorities, indicated that the Pygmies are definitely not a
“missing link,” but have been fully established human entities in
their own right since the earliest times to which they can be
traced. He believed that fully developed Tertiary man had all
the essential human characteristics and . . . again . . . we search

222 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 223

for “beginnings/’ As we have seen this may go back as far as the
Miocene or as much as 30,000,000 years, enough for the establish¬
ment of any number of civilizations before ours, in which space¬
flying may have been discovered.

Obvious similarities between the Asian and African Pygmies,
but none with any other race! Each Pygmy group differs from
surrounding non-Pygmy groups, is an ethnological island—and,
considering their nomadic habits, a floating island!

If the Pygmies and other races do come from common stock,
their divergence occurred in the inscrutable past; or the site of this
common stock was one from which all Pygmy “colonies could
have been established independently of terrestrial surface move¬
ment.”

Have you ever looked at a gorilla, a chimpanzee and an orang¬
outang side by side? Under their fur, the skin colors are yellow,
black, and white. Correlate this with the geographical areas in
which they are found, and you begin a most intriguing train of
speculation.

According to Flower and other authorities, the Negrillos of
Africa predate the Negroes of the same area, just as the Negritos
of the Orient predate the other Asiatic and Melanesian types. For
millions of years, it seems, the Pygmies have been separate from
all other humanoid types. Their precedence seems to be estab¬
lished in spite of the lack of any genetic or evolutionary links
with other races. Yet anthropological dogmatists insist that no
race could maintain its original state over so long a period.

Was there, then, no other race with which the Pygmies could
blend during those millions of years? But what if their parent
strain lives in space? Would this dissolve some paradoxes?

We recognize racial similarities between the Pygmies of Africa
and the Orient, but we find no direct links between these two
major streams, nor can we envision any zoogeographical mechan¬
ics by which one could have arisen from the other. Both P.
W. Schmidt and Walter Kaudem have shown that, while a com¬
mon origin of the African and Asian branches cannot be estab¬
lished, the features they share in common, including small stature,
short head, and frizzy hair, cannot be denied. Therefore, if they
are related, their common ancestors belong to almost unaccept¬

ably remote geologic times— unless some new and unprecedented
method of distribution is envisioned.

Since genetic links between the Pygmies and their adjacent
neighbors are absent, just where do we stand with regard to the
relationship of the Pygmies with the remainder of mankind? Or
with the entire environment of the earth?

To date, science has been forced to admit its failure to
establish: (1) the genetic origin of the Pygmy race; (2) the geo¬
graphical origin; (3) the route and mechanism of their distri¬
bution through Asia, Melanesia and Africa, and (4) a reason for
the lack of affinity between the Pygmy and other races by whom,
for thousands of years, they have been surrounded.

Again there is a haunting sense that these relationships have,
somehow, jumped geographical, geological and genetic gaps.
There is no trace of intermediate evolutional stages. It is exactly
as though there were a “time-fault” or discontinuity in the human-
terrestrial adventure. But space travel, or permanent habitation
in space, could rationalize all this. A common origin in space
could explain the unconnected diversity of the Pygmies, the
geographical isolation of their little groups, and other puzzles.

In all: a prize quandary for ethnology.

♦ The Voice of the Sphinx and the Pyramids ♦

The team of astronomy-archaeology has something to add to the
subject of Pygmies-science-antiquity-gravitation. For one thing,
the passages in the Great Pyramid are adapted only to the “little
people.”

The passage to the so-called Queen’s chamber is approximately
46M inches high. The height of the passage to the “King’s cham¬
ber,” at the top of the Grand Gallery, is approximately 43 inches.
The vertical height of the main passage is about four feet four
inches, while the height perpendicular to the floor is about 47
inches—just under four feet.

It is not for me to say that this vast pyramid was built by a
Pygmy race. Nonetheless, it is almost unthinkable that a race,

224 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 225

intelligent enough to construct such an edifice, manifesting astro¬
nomical data of the most profound and complex nature, would
make the passages too low for convenient use.

In The Great Pyramid , D. Davidson, a British engineer, out¬
standing analyst of pyramid data, maintains that a highly devel¬
oped civilization existed in times which are generally and vaguely
referred to as “pre-historic.” He indicated that among other
reasonable inferences is the probability that this former civiliza¬
tion came to a catastrophic end and very little of its culture sur¬
vived except in the form of tradition. This parallels my own
conclusions, but omits consideration of many great works of stone
which have survived the cataclysm, but which may not have been
familiar to Davidson.

The men who founded the modern “wave” of civilization built
on and from the lore carried over from a former culture. Huge,
archaic structures, particularly in Egypt, Peru, Yucatan and Tibet,
indicate a high development at the earliest known stages of their
construction, albeit imperfectly understood by us. As many writers
have pointed out, these isolated, yet similar, reviving remnants of
past civilization appeared almost ready-made, which is evidence
of highly cultured predecessors.

Tradition, from all sources, declares the former civilization
was destroyed by cataclysm. In Egypt it was called “the destruc¬
tion of mankind”: in ancient Mexico, Peru and other places, “the
destruction of the world,” and in the ancient Near East, China,
Egypt and elsewhere, the “deluge” or the “Flood.” Many appear
to be versions of the deluge narrative in the Bible.

I concur in Davidson’s belief that the Pyramid was built for
the perpetuation of scientific knowledge transmitted from the
ancients. But I dissent from his interpretation of mathematics and
metrology of the Pyramid in Christian apocalyptic terms, electing
Britain as the “chosen” nation.

The Pyramid is a solid, concise, geometrical expression of
natural laws known to a former civilization. Unquestionably it
refers to both linear measurements and the motions of the solar
system. Motion implies or infers time—and gravitation. It will
suffice here to say that the geometry of the great Pyramid depicts,

among other things, the dimensions of the earth’s orbit, its eccen¬
tricity, period of rotation, procession of the equinoxes and other
astronomical concepts involving space, time and gravitation.

In the diagram, the circumference ABCDA, stated in pyramid
or “primitive inches” is 36,524.2465 and the length of the solar
year is 365.2425 days. The circumference Ae 1 e 2 Bf 1 f 2 Cg 1 g 2 DH 1 h.,A
is 36,525.64715 P", and the length of the sidereal year is 365.25647
days. The circumference AmBnCoDpAis 36,525.9973 P" and
the length of the anomalistic year is 365.2596 days.

The sidereal year is the time required by the earth to make
one complete revolution of 360° around the sun, as measured
from the absolute positions of the stars. The solar year is the time

o c

226 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

required for the earth to make a revolution around the sun from
vernal equinox to vernal equinox. The earth’s orbit is also revolv¬
ing slowly and the anomalistic year is the time required for the
earth to go from perihelion, the point in its orbit where it is closest
to the sun, back to perihelion.

The sum of the diagonals AC and AB in P" is 25,826.5 and the
period of the procession of the equinoxes is 25,826+ years. It is
this period of approximately 26,000 years which I believe con¬
stitutes the error in Davidson’s calculations. I believe the Pyramid
was built 26,000 or 52,000 years earlier than has previously been
admitted. It may have been 78,000 or 104,000 years ago or longer.

Many other astronomical quantities are built to scale in the
Pyramid, with the primitive inch as unit measure (1/500,000,000th
of the arc from equator to pole). One of these is the eccentricity of
orbit (deviation from a true circle) also defined by the same cir¬
cumferential base lines used for laying out the length of the
various years. Some of these quantities take thousands of years of
close instrumental observation for accurate determination.

The Pygmies may not have had such a highly developed
science. However, somebody did, but hardly the Egyptians of
3,000 b.c.

Davidson thought that the state of scientific astronomy
reached by the antecedent culture was equal to, or superior to
ours. The data built into the Pyramid indicate an advanced knowl¬
edge of gravitation and the mathematics of planetary orbits. Obvi¬
ously some underlying natural law of beautiful simplicity, encom¬
passing gravitation, is represented in the pyramidal form. Only
Einstein in our civilization has approached it and even he did not
entirely achieve it. Clearly the Great Pyramid was constructed to
perpetuate that astronomical and mathematical knowledge.

Davidson concluded that the builders were survivors of the
cataclysm. They must still have possessed the libraries or other
stored data. Such a structure as the Pyramid could not have been
built from orally transmitted knowledge. There is no indication
that the Egyptians after 5,000 b.c. had the knowledge or the
ability. The faulty nature of some of their chronology is evidence
that in the centuries immediately preceding the Christian era

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 227

they lacked the knowledge to build or even understand the Great
Pyramid.

Davidson considered it proven that the former civilization
was “more highly skilled in the sciences of gravitational astron¬
omy, and therefore in the mathematical basis of gravitation, than
modem civilization.” It has taken man thousands of years to redis¬
cover what he had more precisely known by a surer and simpler
method than ours in an earlier phase.

This is in keeping with my repeated proposals that the first
wave of civilization had stumbled onto or discovered some phys¬
ical laws more basic than any which we know today, particularly
in relation to gravitation; which brings up again the question of
whether this knowledge originated here or in space.

Using complex astronomical theory, Davidson calculated that
the entrance passageway was oriented for observation of the
star Alpha Draconis when it was the pole star in either the year
2144 b.c., or the year 3434 b.c., deducing from this that the
Pyramid was built at one or the other of those two epochs. It is
remotely possible that he is correct, but then it is hard to explain
why the Pyramid seems to have been a traditional landmark in
Egypt in earlier periods. By Davidson’s own admission, the knowl¬
edge necessary for such a constmction must have come from a
previous civilization wiped out thousands of years before. Such
knowledge could not possibly have been transmitted by tradition
over such a period.

The same reasoning as that used by Davidson would permit
the Pyramid passageways to have served the same purpose
approximately 26,000 years (or any multiple of this period) earlier
than his given two dates. This is indirectly conceded by Davidson
when he observed that “no other date for 30,000 years in the
past, or 30,000 years in the future, would fit all the observed
facts.”

My contention is that the construction of the Pyramid took
place 30,000 or 60,000 years ago. I feel that Davidson misinter¬
preted certain elements of a chronological scale in deference to the
dogmatic insistence of science and theology that no major civiliza¬
tion existed before 7,000 or 8,000 years ago.

228 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 229

The levitation of heavy stone megaliths for structures such as
Sacsahuaman, Easter Island, Baalbek, Tiahuanaco, etc. has been
discussed elsewhere. Here we need only reaffirm that it is ex¬
plained by the mechanical and gravitational genius associated
with the ancient civilization we now credit with the acumen to
have incorporated an entire astronomical-gravitational science
into the Great Pyramid of Gizeh.

Furthermore the oldest known authentic record of the visita¬
tion of a fleet of UFO was in Egypt. (Reproduced on page 180 of
The Case for the UFO).

Certain astronomical data were held by the ancient Chaldeans
and the Chinese, in common with the Egyptians, and we must at
least consider the possibility that it was inherited from a common
source. Churchward believed that such astronomical knowledge
came to India with the Nagas, from Mu, a submerged continent
to the east. From India, he believes, it spread to China, the Middle
East and Egypt. We must also realize that the Maya Indians of
Central America had a calendar system superior even to that of
the Egyptians and the Chinese, and an intimate knowledge of
planetary movements. Churchward believed the Maya to be an
eastern colony of Mu.

♦ The Voice of Philology ♦

According to Flower, the isolated African groups of Pygmies are
experiencing gradual extinction through inbreeding, the hardships
of their nomad life, and the intrusions of other races. Modem
observation confirms this.

Flower described the Andaman Pygmies as moral, even by our
own codes, in spite of a nasty, pugnacious nature. No taint of
cannibalism existed among them. Though some of the literature
presents them as amoral, their sexual relations, intra-family and
intra-tribal obligations, and other ethical restraints have analogues
in our own codes.

Dr. Flower described many tribes as having taken refuge in
the mountains and some as living in natural caves. Other writers

speak of the aversion of some Pygmy tribes to living in confined
places as a sort of claustrophobia, and observe that they will not
live anywhere except in the forests. This is not true of the semi-
Pygmy bushmen of South Africa, who live in natural caves; and
of some Oriental Pygmies. Is there a racial memory which in¬
hibits some races from living in caves? I think of the smashed
tunnels of the Andes.

The French authority on the Pygmies, Quatrefages, believed
that they were basically intelligent but that their minds are asleep.
Up to the ages of twelve to fourteen, Pygmy children have I.Q.’s
approximately equal to those of our children. And other ethnolo¬
gists have recorded that the few Pygmies trained in white schools
have shown considerable ability and capacity to learn.

The language spoken by the Andaman Island Pygmies prob¬
ably preceded all those spoken in neighboring Malaya, Thailand
and perhaps even India. This is in line with ethnological specula¬
tions that the South Asian Pygmies occupied India and Southeast
Asia before the “pre-Dra vidian” races.

The Andaman Pygmy has only two cardinal numbers: one and
two. From these he counts up to ten, but no further, by touching
his nose with each of his fingers successively, and adding the
words “this one also.”

Every folk has its own version of the Flood, indicating that
this catastrophe was world-wide and so calamitous that it was
indelibly impressed upon the racial memory.

Legend among some of the Pygmy groups has it that descend¬
ants of the first pair of humans became too numerous for their
original locality and scattered widely, which agrees with the
theories of Quatrefages.

After creating the first human couple, Tomo and Elewadi, the
God Puluga taught them a language, which the Andaman Pygmies
believe was the one still spoken in a district in Middle Andaman
Island. Philological study supplies no reasons for doubting them.

The tradition runs that the second generation after Tomo
became so morally lax that Puluga sent a chastising flood which
covered the whole earth and destroyed almost all living things.
However, two men and two women in a canoe (the ark story in
miniature) escaped to become ancestors of the present islanders.

230 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 231

(How closely this parallels the belief that all present races are but
reviving embers of a glorious past!) Puluga threatened a repeti¬
tion of the penalty if they did not behave, and they live in con¬
stant dread. They are on their good behavior according to a moral
code that may be the oldest in existence.

Some Malay Pygmies have a language which is totally unre¬
lated to any other known terrestrial tongue; yet, they seem to have
a racial memory of the use of writing.

What created and maintained the isolation necessary to
develop and perpetuate such linguistic purity? Theories of migra¬
tion by sea or by land bridges break down before linguistic
homogeneity of such rigor. These tribes had to originate from
some place almost literally “out of this world.” For they could
hardly have done much migrating without picking up a few
“foreign words.”

Moreover, it would seem that they might have arrived from
that source at a comparatively recent time, to account for such
a conspicuous lack of inter-cultural influence.

From where and by what means could this have been accom¬
plished, other than from the profound depths of the earth-moon
binary space? Or from another planet? And via UFO?

# The Voices of Theology and Mythology ♦

The Malay Pygmies, according to explorers who have lived
among them, believe that God exists above them, and created
them. The universality of such beliefs about “heaven” is one of
the phenomena of world-wide religion, and cannot be explained
away as mere coincidence. There must be some common cause
for this world-wide belief, and the most acceptable one is the
postulate of a physical, existent “Heaven” surrounding the earth,
and known to the original parent community.

It is of especial pertinence to our current theme that the
African Pygmies believe their gods to live overhead, beyond the
blue sky. It is one of our most basic religious concepts that our
God and his agent, Christ, together with their angels, dwell above
us, beyond the sky. Of all fundamental religious tenents, this,

which points toward life and intelligence in the space around us,
seems to be the most universal. We can almost say that this is
common knowledge rather than merely common belief.

The book Among Forest Dwarfs of Malaya, by Paul Schebesta,
has some particularly significant reports to make about the
Kenta. According to their tradition, the world in the beginning
was all water. The great god Kaei dwelt above in the firmament
and beside him was the sun. Compare that with the thesis devel¬
oped in The Case for the UFO that the mother bases, or craft,
from which come our smaller UFO, are located in space, almost
directly in line with the sun.

The ethnologist Mann thus summarized the religion of the
Mincopies, who are considered a Pygmy race:

Puluga, their God: (1) resembles fire, but is invisible; (2)
was never bom but is immortal (see Hebrews 7:3, anent Melchi-
sadek); (3) created the world and all good things, both animate
and inanimate. He is believed to dwell in a great stone mansion
in the sky. He eats and drinks. When it rains, he descends to earth
to gather food. During the dry season, he sleeps most of the
time. Puluga prefers certain roots, fruits and seeds for food.
Whatever man has, he got from Puluga. When angered Puluga
comes forth from his house, blows, thunders, and hurls blazing
fagots. So the Mincopies explain their most dreadful tempests.
(Remember controlled organic clouds.)

The Hottentots also have personified the clouds which bear
thunder and lightning as a divine family. Throughout Pygmy
religious beliefs, one finds storms and clouds serving as weapons
for wrathful gods. Puluga uses the storm cloud as his vehicle.

The Mincopies’ belief that Puluga descends to the earth to
gather food when it rains may take on significance for us when
we recall descriptions of apparently purposeful storms. The irate
Puluga, coming forth from his house, blowing, thundering and
hurling blazing fagots, is in line with those clouds that develop
in a calm sky, proceed with intelligent deliberation, spit stones
and debris and pass away.

How significant are the characteristics of Puluga? To resemble
fire, yet be invisible, fits many descriptions of UFO. The stone
mansion in the sky is important in view of our growing conviction

232 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 233

that the very ancient “first wave of civilization” worked with
stone to the almost complete exclusion of metal. It is not impos¬
sible that the UFO in space are made of stone, or stone-like
material. They may even be intelligently manipulated asteroids.

In The Pygmies, Quatrefages makes an allusion of remarkable
significance in connection with reports of little people inhabiting
UFO. The Mincopies’ god Puluga is not alone in his stone celes¬
tial mansion: “He lives with a woman of green color, whom he
created for himself. They have a son and many daughters, black
angels who amuse themselves by throwing fish and crustaceans
into bodies of fresh or salt water to be used for human food.”

Puluga’s green consort, living with him in a stone mansion in
the sky, accords with reports of green “little people” associated
with crashed or landed UFO.

The heavenly concept of the Pygmies is not radically at vari¬
ance with the descriptions of “heaven” in our own Bible; of “our
father’s mansions”; and the general synonymity between “Heaven”
and a religion of intelligent activity surrounding the Earth.

Recall the dumpings of fish, periwinkles, crustaceans and
lower forms of life in general, and you will note some significance
in the black angels’ tossing of fish and crustaceans to earth.
Numberless instances have been reported, occurring in all lands,
and obviously observed by the Pygmies. There is reality in these
reports—and there must be a reason.

Churchward is among the few writers seriously to propose
that our modem civilizations and races are but the slowly and
painfully recovering remnants of the civilizations and peoples
overwhelmed by the “Flood.” This cataclysm served as a sieve in
time through which rivulets of the human race were permitted to
filter. Survivors were in inaccessible areas to which the full tide
could not penetrate.

There is some evidence of lost arts among the Pygmies, who
appear to have weak racial memories. This is of some significance
to the thesis that in a very remote past, there may have been
advanced Pygmy cultures. It is quite as if a racial intellect had
been numbed by some terrific catastrophe.

The Mincopies worship a block of stone, thirty feet in dia¬

meter, which shows irregular markings. Although they have no
writing or other means of recording anything, the Mincopies claim
that this block narrates the history of creation—a remarkable
notion in a race without any form of writing. It suggests racial
memory of writing and its purpose—another minute but signifi¬
cant item of evidence of filtration through the time-curtain
drawn by the universal cataclysm.

Quatrefages thought that the Pygmies, for the most part,
were not pugnacious, as reported by some explorers; and that,
in many ways, they are superior to the surrounding races. This is
an indication of a latent ability which might have manifested
itself directly in a now-extinct civilization.

All in all, the religious beliefs and traditions and myths of the
Mincopies and other branches of Pygmydom can serve as a com¬
mon denominator for our developing concepts of the space life
of the UFO. The Pygmy “heaven” has remarkable similarities to
ours, as it has to the heavens of many scattered and obscure races.
It seems improbable that all could have developed the same ideas
of “heaven overhead” or “beyond the sky” without some physical
basis.

All point to intelligence in space.

•# The Voice of Witchcraft

With respect to “little people,” there is every reason to believe
that they have been here since the earliest advent of man; further,
there is no provable evidence of their connection with a scientifi¬
cally acceptable evolutionary tree. It is my contention that a pre-
cataclysmic civilization of world-wide scope existed, and that
the Pygmies constitute the race most likely to have produced it.
This race had the power of levitation and worked in stone instead
of metals. It did not develop electronic physics, but it under¬
stood basic gravitation better than we do. It used mental powers
temporarily lost to us, but may have survived somewhat among
direct descendents of early Pygmies.

234 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 235

Where traces of this “mental science” have been observed,
they have been called, or attributed to, “magic.” Where the magic
seemed to have application and reality it has been derisively
called “black magic” in contrast to the equally ritualistic but
less substantial mysticism of the orthodox churches.

Witchcraft is indigenous among Pygmy peoples everywhere.
Whatever may be the state of its validity today, or of its practical
application, witchcraft indicates a residue of the science of a
past civilization. Witchcraft, then, becomes an integral part of
the background which we have to study in rationalizing two
of the world’s great interlocking mysteries: UFO and religion.

We have taken a close look at Pygmies in many areas, most
of them in the tropical regions. We have found common character¬
istics, the universality of which could not be explained by known
terrestrial mechanisms of migration or communication. Thus far
we haven’t discussed their traces in areas outside the tropics.
Clues to them may be found in the records of witchcraft in the
isles of Britain. These show that the Pygmies of ancient Europe
and the northlands shared the powers, the racial characteristics
and the scientific attainments of their brothers in milder climes.
The Pygmy empire was world-wide.

Of the several works on witchcraft now in print, none serves
our purpose so well as Witchcraft Today, by G. B. Gardner
(Citadel Press). This book describes how the ‘little people”—
the picts, gnomes, etc.—fell before the Celts and Saxons and
other invaders. While the ‘little people” gained stature through
intermarriage, they lost much of their racial heritage of mental
or physic power. It is from this pictish strain that the early
Britons drew their mystic and occult ability. There is evidence
of a collateral nature that the Druids and the builders of such
structures as Stonehenge were directly connected to the precur¬
sors of ancient Egyptian and Middle Eastern civilizations of
thousands of years ago.

When Christian fanatics drove the rites of the little people
underground, witchcraft became clandestine. Although weakened,
it changed more in quantity than in kind; and it survives today.
The appellation “Witchcraft” is a johnny-come-lately, being only

a thousand or so years old and the associated stigma is a product
of bigoted ignorance of Christian Crusaders.

But we are more concerned with showing the links between
world-wide Pygmydom and the science of a remote past, a science
which understood levitation and, most likely, developed space
ships or inherited them from a parent race from the spatial
reaches of the earth-moon binary system.

Scots, English and especially Irish folklore is full of tales
concerning “little people.” The significant similarities between
some of the Irish folk tales and those of older and more remote
areas of the world constitute a subject worthy of separate study.
The fantastic parallels are more than merely coincidental.

♦ The Voice of the Andes ♦

There exists in Peru remnants of stone work which were the
product of little people. In the highlands of Cuzco, and adjacent
to the famous ruined “fortresses” of Sacsahuaman, there are tun¬
nels, stairways, passages and remains of rooms, etc., ripped right
out of the mountain’s solid rock by glacial action, and/or some tec¬
tonic force even more powerful and destructive. The ramparts of
Sacsahuaman appear to be post-glacial; but these other works
carved in the living rock of the high Andes, were there before
a glacier sheared off the mountain tops. This writer has seen
and touched a cross-section of these tunnels.

There can be no doubt about the glacial action because the
tracks of the glacier are all around, in the form of grooves in the
stone which are typical of glacial action. In some, these grooves
are so smooth today that you can coast down them as you would
on a playground slide.

The accompanying drawing shows the proportions, shape and
size of this cross-section of a passageway. What the writer saw
was the result of a force which rent the solid rock asunder and
carried some of the pieces away.

Ask yourself what people could use a tunnel of this descrip-

236 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 237

tion—obviously only Pygmies. Even the larger races of Pygmies
would experience difficulty traversing such a tunnel. It is only
about three and a half feet high at the center and roughly three
feet at the sides.

But this is not all. On the plateau north of Sacsahuaman, at
a distance of a few hundred yards, there is a huge, ovate boulder
as big as a large house. It is marked and pitted with remnants of
chambers, passages and a stairway. It had been tom out of the
living rock by a force which would seem to have been tectonic
rather than glacial. Of the stairway only a fragment of about six
steps remains intact, the ends jagged at the points where the
rock was torn asunder. The proportions fit these already de¬
scribed. The width of the stairway is not over eighteen inches,
and the threads and risers are about six inches.

In recent years this fragment of stairway (itself a sizable
boulder) has broken off from the rest, but its original connection

CROSS SECTION OF TUNNEL

A600T s
K 18 "

therewith is obvious. As one sees them on the ground the steps
are upside down. The original risers are horizontal; the original
treads vertical. The treads can be identified by the hollows worn
into them by long usage. Such small steps would prove inconve¬
nient to people of our stature; but the stairway passage not wider
than the tunnel previously described, would be almost impossible.

Large areas of the surface around these archaeological rem¬
nants are covered with rectilinear-shaped depressions. These have
been assumed by many archaeologists to be the result of quar¬
rying. It is quite obvious, on mature consideration, that these
chambers were exposed by glacial or tectonic action, and are as¬
sociated with a one-time vast interior complex inside the moun¬
tains. It is as though you had cut through swiss cheese, disclosing
parts of the bubble cavities within.

The big rock with the fragment of stairway is at a considerable
distance from its origin and a force of tremendous power must
have put it there.

Nearby is a scrambled pile of stones, a three-dimensional jig¬
saw jumble. Some are ten to twenty feet long and heaped in such
a way that a man can crawl under or between them. These stones
also have been ripped out of the solid mountain. One face of
each stone is smooth, dressed with considerable accuracy, show¬
ing the signs of a cornice at the top, perhaps a tunnel section or
possibly part of a chamber wall. The other sides are irregular as
though blasted from a solid mass. The inescapable conclusion is
that these stones were once the sides of passages or rooms.

The workmanship which went into this internal stone structure
differs from that which created the so-called fortress of Sacsahua¬
man, which is obviously of later origin. The stones of Sacsa¬
huaman, although very large, appear to have been ground into
place in situ. Archaeologists report indications of tunnels under¬
neath the main structure of Sacsahuaman, thought to have been
used by the defenders in the time of the Spanish invasion. This
is unproven, for the tunnels and chambers which we are discuss¬
ing are obviously pre-glacial whereas Sacsahuaman is post-glacial.
The glacier’s course was such that it would have engulfed and
destroyed the rampart structures.

The race which made this internal citadel must have had

238 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 239

a well developed culture to be capable of such construction. They
must have had both good reasons for tunneling into the mountain
and efficient techniques, considering their small stature.

About two years ago, a body was disinterred high in the
Andes. It was perfectly preserved and had many ornaments. Its
size was so small that, quite automatically, it was described as
the body of a child. I wonder?

Of the world’s examples of megalithic stonework, Sacsahua-
man is outstanding, though not the largest. There are compara¬
tively few examples of extensive citadels cut into solid stone—
but there are some in Egypt, some in Asia Minor; and some
reported in Ceylon are so ancient that no one has so far been
able to date them.

A geological cataclysm, violent enough to expose and destroy
these intra-mountain workings, is so obvious and its magnitude
so great, that we are constrained to wonder whether it was the
actual formation of the mountains, rather than the glacial action,
which destroyed the original citadel. Glacial action is unmistak¬
able but not all the destruction may be attributable to the
glacier. Possibly glacial action occurred before this particular
mountain peak was raised, the glacial markings being on the
summit and not in the valley.

Furthermore, as pointed out by several writers, cities then
existed in this part of the Andes, and their vestiges show signs
of having been submerged under the sea, although they are now
from 10,000 to 13,000 feet above sea level, as indicated by recent
discoveries around the shores of Lake Titicaca and Tiahuanaco
to the south. This is clearly evidence of at least two waves of
civilization. The Incas, overrun by Pizzaro, were late-comers.
Sacsahuaman and Tiahuanaco were of pre-Inca origin.

There are many reasons for believing that the Incas were
not indigenous to the Andes region, as even archaeologists con¬
cede. Churchward, in his The Children of Mu, maintains that
there was a Mu colony on or near this site before the Andes were
pushed up, and when the Amazon basin was an inland sea.
Churchward considered this area a way-station between Atlantis
and Mu.

The original Inca group was definitely post-glacial and con¬
temporary with other elements of our second wave of civilized
development. The builders of Sacsahuaman probably preceded
the Incas by hundreds, possibly thousands of years.

Not so the builders of the internal citadel. These may have
been the people mentioned by Churchward as having occupied
the postulated submerged continent in the Pacific. This archaic
race was in the first upsurge of civilization. Or, if we hesitate to
say “first” unequivocally, at least in a wave previous to our own.

Here, then, in the high Andes, lie the indisputable remains of
a pre-Flood or pre-cataclysm Pygmy civilization, the antiquity
of which almost defies speculation. They could not have de¬
veloped the capacity to produce such works in some of the
hardest rock strata in the world, in a few decades or generations.
Moreover they were evidently “little people,” and of an extremely
ancient race. That they were intelligent and skilled is beyond
question. Whether or not they were Pygmies in the accepted
sense may be debatable.

Conceivably, the cataclysm may have been the same one that
raised, or partially raised, the Andes mountains, though probably
not the same as wreaked havoc in the Atlantic Ocean and
destroyed Atlantis.

Churchward, for reasons not entirely clear, assumes the de¬
struction of Mu occurred about 270,000 years ago, whereas the
destruction of Atlantis is said to have occurred much later, pos¬
sibly 9,000 to 13,000 years ago. Such a hypothetical chronology
is suggested by the archaeological remains in the Cuzco area,
where we have evidence of at least one and possibly two cata¬
clysms superimposed one upon the other.

The internally constructed chambers and passageways of the
high Andes appear to be of an age comparable to that attributed
to Mu by Churchward. It is conceivable that the first terrific
destruction occurred hundreds of thousands of years ago, while
the glacial action occurred in comparatively recent times. There
is much evidence to suggest that this area was one of the geo¬
graphical points where the filtration took place from the first
wave of civilization to the second. Tiahuanaco has been shown by

240 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 241

astronomical-archaeological data to have existed some 26,000
years ago. This means that the mathematical and astronomical
knowledge exhibited by the ruins existed at least 26,000 years
ago, and takes much time and skill to accumulate.

We have pointed out that the races which built megalithic
stone structures all over the world thousands of years ago, in all
probability had a means of lifting or levitating stone masses
about which we have no knowledge. The Cuzco-Tiahuanaco
area is certainly one of the areas where this knowledge existed.
I have previously postulated that this power originated with,
or in, space craft. I have no reason to change my hypothesis.

Not far away, perhaps two or three hundred miles, on the
desert coast of Peru, is one of the most puzzling and least under¬
stood of all the world’s archaeological remains: tremendous geo¬
metrical markings, some several miles in length, visible in their
interrelations only from high up in the air. They include parallel
lines, angles, triangles, spirals, and in a few cases, caricatured
animal and human forms. It seems an inescapable inference that
these figures were designed to be read from the air. If so, from
what, unless it be some flying machine?

These megaglyphs are unquestionably ancient but probably
did not precede the formation of the Andes. They probably be¬
long to the second wave of civilization. Again, then, we have
evidence of an area where a filtration from the first civilization
took place and enabled the second wave to begin its revival.

Swedish newspapers of February 21 and 22, 1953, reported
the discovery of fossil remains in India of a race of very small
stature, and a dwarf cow said to be only forty-five centimeters
or about eighteen inches high! Even assuming a mistake in trans¬
mission, and that forty-five inches, not centimeters, was intended,
we would still have a conspicuously small cow, since forty-five
inches is under four feet.

For us, however, what is remarkable here is that the discover¬
ies were made in a long pre-historic staircase. Nothing was said
about its size or dimensions but it would be worth investigating
further in the light of the passageways and staircases of “little
people” in Peru.

♦ The Voice of the Observer ♦

The intriguing theme of “little people” was tossed into the UFO
field fairly early in the hullabaloo ensuing from Kenneth Arnold’s
celebrated observation of 1947. Since then there has been a thread
of continuity relating to “little people” in the many sightings of
UFO.

In 1950 there were numbers of reports of landed “saucers”
piloted by “little people.” One declared that the wreckage of a
space ship had been picked up near Mexico City. It was said
to measure forty-six feet across, and its dead pilot was twenty-
three inches high. The man reporting this, said to be a sales
manager of high standing, had not personally seen the UFO, or
flying saucer, the term then used. He said American military men
had viewed it, and for military reasons hushed the matter up.

A lecturer is said to have stated that three or four saucers
had been discovered or captured after landing or crashing and
had been inspected by scientists. A total of thirty-four corpses,
measuring between thirty-six and forty inches in height, were
found, it was said, in three of the UFO. Sixteen men, apparently
in their late thirties, were taken from the first. Their bodies had
been charred a dark-brown color. No explanation of the charring
has been given except an inrush of air when their UFO crashed—
which is patently absurd.

Sixteen dead “little people” were said to have been found
in the second craft, but uncharred. Except for their small stature,
these men were not different from us. They appeared to be
normal, proportionately developed Homo sapiens. The third ship
had only two men in it, who were said to have died while trying
to climb out. All appeared to be well formed, which is pertinent
to their being associated with the Pygmy race and not with
dwarves or midgets.

A fourth, but empty, saucer was reported to have been found
near a government proving ground. It was stated that some field
scientists who inspected it left it to secure photographic equip-

242 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 243

ment, and on their return they saw several ‘little men” hop into
the saucer which immediately disappeared.

I strive to avoid bigotry in any matter of observational data.
But in justice to my readers, I confess that I have, until recently,
indulged a healthy scientific skepticism toward those 1950 reports.
But in the light of events in 1954 and 1955 a new assay of the
evidence may be necessary. A nationally known magazine which
has published much pro and con relative to flying saucers, de¬
voted considerable space to debunking these reports. I prefer
to reserve judgment until the facts are all in and verifiable.

A more authentic-sounding report of “little people” is the
“Steep Rock Episode.” The account was published in the Steep
Rock Echo (a house organ) in September-October of 1950.

Briefly, at about dusk on July 2, 1950, a man and his wife
saw a flying saucer land on a river in Ontario, Canada. Although
the landing itself has not been verified by other evidence, UFO
were seen in the neighborhood at about the same time by other
observers.

Ten occupants of this UFO emerged and walked on top of it.
They were about three feet, six inches tall. They were described
as moving like automata rather than living beings. They had a
peculiar gait, seeming to be able to reverse their direction with¬
out turning around.

The man of the couple who made the first sighting returned
on a subsequent day with a friend who confirmed that the UFO
was manned by “little people.”

Then there is the case of John Black and John Van Allen,
workers in a titanium mine near Marble Creek, California. On
May 20, and again on June 20, 1953, they reported sighting a
strange silver object composed of two large discs of metal twelve
feet wide and about seven feet thick, which landed on a sand
bar. They were only about a hundred feet away and could see
clearly. A being, like a broad-shouldered man, about four feet
tall, descended by a rope ladder. The “being” filled what looked
like a bucket with water and handed it to “something” inside
the UFO.

Mr. Black says he found two campfires near the sand bar

around which were five-inch footprints. Much has been done to
discredit this report. Particular emphasis has been placed on
Black’s presumably unreasonable report that this saucer had been
seen several times, always on the 20th of the month.

Nevertheless, Norman Bean, an electronics engineer in Miami,
thinks there are very good reasons to accept the report.

In Flying Saucers on the Attack, H. T. Wilkins mentions an
Oklahoma woman who tells the story of an old time “prairie
roamer” (This was in the 1880’s) who claimed to have seen a
“round thing” settle down from die sky on the bald top of a
mountain. From this “tiling,” the roamer said, two very small and
very “pretty” men had emerged.

In 1954 and 1955 there was a spate of UFO to-do in Europe,
particularly in France. Quite a number of average citizens saw
UFO, and several reported seeing ‘little people” in them.

Excitement ran so high that Life Magazine took notice and
published reports and photos putatively taken by witnesses.
Among those who reported seeing “little people” were Pierre
Lucas and Serge Pochet. Lucas said that after he saw an orange
ball fall from the sky he was startled by a small bearded figure
about four feet tall tapping him on the shoulder. Pochet said two
small figures, about three feet tall, approached him. Jean Narcy
described a helmet-shaped UFO from which a little whiskered
man in a fur coat emerged.

Life also reported an encounter by an Italian woman with
two merry little men about three feet high who descended from a
“spool”-shaped object. The lady, Signora Dainelli, said they stole
some flowers and a stocking.

Early in October, 1954, there was quite a wave of UFO news
from across the Atlantic. Reports came from Germany, Belgium,
Egypt, the Lebanon, French Cameroons, etc. In Muenster, Ger¬
many, a forty-two-year-old movie projector operator reported
that he saw a cigar-shaped object hovering about six feet above
the ground. Four creatures, three and a half feet tall, emerged.
They had thick-set bodies, oversized heads and delicate legs, and
wore rubber-like clothing.

The English newspaper, Evening News, carried a report by a

244 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

thirty-four-year-old French steel worker, Marius Dewilde of Gre¬
noble, France, who saw from his kitchen window a flying saucer
and two “little men” about three feet tall who wore enormous
helmets and “overalls.” His dog was barking madly at the
creatures. When Dewilde tried to get near, a green light shot
out of the object which rose into the air expelling black smoke.

Another account of “little men” came from Coldwater, Kansas.
The Pratt Daily Tribune carried the story on September 14, 1954.
It received better nation-wide publicity than most UFO stories
in the past few years. Fate Magazine was kind enough to lend
me one of their news clippings.

LAD SPOTS WEIRD LITTLE MEN WHO TAKE OFF IN A
“CUCUMBER SHIP”

Coldwater—John Jacob Swaim, 12-year-old Comanche County
farm boy, has created quite a stir in the southeast part of this county
with a story of having seen a gnome-like man and a weird flying
machine in a field on his father’s farm.

The story of the incident, which occurred several days ago, has just
come to light.

The boy, son of Mr. and Mrs. John Swaim, sticks by his story which
created as much excitement here as the flying saucer episodes of a few
years ago.

The boy was in a terraced field on his father’s farm about dusk one
evening, so the story goes, when he noticed something peeking over
one of the ridges at him. As he approached it, John said, the object
or individual moved behind another ridge.

He said his first thought was that one of his brothers was trying to
play a joke on him. Finally he got a good look, saw a man about three
feet tall, dressed in shining garments with two cylinders strapped to his
back.

The wide-eyed boy said the little creature went to an object about
three feet long and about the same height, which was hovering just
above the ground. John says it resembled a cucumber. The little fellow
milled around the contraption, finally climbed aboard.

The machine disappeared in the twinkling of an eye, according
to the boy’s story. There were several lights on the “cucumber ship.”

The boy, wide-eyed from excitement, was so positive in his account
of what he saw that his parents called Sheriff Floyd Hadley.

The sheriff found queer-looking footprints around a circle, just as
the boy had said. Hadley took impressions of the tracks but wouldn’t
venture an observation as to how they were caused. He sent some of

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 245

the prints to the FBI, but at Topeka Director Lou P. Richter’s office
plans no check of the story.

The boy described the feet of the strange visitor as resembling
paddles deep sea divers sometimes attach to their feet. Hadley said the
prints appeared to be about 434 inches long and 234 inches wide across
the toe.

Coming from a twelve-year-old boy, with such a vivid descrip¬
tion, this story has a ring of sincerity.

Gray Barker’s Saucerian , published in Clarksburg, West Vir¬
ginia (P.O. Box 2228), is one of the best of the saucer magazines.
Barker adds a spice of humor to his UFO-ing, and his sixty-four
page book is most readable. We thought Gray was a tobacco-
chewer until we learned that the bulge in his cheek was due to
his tongue. The Saucerian recently reviewed some reports on
“little people.” We are going to quote some of them. With sci¬
entific objectivity, Gray gives them their face value, leaving
speculations to us. Here is something from France:

MISTAKEN FOR MARTIANS

With The War of the Worlds, featuring the modern version of H.
G. Wells’ story of an invasion from Mars, playing currently in French
theatres, and the widespread tales of four-foot midgets wielding
paralyzing ray guns, it was natural that Gallic wit often turned to
jumpy nerves.

M. Pierre Langlois was a genial farmer who laughed a lot until
he ran smack into a man from Mars right in the middle of National
Road 76, in the Cher Bailey district. There, bending over some
diabolical, other-worldly engine, was a strangely luminous figure,
appearing to be half floating around it. The figure was attaching some¬
thing, a ray gun the farmer surmised, with a protruding metal claw.
Grabbing a shotgun from his house, he gave the man from Mars
both barrels.

Next day, in court, M. Langlois had a lot of explaining to do. For
the “Martian” was M. Andre Lacoste, a traveling salesman from
Bordeaux who, wearing a white raincoat, had been fixing the car¬
buretor of his auto with a monkey wrench. His figure had been
illuminated by the headlights of the car.

The panic spread. In the village of Troussey, sugar beet gatherer
Alexandre Ronnejki, who needed a haircut, was attacked by a crowd
who thought he was a hairy saucerian.

At Taint-l’Hermitage, Central France, a vineyard worker declared

246 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 247

that a neighbor, M. Neyret, looked “extraordinary” in the dusk and
beat him severely. Only after he had tom off one of M. Neyret’s ears
did the worker discover the man was not a Martian.

In the Lorraine village of Walschied women fled to a church in
hopes of obtaining divine sanctuary, as their men attacked some big
chrysanthemums they had seen glowing weirdly. The flowers, which
some one had covered with a brilliant cloth to protect them from frost,
were the men from Mars that terrorized residents said had landed there
in the garden. And there they were. Pygmy size, with heads glowing,
and just standing there motionless.

Most indicative of the attitude of earthlings toward saucer-men may
be an account from a village near Milan. A man was returning from
the movies on a bicycle when he noticed a very bright light in a sports
field. Two small shadows were moving about in the light, emitting
strange guttural sounds.

Greatly frightened, he pedalled back to town to inform the popu¬
lace. A group of people returned with him and, sure enough, there was
the weird light, but now they could see several small figures, dressed
in white pants, grey jackets and helmets, moving around the disc. In
the brilliant light they were able to see faces of dark color with large
noses, which someone said looked like elephant trunks. [Possibly a
breathing apparatus?]

With the intention of attacking the saucermen, the mob tried to
force open a gate, but when they failed they began to throw stones
and fruit. The little figures fled towards the saucer. One man tried
to sic his boxer dog onto the retreating saucerians, but the dog added
to the confusion by turning around and biting his master. . . .

Although they were greatly outnumbered by the men, saucer-
women were also reported:

A vacationing schoolmaster, M. Martin, said he met two beautiful
ladies, presumably from Mars, on the island of Oloron, off the French
Atlantic coast. One report had them about four feet tall, another five
feet seven inches, but all dispatches agreed they wore leather helmets,
gloves and boots. They borrowed M. Martin’s fountain pen and
scribbled some mysterious signs for him on a piece of paper, which he
had kept as evidence of the interplanetary encounter.

As the reports pyramided it seemed that saucers and little men
had virtually invaded France. Thousands of Frenchmen, including
meteorological experts, doctors, seamen and just plain everyday peo¬
ple, were seeing saucers, and of these many claimed to have seen
them close up, along with Pygmy pilots.

Two inhabitants of Lexignan saw a thirty-foot disc land in a field
between the villages of Lagrasse and Aude. When they approached it,
the machine flashed a blinding light on them, and made the usual

getaway. Two human forms, which looked like children, were observed
by a farmer named Henri Lehrisse to land in his courtyard in a saucer
only one yard in diameter. The machine remained in the yard only a
few seconds before flashing off again.

Our next is from Hopkinsville, Kentucky. It was taken seri¬
ously enough to make the wire services at a time of general UFO
blackout.

LITTLE MEN WITH INDIRECT LIGHTING
GLOW GREEN ALL OVER KENTUCKY FARM

Hopkinsville, Ky., August 22 (UP)—Hundreds of curiosity seekers
tramped across Cecil Sutton’s farm today after the Suttons said “little
green men” from space paid them a visit last night.

Sutton, his family and several relatives said they were up all night
fending off the little men who, they said, glowed with an inner illum¬
ination.

Kentucky state police and sheriff’s officers investigated the weird
reports, but were unable to find any trace of the “space visitors.”

“That is because they used lights all over the place,” Sutton said.
“You can’t see them except in the dark.”

When asked if they expected the space men to return tonight
Sutton said: “You can’t tell, they might be back.”

Mrs. Sutton said she was “Skittedy about it.”

The Suttons told this tale: About 7:30 Sunday evening, Bill
Taylor, a visiting relative, went to a well near the home and came
back to the house excitedly talking of a “space ship” in a nearby field.
A few minutes later a “little green man” approached the house, they
said.

“He was about three feet tall, with eyes like saucers and set about
six inches apart, with hands like claws and glowing all over,” Sutton
said.

About five feet from the door of the house he stopped and retreated
when the Suttons fired a shotgun off into the air. But soon he returned,
and the Suttons fired at him. The creature fell down from the blast,
then ran off into the fields, according to the Suttons.

Later more of the men returned and climbed about the trees and
on the roof of the house, Sutton said. After three hours, the Suttons
ran for their car and went into Hopkinsville to call the sheriff.

The police officers said there definitely was no one drinking at
the Sutton home last night.

The following from the Clarksburg Saucerian takes us to
Venezuela. Like Barker, I pass it along to you. There are, with-

248 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 249

out doubt, some grains of truth in all of this hubbub, despite the
confusion introduced by hoaxers.

FRACAS WITH SAUCERMEN

The “little men” tale to end all little men tales of 1954, came out
of Venezuela, reported in the November, 1954, APRO Bulletin.

Gustavo Gonzales has a grocery delivery service in Caracas, and
on November 28, he and his helper, Jose Ponce, were going to the
suburbs to load up. They braked their panel truck to a screaming halt
upon reaching a street leading to a sausage factory, for their way was
blocked by a luminous sphere, eight to ten feet in diameter, hovering
six feet from the middle of the street.

As they jumped out of the truck they discovered a man the size
of a dwarf coming right at them. Gonzales, the braver of the two,
grabbed the little man, intending to put him into the truck, but with
one push the creature knocked him for fifteen feet!

When he had lifted the little man, Gonzales noted the unusual
lightness of the creature. He said the feel of the body was like stiff
hair, and very hard.

Ponce was distracted from watching the struggle by two other
little men who came out of some bushes with what looked like hunks
of earth in their hands. With this new development and the way the
little man was defeating his boss, Ponce thought it was time to make
a disorderly retreat for the Traffic Inspector’s office just around the
corner.

As the other little men jumped into the sphere through an opening
in the side, the men Gonzales had grappled with then leaped into the
air six feet and came at him, his eyes glowing. Gonzales pulled his
scout knife on the creature and as it approached him with claws
extended he made a stab at its shoulder. But to his surprise the blade
slid off as if he was striking metal.

By that time one of the little men who had fled to the saucer
emerged, apparently to break up the fracas, carrying a tube-like affair
which he pointed at Gonzales. The weapon shot a blinding light at
Gonzales, incapacitating him momentarily, but he did see both
creatures jump into the sphere which shot up into the air and was
soon lost to sight.

Overcome with exhaustion and fright, the two men related their
stories to unbelieving policemen, who thought they were drunk. But
they examined the two men, found them sober and took them to a
doctor who gave them sedatives and kept Gonzales under observation,
worried about the strange reddish mark on his side, the only proof of
his tussle with a saucerman.

Skeptics were more credulous when they heard a similar story

related by another man, a typesetter, who had been afraid to tell it
for fear of ridicule. He was in his launch in the Delta district on
November 4, when he saw a luminous sphere suspended off the
ground a little way from the shore. He approached the spot, tied up
the launch, and while some Indians with him fled in terror he hid
behind the bushes and rocks to watch.

He saw three or four little men making repeated trips to the
sphere with handfuls of dirt.

The APRO organization, usually extremely conservative about
spectacular sightings, has stated they feel the story is true, and the
original accounts do seem to have a very true ring about them.

And so the accounts went, all over the world. It was evident that
many of them were hoaxes, or the garbled narratives of over-excited,
over-imaginative people. But as time went by it was difficult to dis¬
count all of the stories. There was bound to be fire somewhere!

♦ The Voice of Cincinnati ♦

The first task of an honest and objective scientific investigation
is to gather all available facts for classification, analysis and in¬
terpretation. Scientists of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries
followed this course rigorously. They recorded much information
which they were then unable to classify, much less understand.
This left us a vast treasury of information for studying UFO.
Today, unfortunately, science rejects data which are not in con¬
formity with its artificial restrictions. “Erratics” like UFO data
require a great deal more imagination to cope with than “accep¬
table data.” In science, today, there is an even more intensive
concern with the quantitative, rather than the qualitative. For
the benefit of future research, I entreat each reader to forward
as much information on “erratics” as he can possibly find. This
material will be assembled, and eventually offered to the Library
of Congress, for its value in the greatest problem of the twentieth
century, and probably of human history. The Library Research
Group can be reached through the publisher of this book.

As an example of the type of objective reporting which all
but died out with the pompous growth of the complacency of
modem science, I present the following courageously published

250 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

ETHNOLOGY SPEAKS 251

by my good friend L. H. Stringfield, who publishes a news sheet
called CR1FO Orbit, at 7017 Britton Avenue, Cincinnati 27,
Ohio. It provides factual coverage of a field which newspaper
editors fear. It publishes evidence for your appraisal and criticism.

I try to do likewise, and I close the case as presented by eth¬
nology with a comprehensive tally of current events.

Case 101, Northwest Cincinnati, Ohio , August 25, 1955: A huge
object described as “bright, round and tannish in color” was witnessed
by scores of people near the Femald atomic plant north of Cincinnati.
Two county policemen in separate cruisers, Sgt. Weber and Patrolman
Ernest Neher, radioed dispatcher Thomas McGuinn at approximately
the same time—10:40 p.m. —that they were watching the object. Sgt.
Weber estimated the altitude at 5,000 feet, directly above the plant.
Same night, four teenagers, in the vicinity, were terrified by a “little
green man.”*

THE CONTROVERSIAL LITTLE GREEN MEN AND THE
TINGLING FACTS

Like their craft, the flying saucer, the little green men recently
have come in for a public showdown. However, amid the sneers and
chuckles, are a few shocking facts. Studying these, we advise our
readers to stop laughing.

First, we have received numerous reports of “saucer” landings and
little men from points of UFO concentration. Among these and not
to be dismissed are the incidents occurring in Venezuela, Brazil,
Argentina, and from new evidence, those occurring in France and
Italy, in the later part of the summer of 1954. Although the newswires
have hushed the stories emanating from the USA, we know of several
incidents where the facts corroborate each other. In all known inci¬
dents the witnesses, unfortunately, have been dubbed lunatics—a
subjective reason why more stories have never been related, espe¬
cially so, where prominent people are involved!

The Cincinnati story is this month’s feature not because of dearth
of material. Nor is it featured because of the UFO concentrations,
which alone is interesting. Our purpose is one of greater importance,
for the facts show that the fringe areas of Cincinnati have been a
repeated site for landings and the appearance of little green men.
The officials are aware of this new menace, and we know that more
than a handful of Cincinnatians have become more than passively
alarmed.

Before the Hopkinsville 'Tittle green men” story broke over the
nation, CRIFO had silently gathered some unpublished facts concem-

0 Later learned three policemen, in separate cruisers, witnessed the object.

ing such ogrish encounters near Cincinnati. As it is our policy not to
publish names in connection with many of these events we should like
to cite a case involving a prominent businessman, living in Loveland.
Occurring several weeks ago, this person, who is a non-drinker and a
churchgoer (we must add these virtues, it seems, for credibility) saw
four “strange little men about three feet tall” under a certain bridge. He
reported the bizarre affair to the police and we understand that an
armed guard was placed there. A similar event supposedly took place
near Batavia east of Cincinnati.

The Hopkinsville incident broke after these events, and no two
parties knew each other. But, if the Hopkinsville case is not sufficient
evidence, of verdi-sapiens extraterrestrials being now amongst us on
earth, we have still another case that erases any doubt in our mind.
We cannot even hint as to the identity of these people, but we can
say that it involved three persons holding crucial positions in the city.
The incident occurred near Indianapolis, July, 1954. The encounter
was enough to terrify these people and break up their planned vacation!

But, we have more recent evidence and each story lends credence
to the other for we have checked each person involved and got their
personal account. One case occurring near Stockton, Ga., on July 2,
1955, terrified Mrs. Margaret Symmonds who at the time was driving
to Florida. The hours was 3:30 a.m., and in the back seat of her car
her husband lay asleep. Suddenly Mrs. Symmonds jerked the car away
to the side of the road, almost careening. She screamed, awakening
her husband and drove away as fast as she could.

To CRIFO, Mrs. Symmonds explains that she saw four little men
glowing green. She said their eyes were huge and piercing, their faces
dark. They wore some strange-looking garment like a “cape” and were
carrying a rod that looked metallic in the reflection of the car’s lights.
“They did not move at first,” she said, “but as the car approached, one
moved one step backwards.” They looked hideous, said Mrs. Sym¬
monds. Her doubting husband wanted to return to the scene, but
Mrs. Symmonds said she was “too petrified.”

Mr. Symmonds admits that his wife was terrified by something
and was awakened by the car spinning to the side of the road.

The most recent “little men” episode occurred near Greenhills
August 25, the same evening when the huge object was seen hovering
over Femald atomic plant. Four teenagers, interviewed by CRIFO,
told of their harrowing experience with a little green man, standing
by some bushes. All were “certain” as to what they had seen, explain¬
ing that the car’s fights shone directly on the creature. They all agreed
that the little man, about three or four feet tall, had large, bright
“yellow” eyes, a dark face behind, and a “sort of shimmering green
body.” The creature wore an odd garment and they saw a “claw-like”

252 THE EXPANDING CASE FOR THE UFO

hand. One witness said that the biped took three steps toward the car,
but no one waited to see what would happen. The driver of the car.
Bill Wallace, 18 years of age, drove away in a state of terror. Without
hesitation they informed the police department of their encounter and
the area was later investigated, but nothing in the way of evidence
was found. Wallace’s mother whom we later interviewed, claimed that
her son had never been so frightened. He was shaking when he came
home and “locked all the doors.” One of the girls in the group became
hysterical. (Reprinted by permission of CRIFO Orbit.)

Ethnology rests its case.

EPILOGUE

The background of the UFO is as broad, as deep and as old
as the background of mankind. It may very well be broader and
older. It is certain that we find associations, direct and indirect,
between all phases of our cultural life and science (with the pos¬
sible exception of electronics) on the one hand, and the realm of
the UFO on the other hand.

The more I study and ponder this unlimited subject of Un¬
identified Flying Objects, the more I become convinced that the
background of the UFO is the background of humanity—pro¬
vided only that we recognize the observable facts for what they
really are, and open-mindedly admit them as integral parts of our
universal environment.

253